6sn1123 1aa00 0ca2 LT Modul 50a Simodrive 611 Siemens Manual

SIMODRIVE 611 Analog System Transistor PWM Inverters for AC Feed Drives and AC Main Spindle Drives
Installation and Startup Guide 04.97 Edition
Service Documentation
Foreword
General information
AL
SIMODRIVE 611 Analog System Transistor PWM Inverters for AC Feed Drives and AC Main Spindle Drives
StartUp Guide Service Documentation
Supply infeed
NE
Feed modules Feed modules, resolver control
VS
VR
Main spindle modules
HS
Induction motor modules
AM
Spare parts
ES
Complete index
Valid for
Equipment series 6SN11
04.97 Edition
Overview of SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FMNC Documentation (08.97)

General Documentation
SINUMERIK SIROTEC SIMODRIVE
Accessories
User Documentation
SINUMERIK
840D/810D/ FMNC
SINUMERIK
840D/810D/ FMNC/611
SINUMERIK
840D/810D/ FMNC
SINUMERIK
840D/810D/ FMNC
SINUMERIK
840D/810D/ FMNC
Brochure
Catalog Ordering Info. NC 60.1 Technical Info. NC 60.2
Catalog Accessories NCZ
AUTOTURN Operators Guide Short Guide Unit Operator Panel Programming (Part 1) HPU Setup (Part 2)
Diagnostics Guide
User Documentation
Manufacturer / Service Documentation
SINUMERIK
840D/810D/ FMNC
SINUMERIK
840D/810D/ FMNC
SINUMERIK
810D
SINUMERIK
810D
SINUMERIK
840D/810D/ FMNC
SINUMERIK
840D/810D
Operators Guide Short Guide Operators Guide
Programming Guide Short Guide Fundamentals Advanced Cycles Measuring Cycles
Operators Guide MANUALTURN SHOPMILL
Description of Functions MANUALTURN SHOPMILL
Description of Functions Synchronous actions Wood, Glass, Ceramics
Description of Functions Computer LInk
SINUMERIK
SINUMERIK
840D/810D/ FMNC
SIMODRIVE SINUMERIK
611D 840D/810D
SINUMERIK
840D/810D/ FMNC
SINUMERIK
840D/810D/ FMNC
SINUMERIK
840D/810D/ FMNC
Manual Configuring (HW) FMNC 810D 840D
Manual Operator Components (HW)
Description of Functions Drive Functions
Description of Functions Basic Machine Extended Functions Special Functions
Configuring KIt MMC100/101 Configuring Syntax Development Kit
Screen Kit MMC100/101 SW Update and Configuration
SINUMERIK
840D/810D
SINUMERIK
840D/810D/ FMNC
SINUMERIK
840D/810D
SIMODRIVE SINUMERIK
SINUMERIK
840D
SIMODRIVE SINUMERIK
SIMODRIVE SINUMERIK
840D/810D FMNC 611D
Description of Functions Tool Management
Description of Functions Operator Interface OP 030
Description of Functions Operator Interface HPU
Description of Functions SINUMERIK Safety Integrated
Description of Functions Digitizing
Electronic Documentation
SINUMERIK SIMODRIVE 840D/810D/ FMNC 611, Motors
Installation & Start-up Guide FMNC 810D 840D/611D
Lists
DOC ON CD The SINUMERIK System
3ls
SIMODRIVE documentation
Edition coding Brief details of this edition and previous editions are listed below The status of each edition is shown by the code in the Remarks column.
Status code in the Remarks column:

A . . . . New documentation. B . . . . Unrevised reprint with new Order No. C . . . . Revised edition with new status If factual changes have been made on the page since the last edition, this is indicated by a new edition coding in the header on that page.
07.94 10.94 12.94 03.96

04.97
6SN11970AA600BP0 6SN11970AA600BP1 6SN11970AA600BP2 6SN11970AA600BP3

6SN11970AA600BP4
A C C C
C
Dieses Buch ist Bestandteil der Dokumentation auf CDROM (DOCONCD)

09.97 09.97 09.97 09.97 09.97 09.97 6FC5 1986CA000AG0 (840C Read) 6FC5 1986CB000AG0 (840C Print) 6FC5 1986CC000AG0 (840C Net) 6FC5 2984CA000AG0 (840D Read) 6FC5 2984CB000AG0 (840D Print) 6FC5 2984CC000AG0 (840D Net) C C C C C C
Functions may be executable in the control but are not described in this documentation. No claims can be made on these functions if included with a new shipment or when involved with service. This publication was produced on Interleaf V 5.4 The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its contents is not permitted without express written authority. Offenders will be liable for damages. All rights, including rights created by patent grant or registration of a utility model or design, are reserved.
We have checked the contents of this document to ensure that they coincide with the described hardware and software. The information in this document is regularly checked and necessary corrections are included in reprints. We are thankful for any recommendations for improvement. Subject to change without prior notice.
Siemens AG 1994, 1996, 1997 All Rights reserved.
Order No. 6SN11970AA600BP4 Printed in the Federal Republic of Germany
SiemensAktiengesellschaft
Siemens AG 1997 All Rights reserved
07.94
Definitions
Qualified personal For the purpose of these Instructions and product labels, a qualified person is someone who is familiar with the installation, mounting, startup and operation of the equipment and the hazards involved. He or she must have the following qualifications:
S Trained and authorized to energize, deenergize, clear, ground and tag circuits and equipment in accordance with established safety procedures.
S Trained in the proper care and use of protective equipment in accordance

with established safety procedures.
S Trained in rendering first aid.

Danger This symbol in the document indicates death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage will result if proper precautions are not taken.
Warning This symbol appears in the document, if death, severe personal injury or property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
Caution This symbol appears in the document indicating that minor personal injury or material damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
Wichtig This symbol appears in the documentation if a particular issue is significant.
Note For the purposes of these Instructions, Note indicates information about the product or the respective part of the Instruction Manual which is essential to highlight.
ii
Siemens AG 1997 All Rights reserved SIMODRIVE 611A Installation and StartUp Guide/IAA/04.97 Edition
07.94
Warning Operational electrical equipment has parts and components which are at hazardous voltage levels. Incorrect handling of these units, i. e. not observing the warning information, can therefore lead to death, severe bodily injury or significant material damage. Only appropriately qualified personal may commission/startup this equipment. This personal must have indepth knowledge regarding all of the warning information and service measures according to this Manual. Perfect, save and reliable operation of this equipment assumes that it has been professionally transported, stored, mounted and installed as well as careful operator control and service. Hazardous axis motion can occur when working with the equipment.
Note When handling cables observe the following
S they must not be damaged S they must not be strained and S they must not come into contact with rotating components.
Note It is not permissible to connect SIMODRIVE equipment to a supply system with ELCBs (this restriction is permitted according to DIN VDE 0160, Section 6.5). When operational, protection against direct contact is provided in a form to allow the unit to be used in enclosed electrical equipment rooms (DIN VDE 0558 Part 1 / 07.87, Section 5.4.3.2.4). In compliance with DIN VDE 0160 / 05.88, all SIMODRIVE units are subject to a highvoltage test at the time of routine testing. If the electrical equipment of industrial tools is subject to a highvoltage test, all connections must be disconnected so that sensitive electronic components in the SIMODRIVE converter are not damage (permissible according to DIN VDE 0113 / 06.93, Part 1, Section 20.4).
Warning Startup/commissioning is absolutely prohibited until it has been ensured that the machine in which the components described here are to be installed, fulfills the regulations/specifications of the Directive 89/392/EWG.
iii
07.94
Warning The information and instructions in all of the documentation supplied and any other instructions must always be observed to eliminate hazardous situations and damage.
S For special versions of the machines and equipment, the information in the
associated catalogs and quotations applies.
S Further, all of the relevant national, local and plant/systemspecific

regulations and specifications must be taken into account.
S All work should be undertaken with the system in a novoltage

condition!
Warning Before commissioning 611D, it should be checked that the encoder cable does not have a ground fault. If ground faults occur, for loads which exert a force on the drive, uncontrolled movement could occur. This no longer occurs for 6SN11180DV2V0AA0, Version B.
iv
07.94
ESD information
Electro Static Devices Components which can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge are individual components, integrated circuits, or boards, which when handled, tested, or transported, could be destroyed by electrostatic fields or electrostatic discharge. These components are designated as ESDS (ElectroStatic Discharge Sensitive Devices). Handling ESDS boards:
S The human body, working area and packing should be well grounded when
handling ESDS components!
S Electronic boards should only be touched when absolutely necessary. S Components may only be touched, if
you are continuously grounded through an ESDS wristlet, you are wearing ESDS shoes or ESDS shoe grounding strips in conjunction with an ESDS floor surface.
S Boards may only be placed on conductive surfaces

(desk with ESDS surface, conductive ESDS foam rubber, ESDS packing bag, ESDS transport containers).
S Boards may not be brought close to data terminals, monitors or television

sets (a minimum of 10 cm should be kept between the board and the screen).
S Boards may not be brought into contact with materials which can be chargedup and which are highly insulating, e. g. plastic foils, insulating desktops, articles of clothing manufactured from manmade fibers.
S Measuring work may only be carried out on the boards if

the measuring equipment is grounded (e. g. via the protective conductor) or for floating measuring equipment, the probe is briefly discharged before making measurements (e. g. a bare control housing is touched).
S Only hold the control modules at the front panel
Note Startup software is available for startingup/commissioning the main spindle and induction motor modules. Startup software Order No.: 6SN11532AX10VABV Documentation Order No.: 6SN11970AA300VPV
03.96 07.94
SINUMERIK and SIMODRIVE

Enhanced productivity as a result of fast, reliable commissioning
Handling
Sophisticated industrial electronics, as are involved here, have to be handled especially carefully. We regularly evaluate and investigate equipment which is returned and in so doing we have identified some of the main fault causes, which in some cases results from incorrect handling during commissioning and troubleshooting. The following check list should help you to simply commission the components we have supplied and guarantee a high availability when used in conjunction with your product or equipment.
Check list
S Observe all of the ESD measures when handling components. S Tightenup all bolts and screws to the specified torque. Pay special attention to the DC link bolt connections (1.8 Nm tightening torque).
S Correctly insert all connectors and lock/screw into place. S Screw the control components into the power module. S Observe the poweron sequence in the Planning Guide.
If the unit is frequently powereddown and up, the DC link charge circuit is lockedout. The DC link can only be charged again after it has cooled down for several minutes with the supply off.
S Are there line supply/motor contactors connected to the drive converter?

These are only switched in a nocurrent condition.
S Ground all components and connect all of the shields. Connection X131 is
grounded.
S Observe the load capability of the central power supply. S Only discharge the unit at the DC link buses through a minimum of 10 . S In operation, units with hard disks may only be stressed with a of max. 1 g
(read/write error; defective).
S Use the correct software for the particular unit. S Are OEM components (ISA/PCMCIA card) used? Their current drain must
lie within the specified values.
S CRT monitors may not be subject to magnetic fields (e.g. power supply unit
coils).
S When commissioning and fault finding, always proceed in a modular step

bystep fashion.This means: First commission the central controller and line supply module, then connectup and commission the components one after another.
vi
03.96 07.94
S The units are designed for the specified mechanical, climatic and electrical
ambient conditions. None of the limit values may be exceeded, neither in operation nor during transport. Please pay specific attention to the following: line supply conditions pollutants damaging gases climatic ambient conditions storage/transport shock stressing vibration stressing ambient temperature
Further information
Further detailed information is provided in the Planning Guides and Installation Startup Guides associated with our products. J
vii
03.96 07.94
viii
AL
General information (AL)
Permissible combinations of inverter modules and control cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AL/1-3
ALi
07.94
AL
ALii
04.97 07.94
1 Permissible combinations of inverter modules and control modules General (AL)
AL
Permissible combinations of inverter modules and control cards
1
Induction motor control, anal anal. speed, fixed setp., mot.po Main spindle drive control, anal Induction motor control, analog
_____ _____ IM: 3/3/3 A IM: 5/5/8 A IM: 60/80/ 102A IM: 85/111/ 127A
Table 1-1
Selection table to set the current controller referred to the resulting inverter currents
Feed/main spindle controls with analog setpoint interface
Feed drive resolver contr.,anal. 1axis, standard interface
Feed drive control, analog 1axis, userfriendly interface
Main spindle drive control, ana no direct meas. system 6SN11210BA110AA0
Feed drive control, analog 2axis, standard interface
6SN11210BA120AA0y
6SN11180BK110AA0
Induction motor control, anal. Fixed setpoints, mot. pot. 6SN11220BA110AA0
SIMODRIVE 611 components
Main spindle drive control, ana dir. meas. system, TTL signals
Main spindle drive contr., anal. external position output
6SN11180AA110AA0
6SN11210BA130AA0
6SN11210BA110AA1
6SN11180AD110AA0
Parameter board, feed drive, analog user friendly 6SN11140AA010AA0 Main spindle option, feed drive, analog, user friendly 6SN11140AA020AAV 8A inverter module 6SN112V1AA0V0HAV 15A inverter module 6SN112V1AA0V0AAV 25A inverter module 6SN112V1AA0V0BAV 50A inverter module 6SN112V1AA0V0CAV 80A inverter module 6SN112V1AA0V0DAV 120A inverter module
necessary
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
possible
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
FD: 4/8A
FD: 4/8A
_____
FDR: 3/6A
_____
_____
_____
_____
IM: 3/3/3 A
IM: 3/3/3 A
_____
FD: 7.5/15A
FD: 7.5/15A
_____
FDR: 5/10A
_____
_____
_____
_____
IM: 5/5/8 A
IM: 5/5/8 A
_____
FD: 12.5/25A
FD: 12.5/25A
_____
FDR: 9/18A
_____
_____
_____
_____
IM: 8/10/16A
IM: 8/10/16A
_____
IM: 8/10/16A
FD: 25/50A
FD: 25/50A
_____
FDR: 18/36A
_____
MSD: 24/32/32A
MSD: 24/32/32A
MSD: 24/32/32A
IM: 24/32/32A
IM: 24/32/32A
MSD: 24/32/32A
IM: 24/32/32A
FD: 40/80A
FD: 40/80A
_____
FDR: 28/56A
_____
MSD: 30/40/51A
MSD: 30/40/51A
MSD: 30/40/51A
IM: 30/40/51A
IM: 30/40/51A
MSD: 30/40/51A
IM: 30/40/51A
_____ 6SN112V1AA0V0GAV
_____
_____
_____
_____
MSD: 45/60/76A
MSD: 45/60/76A
MSD: 45/60/76A
IM: 45/60/76A
IM: 45/60/76A
MSD: 45/60/76A
IM: 45/60/76A
108A inverter module

_____ _____ _____ _____ _____
6SN112V1AA0V0LAV 160A inverter module 6SN112V1AA0V0EAV 200A inverter module

FD: 100/200A FD: 100/200A _____ _____ _____ FD: 80/160A FD: 80/160A _____ _____ _____
MSD: 45/60/76A
MSD: 45/60/76A
MSD: 45/60/76A
IM: 45/60/76A
IM: 45/60/76A
MSD: 45/60/76A
IM: 45/60/76A
MSD: 60/80/ 102A
MSD: 60/80/ 102A
MSD: 60/80/ 102A
IM: 60/80/ 102A
IM: 60/80/ 102A
MSD: 60/80/ 102A
6SN112V1AA0V0FAV
MSD: 85/111/ 127A
MSD: 85/111/ 127A
MSD: 85/111/ 127A
IM: 85/111/ 127A
IM: 85/111/ 127A
MSD: 85/111/ 127A
AL/1-3
6SN11220BA110AA1
6SN11180AE110AA0
6SN11180BJ110AA0
6SN11220BA120AA
04.97 07.94
AL
Table 1-1 Selection table to set the current controller referred to the resulting inverter currents
Vorschub/Hauptspindelregelungen mit analoger Sollwertschnittstelle
Induction motor control, anal anal. speed, fixed setp., mot.pot.
Main spindle drive control, anal no direct meas. system 6SN11210BA110AA0
Main spindle drive control, anal dir. meas. system, TTL signals
Main spindle drive contr., anal. external position output
Feed drive control, analog 1axis, userfriendly interface
Main spindle drive control, anal
6SN11210BA120AA0y
6SN11180BK110AA0
Induction motor control, anal. Fixed setpoints, mot. pot. 6SN11220BA110AA0
SIMODRIVE 611 components
Induction motor control, analog

_____ _____ _____ _____
6SN11180AA110AA0
6SN11210BA130AA0
6SN11210BA110AA1
6SN11180AD110AA0
200A inverter module pipe connection 6SN112V1AA0V0FAV 300A inverter module
FD: 100/200A
FD: 100/200A
_____
_____
_____
MSD: 85/110/12 7A
MSD: 85/110/12 7A
MSD: 85/110/12 7A
IM: 85/110/12 7A
IM: 85/110/12 7A
IM: 85/110/12 7A
IM: 85/110/12 7A
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
6SN112V1AA0V0JAV 400A inverter module

_____ _____ _____ _____ _____
MSD: 120/150/1 93A
MSD: 120/150/1 93A
MSD: 120/150/1 93A
IM: 120/150/1 93A
IM: 120/150/1 93A
IM: 120/150/1 93A
IM: 120/150/1 93A
6SN112V1AA0V0KA0 2x8A inverter module

_____ _____
MSD: 200/250/2 57A
MSD: 200/250/2 57A
MSD: 200/250/2 57A
IM: 200/250/2 57A
IM: 200/250/2 57A
IM: 200/250/2 57A
IM: 200/250/2 57A
6SN112V1AB0V0HA0 2x15A inverter module

_____ _____
FD: 2x4/8A
_____
FDR: 2x3/6A
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
6SN112V1AB0V0AA0 2x25A inverter module

_____ _____
FD: 2x7.5/15A
_____
FDR: 2x5/10A
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
6SN112V1AB0V0BAV 2x50A inverter module

_____ _____
FD: 2x12.5/25 A
_____
FDR: 2x9/18A
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
6SN112V1AB0V0CAV
FD: 2x25/50A
_____
FDR: 2x18/36A
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
_____
This StartUp Guide is valid for the following drive modules: 6SN11301AA110VA0 6SN11301AA120VA0 6SN11301AD110VA0 6SN11301AE110VA0 6SN11351BA1V0VA0 6SN11401BA1V0VA0 1axis feed drive module, userfriendly interface 1axis feed drive module, userfriendly interface with main spindle drive option 1axis feed drive module, standard interface 2axis feed drive module, standard interface MSD module IM module
AL/1-4
6SN11220BA110AA1
6SN11180AE110AA0
6SN11180BJ110AA0
6SN11220BA120AA
04.97 07.94
AL
Note The document describes all of the steps necessary to commission an installed SIMODRIVE drive group. Please refer to the associated Planning Guides for additional technical information, e.g. regarding
S ambient conditions S recommended circuits S connecting diagrams S dimension sheets/dimension drawings

Please refer to the associate Planning Guide: SIMODRIVE 611 Transistor PWM Inverters for AC Feed Drives and AC Main Spindle Drives Order No.: 6SN11970AA000VPV SIMODRIVE AC Motors for Feed and Main Spindle Drives Order No.: 6SN11970AA200VPV
AL/1-5
04.97 07.94
AL
AL/1-6
Supply infeed (NE)

NE
1 2 Standard settings, NE modules (UE and I/R modules), monitoring and pulsed resistor modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance and diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1 3 Terminals and relay functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NE/1-3 NE/2-7 NE/2-8 NE/3-11 NE/3-12 NE/3-14
Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1 3.2 Connecting terminals NE, monitoring and pulsed resistor modules . . Connecting terminals, UE module 5/10 kW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NEi
07.94
NE
NEii
04.97 07.94
1 Standard settings, NE modules, monitoring and pulsed resistor modules Supply infeed (NE)
Standard settings, NE modules (UE and I/R modules), monitoring and pulsed resistor modules
NE
Wichtig
Observe the information for sinusoidal current control for I/R modules!
A switch S1 is provided on the upper side of the NE and monitoring module to set the following functions:
ON:
S1
OFF: Vsupply=415V"10% VDC link=600 V1) Ready signal Regenerative feedback on Standard, refer to S1.1 Control infeed
Vsupply=415V"10% VDClink=625 V1) 1 Fault message Regen. feedback off1) VSupply=480V+6%10% Controlled infeed off Sinusoidal current control 2 3 4
5 6
Squarewave current control
Standard setting
Fig. 1-1
DIL switch S1
Wichtig For I/R modules Order No. 6SN114V1VV0V0VV1 the basic setting is for sinusoidal control (closedloop). Observe the information/instructions, Page NE13!
Wichtig
Before the equipment is poweredup or down using the main switch or a line contactor, terminal 63 (pulse enable) and/or terminal 48 (start terminal, contactor control) should be deenergized or disconnected!
1)
Only possible for I/R modules, monitoring thresholds are increased for all NE modules
NE/1-3
04.97 07.94
Switch S 1.1 :
OFF:
NE
ON:
I/R module Vsupply =400V"10%; VDC link=600V UE module Vsupply =400V"10%; VDC link=1.35*Vsupply monitoring thresholds: (I/R, UE, monitoring modules) pulsed resistor on =644V; pulsed resistor off =618V VDC link>> =710V; I/R module Vsupply =415V"10%; VDC link=625V UE module Vsupply =415V"10%; VDC link=1.35*Vsupply Monitoring thresholds: (I/R, UE, monitoring modules) pulsed resistor on =670V; pulsed resistor off =640V VDC link>> =740V;
Switch S 1.2 :
OFF:
Ready signal (X111 ready relay) For S1.2=OFF, the relay switches if the following conditions are fulfilled: internal main contactor CLOSED (terminals NS1NS2 connected,
terminal 48 enabled) terminal 63,64=ENERGIZED no fault present (also not on feed drive 611A Standard, or 611D drives) feed drive with standard interface or resolver for setting Ready is enabled (terminals 663,65) Fault message (X111 ready relay) For S1.2=ON, the relay switches if the following conditions are fulfilled: internal main contactor CLOSED (terminals NS1NS2 connected,
ON:
terminal 48 enabled) no fault present (also not on feed drive 611A Standard, or 611D drives) feed drive with standard interface or resolver for setting ready is enabled (terminals 663,65);
Switch S 1.3 :
OFF:
ON:
Standard setting, regenerative feedback active I/R modules are capable of regenerative feedback UE modules: The pulsed resistor in the module is effective Regenerative feedback switchedout (disabled) I/R module: Regenerative feedback operation is inhibited UE modules: The pulsed resistor in the module is not effective Comment: This function is only effective for UE 10 kW from MLFB (Order No.): 6SN11461AC000AA1 (however, not for UE
28kW)
Switch S 1.4 :
OFF: ON:
Standard setting for all NE modules, refer to S1.1 Vsupply =480V+6%10%; VDC link=1.35*Vsupply in the infeed direction Monitoring thresholds: (I/R, UE, monitoring modules) pulsed resistor on =744V; pulsed resistor off =718V VDC link>> =795V.
Comment: Uncontrolled operation in the infeed direction. (only valid for Order No. 6SN114V1VV0V0VV1
NE/1-4
04.97 07.94
Note
Only in conjunction with power modules, Order No. (6SN114V1VV0V0VV1). For motors with shaft height <100: Utilization max. up to 60 k values. Please observe the Planning Guide, Motors. S1.4 ON overwrites the functions of S1.5 and S1.1 .
NE
Switch S 1.5 :
This function is only available in conjunction with I/R modules Order No. :6SN114V1VV0V0VV1 OFF: Standard setting, controlled infeed active.
ON:
Uncontrolled operation in the infeed direction VDC link=1.35*Vsupply . Regenerative feedback operation is initiated at V DC link=600 or 625V, depending on the setting of S1.1 .
Switch S 1.6 :
OFF:
Squarewave current control (squarewave current is drawn from the line supply) This function is only available in conjunction with I/R modules 6SN114V1VV0V0VV1 Sinusoidal current control (sinusoidal current is drawn from the line supply)
ON:
Sinusoidal current is only permissible if the following secondary conditions are fulfilled : I/R 16 kW 6SN114V 1BV010BA1 HF reactor 16 kW 6SN1111 0AA000BA0 Line filter for sinusoidal current 1) 16 kW 6SN1111 0AA012BA0 I/R 36 kW 6SN114V 1BV020CA1 HF reactor 36 kW 6SN1111 0AA000CA0 Line filter for sinusoidal current 1) 36 kW 6SN1111 0AA012CA0 I/R 55 kW 6SN114V 1BV0V0DA1 HF reactor 55 kW 6SN1111 0AA000DA0 Line filter for sinusoidal current 1) 55 kW 6SN1111 0AA012DA0 I/R 80 kW 6SN114V 1BB000EA1 HF reactor 80kW 6SN1111 0AA001EA0 Line filter for sinusoidal current 1) 80 kW 6SN1111 0AA012EA0 I/R 120 kW 6SN114V 1BB010FA1 HF reactor 120kW 6SN1111 0AA001FA0 Line filter for sinusoidal current 1) 120 kW 6SN1111 0AA012FA0
Wichtig
For all of the combinations not listed here, only squarewave current control is permissible.
1)
In the sinusoidal line supply filters, contrary to the squarewave current filter modules, there is no HF commutating reactor. The HF commutating reactor must be separately mounted.
NE/1-5
04.97 07.94
NE
NE/1-6
04.97 07.94
2 Service and diagnostics Supply infeed (NE)
Service and diagnostics
2
2 4 6
NE
Display elements of the monitoring and NE modules
1 3 5
1 LED, red 2 LED, red 3 LED green 4 LED yellow 5 LED, red
6 LED red
15 V electronics power supply faulted 5 V voltage level faulted external enable signals not available (terminal 63 and/or terminal 64 missing) DC link charged line supply fault (single or multiphase supply failure at the terminals U1, V1, W1) 1) commutating reactor either not available or incorrectly selected, fault level of the line supply or transformer too low DC link overvoltage possible causes: Regenerative feedback off, settingup operation, line supply fault, for UE pulsedresistor not operational, line supply voltage too high, dynamic overload condition
Effects: 1 red LED bright: Pulses for the complete drive group are canceled 2 red LED bright: Pulses for the complete drive group are canceled 4 yellow LED dark: xxxx 5 red LED bright: 1) Only the I/R module pulses are canceled (regenerative feedback no longer possible. Axes first continue to run. Ready relay dropsout 6 red LED bright: Pulses for the complete drive group are canceled
_________ 1) Line supply fault identification time approx. 30ms Line supply fault is identified for a threephase voltage < 280V. For 1phase supply failure, the drive axes pulses are canceled after approx. 1 min. (latched signal) valid for Order No. 6SN1114V1VV0V0VV1
NE/2-7
2.1 Terminal and relay functions Supply infeed (NE)
04.97 07.94
2.1
S
Terminals and relay functions

X111: READY RELAY: terminals 72 73.1: NO contact terminals 73.2 74: NC contact in the quiescent state in the quiescent state
NE
For S1.2=OFF, the relay switches if the following conditions are fulfilled: internal main contactor CLOSED (terminals NS1NS2 connected, terminal 48 enabled) terminals 63, 64 =ENERGIZED no fault present (also not on feed drive 611A Standard, or 611D drives) feed drive with Standard interface or resolver is enabled for the ready setting (terminals 663, 65) For S1.2=ON, the relay switches if the following conditions are fulfilled: internal main contactor CLOSED (terminal NS1NS2 connected, terminal 48 enabled) no fault present (also not on feed drive 611A Standard, and 611D drives) feed drive with Standard interface or resolver enabled for this ready setting (terminals 663, 65).
X121: I2t_alarm and motor overtemperature: terminal 5.1 5.2: NO contact in the quiescent state terminal 5.1 5.3: NC contact in the quiescent state This relay switches, if: the > heatsink temperature monitoring responds at the I/R the > motor temperature monitoring responds at the 611D feed drive > heatsink temperature monitoring responds at the feed drive 611A userfriendly > motor temperature monitoring responds > heatsink temperature monitoring responds > I2ttemperature monitoring responds (nonlatching) at 611A Standard > Motor temperature monitoring responds > heatsink temperature monitoring responds X171: Terminal NS1NS2 (coil circuit of the internal line supply and precharging contactor): is used to electrically isolate from the line supply (signal contact, terminals 111213 must be interrogated) may only be switched if terminal 48 is opencircuit (without any restriction from Order No. 6SN114V1VV010VVV for 10, 16 and 55kW, from Order No. 6SN114V1VV020VVV for 36kW, all 80 and 120kW) terminal 48: Start has the highest priority Sequence: Precharging ON interrogation VDC linkw310V and VDC linkw2*Vsupply50V
> 500ms precharging contactor OUT, interrogation whether OUT, main contactor IN >1s internal enable signals (for I/R and module group)
saved during precharging
terminal 63: Pulse enable has the highest priority for pulse enable of all the modules acts instantaneously (without delay) Terminal 64: Drive enable acts instantaneously on all modules when the signal is withdrawn, nset is set to 0 for all drives, and > for main spindle drive / induction motor module 611 A, the pulses are canceled after a speed, which can be set, is fallen below. The drive is braked along the ramp.
NE/2-8
04.97 07.94
> for feed drives 611 A, after the selected timer stages have expired (as supplied: 240ms) all of the controllers and pulses are inhibited. The drive brakes along the current limit. > for 611D drives, the pulses are deleted after a selectable speed has been fallen below and/or a time which can be set, has expired. The drive brakes along the set limits. (For spindles, a ramp can be achieved via regenerative limiting [kW])
NE
terminal 112: Settingup operation (Vmin 3ph. 24V AC or 34 V DC) the VDC link closedloop control is inhibited regenerative feedback is not possible, i.e. when braking, VDC link can be >600V! this function is interrogated with the start inhibit signal, terminal AS1AS2.
!
S S
Caution
For induction motors, even for low VDC link, high speeds can be reached!
terminals AS1AS2: start inhibit signal terminals AS1AS2 closed means start inhibit is effective (settingup operation) terminals 111, 113, 213: signal contact, internal line contactor terminals 111 113: NO contact terminals 111 213: NC contact (for I/R 16kW and UE 10kW only from Order No. 6SN114V1VV010VVV ) terminal 19: FR: reference ground, enable voltage floating (connected to the general reference ground, terminal 15 via 10k) it is not permissible to connect terminal 19 with terminal 15 (connect to PE rail or X131) terminal 9: FR+: 24V enable voltage max. load capability of the power supply:500mA (corresponds to 8 slots;1 optocoupler input requires 12mA) X 141: electronic voltages: terminal 7: P24 +20.4 to 28.8V / 50mA terminal 45: P15 +15V / 10mA terminal 44: N15 15V / 10mA terminal 10: N24 20.4 to 28.8V / 50mA terminal 15: M 0V it is not permissible to connect terminal 15 to PE (ground loop) it is not permissible to connect terminal 15 with terminal 19 (shortcircuit via reactor, which internally connects terminal 15 with X131) terminal L1L2 for 80kW and 120kW I/R is used to supply the coil of the internal line contactor is supplied directly at the line supply with 2ph. 400V AC (not between I/R and reactor) fuse: IN w 4 A, type gL Fan connection for 80 and 120kW I/R 3ph. 360 to 510V AC , 4565 Hz directly at the line supply (not between the I/R and reactor) observe the rotating field (phase sequence)! fuse: IN w 1.5 A (motor protection circuitbreaker)
NE/2-9
04.97 07.94
6 conductor connection with additional connection of the power supply at the DC link: for this operating mode, terminals 2U1, 2V1 and 2W1 of the power supply must be supplied with the line supply voltage between the series reactor and I/R, otherwise the power supply will be destroyed! This is also valid for the monitoring modules!
NE
S
Monitoring module with line supply connection and additional connection of the power supply to the DC link: for this operating mode, terminals 2U1, 2V1 and 2W1 of the power supply must be supplied with the line supply voltage between the series reactor and I/R, as otherwise the power supply will be destroyed. terminal 63 must be switched via the ready relay of the I/R in order to prevent the module, to the right of the monitoring module, starting during precharging.
Diagnostic instructions
If a line supply fault is displayed or if the yellow LED is dark, the overvoltage limiting module must be checked. Procedure:
1. Powerdown the drive converter (into a novoltage condition) 2. Remove the overvoltage limiting module and insert connector X181 on the NE module.
If the NE module functions, then the overvoltage limiting module is defect and must be replaced. Otherwise, check the line supply and if required, also the NE module/drive group.
Note
In this way, operation can be continued, but without overvoltage protection.
3. Insert the overvoltage limiting module 566018.9415.00 up to its end stop, and insert
connector X181 on the overvoltage limiting module.
NE/2-10
07.94
3.1 Connecting terminals NE, monitoring and pulsed resistor modules Supply infeed (NE)
Appendix
Note
3
When using nonPELV circuits at terminals AS1, AS2, terminal 111, terminal 113, terminal 213, connector coding must be used to prevent the connector being interchanged (refer to EN 602041 Section 6.4) refer to Catalog NC 60.1 for the Order No. of the coding connector. Only PELV circuits may be connected at terminal 19.
NE
NE/3-11
04.97 07.94
3.1
Connecting terminals NE, monitoring and pulsed resistor modules

Terminal functions Designation Typ e
1)
NE
Table 3-1 Term. No. U1 V1 W1 L1 L2 PE P600 M600
Function Supply
Typ. voltage/limit values 3ph. 400 V AC
Max. crosssection Refer to the Planning Guide
Terminals available in 3)
I/R, UE
Supply connection for contactor Protective conductor DC link DC link Grounding bar5)
I I I I/O I/O I/O
2ph. 400 V AC dir. at supply L1, L2, L3, refer to Sec. 9.2 0V +300 V 300 V 300 V
16mm2/10mm2 4) 16mm2/10mm2 4) Bolt Busbar Busbar Busbar
I/R 80/104 kW, 120/156 kW I/R, UE, MM, PR I/R, UE
P600 M600 1R, 2R, 3R X131 X351 M500 P500 1U1 2U1 1V1 2V1 1W1 2W1 7 45 44 10 15 R 5.3 5.2 5.1 63 9 9 64 19 X181 X181 X181 X181 X181 X181 X181 X181 X141 X141 X141 X141 X141 X141 X121 X121 X121 X121 X121 X121 X121
DC link DC link Internal resistor connection Electronics M Equipment bus DC link power supply DC link power supply Output L1 Input L1 Output L2 Input L2 Output L3 Input L3 P24 P15 N15 N24 M RESET6) Relay contacts Group message I2t/motor temp. Pulse enable2) Enable voltage2)8) Enable voltage2)8) Drive enable2) Enable voltage, reference potential
I I I/O
+300 V 300 V "300 V
16mm2/10mm2 4) 16mm2/10mm2 4) 16mm2/10mm2 4)
MM
PR I/O I/O I I O I O I O I O O O O O I NC NO I I A A I 0V Various 600 V DC 600 V DC 3ph. 400 V AC 3ph. 400 V AC 3ph. 400 V AC 3ph. 400 V AC 3ph. 400 V AC 3ph. 400 V AC +20.4...28.8 V/50 mA +15 V/10 mA 15 V/10 mA 20.4...28.8 V/50 mA 0V Term.15/RE = 10 k 50 V DC/0.5 A/12 VA max 5 V DC/3 mA min +13 V...30 V/RE = 1.5 k +24 V +24 V +13 V...30 V/RE = 1.5 k 0V 16mm2/10mm2 4) Ribbon cable 1.5 mm2 I/R, UE, MM I/R, UE, MM, PR
1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 I/R, UE, MM
I/R, UE, MM
I/R, UE, MM
NE/3-12
04.97 07.94
Table 3-1 Term. No. 74 nc 73.2 73.1 nc 72 9 112 48 111 213 113 AS1 AS2 NS1 NS2 19 50 Designation X111 X111 X111 X111 X111 X111 X161 X161 X161 X161 X161 X161 X172 X172 X171 X171 X221 X221
Terminal functions Typ e

1)
Function
Typ. voltage/limit values
Max. crosssection 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2
Terminals available in 3)
NC Relay contact Ready signal I I NO Enable voltage2)8) Settingup operation/ Standard operation2) Contactor control 2) Signaling contacts Line contactor O I I I NC
7)
NE
I/R, UE, MM
1ph. 250V AC/50V DC /2A max

5V DC/3mA min +24 V +21 V...30 V/RE = 1.5 k +13 V...30 V/RE = 1.5 k +30 V/1 A (111113) 1ph. 250 V AC/50 V DC/ 2 A max 17 V DC/3 mA min 250V AC/1A/50V DC/2A max 5 V DC/10 mA min +24 V
I/R, UE, MM
I/R, UE
NO Signaling contact Start inhibit (terminal112) Coil contact for line, precharging contactor Enable voltage Reference potential Control contact for fast discharge I NC O I O I I/R
I/R, UE
0V 0V
PR
Notes: 1) I = Input, O = Output, NC = NC contact, NO = NO contact (for signal: Closed= high/open= low) 2) Terminal 19 is the reference ground (is connected inside the module with 10 kW to the general reference ground X131/terminal 15). It is not permissible to connect terminal 15 to PE or to terminal 19. Donot connect external voltage sources to terminal 15! Terminal 19 can be connected with X131. 3) I/R = infeed/regenerative feedback module; UE = uncontrolled infeed; monitoring module; PW = pulsedresistor module 4) The 1st number is valid for cable lugs. The second number is valid for finelystranded conductors without connector sleeves. 5) The grounding bar is used to ground the DC link M bus via 100 k (it should preferably always be inserted for nongrounded supply networks). 6) RESET = resets the fault memory, edge triggered for the complete drive group (terminal R terminal 15 = RESET) 7) terminal 111213 positivelydriven NC contact (for I/R 16 kW and UE 10kW, only from MLFB (Order No. 6SN114V1VV010VVV). Terminal 111113, NO contact, not positively driven 8) max. current load of terminals 919: 0.5A
NE/3-13
3.2 Connecting terminals, UE module 5/10 kW Supply infeed (NE)
04.97 07.94
3.2
Table 3-2
Connecting terminals, UE module 5/10 kW

Terminal functions Designation X1 Supply Function Typ e1) I Typ. voltage/limit values 3ph. 400 V AC Max. crosssection 4 mm2 finely stranded without connector sleeves 6 mm2 with cable lug M5 thread M4 thread 34pin ribbon cable Busbar Busbar Busbar 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2
NE
Term. No. U1 V1 W1 PE1 PE2
X131 X351
Protective conductor Electronics M Equipment bus Grounding bar3) DC link DC link
I I I/O I/O I/O I/O I I O I O I O I NC NO I NC I I NO I O O I I O I NC O I I O I O
0V 0V Various 300 V +300 V 300 V 300 V +300 V 3ph. 400 V AC 3ph. 400 V AC 3ph. 400 V AC 3ph. 400 V AC 3ph. 400 V AC 3ph. 400 V AC 50 V DC/0.5 A/12 VA max 5 V DC/3 mA min
P600 M600 M500 P500 1U1 2U1 1V1 2V1 1W1 2W1 5.3 5.2 5.1 nc 74 73.2 73.1 72 63 9 9 64 R 19 111 213 9 112 48 NS1 NS2 15 X181 X181 X181 X181 X181 X181 X181 X181 X121A X121A X121A X121A X121B X121B X121B X121B X141A X141A X141A X141A X141A X141A X161 X161 X141B X141B X141B X141B X141B X141B
DC link power supply DC link power supply Output L1 Input L1 Output L2 Input L2 Output L3 Input L3 Relay contact Group signal I2t/motor temperature Relay signal Ready/ fault Pulse enable2) FR+2)4) FR+2)4) Drive enable2) RESET2) FR, reference ground, enable voltage Signaling contact Line contactor FR+2)4) Settingup/standard operation2) Contactor control2) Coil contact for the line supply precharging contactor
1ph. 250 V AC/50 V DC/2 A max 5 V DC/3 mA min +13 V...30 V/RE = 1.5 k +24 V +24 V +13 V...30 V/RE = 1.5 k 0/+24 V 0V 1ph. 250 V AC/50 V DC/2 A 17 V DC/3 mA min +24 V +13 V...30 V/RE = 1.5 k +13 V...30 V/RE = 1.5 k +24 V 0/+24 V 0V
Notes: 1) I = Input, O = Output, NC = NC contact, NO = NO contact (for signal: Closed= high/open= low) 2) Terminal 19 is the reference terminal (connected in the module to general reference ground X131 with 10 kW). 3) The grounding bar is used to ground the DC link M bar via 100 k (this should always be inserted for nongrounded supply networks). 4) max. current loading of terminals 9 19: A1
NE/3-14
Feed modules (VS)
Short startup, standard settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1 1.2 Tachometer adaptation for motors with tachometer voltages 3 16.5 V at rated speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Current controller settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VS/1-3 VS/1-3 VS/1-3 VS/2-17 VS/2-18 VS/2-18 VS/2-19 VS/2-20 VS/2-21 VS/2-22 VS/2-22 VS/2-23 VS/3-25 VS/3-25 VS/3-26 VS/3-29 VS/4-33 VS/5-35 VS/5-35 VS/5-35 VS/5-39 VS/5-40 VS/6-41 VS/7-43 VS/8-45 VS/8-45 VS/8-45 VS/8-47 VS/8-48
VS
Speed controller optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 Tachometer adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the proportional gain Kp without adaptation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the integral action time TN without adaptation . . . . . . . . . . . . . Integral action time with adaptation (if required) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Proportional gain with adaptation (only userfriendly interface) . . . . . Setting the adaptation range (generally not required) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I component limiting of the speed controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drift offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Startup, supplementary functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1 3.1.1 3.2 Setting elements with standard interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensioning the setting elements (standard interface) . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting elements with userfriendly interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 5
Setpoint interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Startup with main spindle drive option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1 5.1.1 5.1.2 5.2 Presettings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings with the control board removed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings in operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6 7 8
Free for supplementary texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Poweron . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance and diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1 8.1.1 8.1.2 8.2 Test sockets and display elements of the feed modules . . . . . . . . . . . . Userfriendly interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standard interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VSi
12.94 07.94
Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1 9.2 9.3 9.4 Connecting terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block diagram, MSD option board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block diagram, parameter board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block diagram, standard interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VS/9-49 VS/9-49 VS/9-52 VS/9-53 VS/9-54
VS
Startup steps of the Startup is subdivided into steps; after the standard setting, this can be followed by an additional startup step or the drive converter poweredup. feed drive modules with userfriendly and standard interface
Short startup Standard settings Speed controller optimization Supplementary functions Setpoint interfaces Startup with main spind. drive option
Sect. 1
Sect. 2
Sect. 3 Sect. 4 Sect. 5
Power.up, Sect. 7
Service and diagnostics Appendix
Sect. 8 Sect. 9
VSii
04.97 07.94
1 Short startup, standard settings Feed modules (VS)
Short startup, standard settings
1
VS
The setting elements for the userfriendly interface are located on the parameter board, for the standard interface, on the control (refer to Section 9 Appendix). The tachometer adaptation, current normalization and current controller gain parameters should be set for a standard startup.
1.1
Tachometer adaptation for motors with tachometer voltages 16.5 V at rated speed
Only for 1FT503VVAF71 and 1FT504VVAF71 motors
Userfriendly and standard interface
All three contacts, switch S1 (S4 for the 2nd axis standard interface) = ON Further, an adjustment can be made using discrete resistors, refer to Section 3.1 - 3.2.
1.2
Current controller settings

The settings for the current limit and current controller gain Kp(I) can be taken from the adaptation tables, Table 1-3 up to Table 1-9. If the required feed module/motor combination cannot be found, the values can be determined using the associated formulas.
Userfriendly interface Standard interface
Parameter board, switch S2
Control board, switch S2 (S5 for 2nd axis)
Note The following setting values are valid for both control versions, as long as, in individual cases, specific reference is not made to differences.
VS/1-3
1.2 Current controller settings Feed modules (VS)
04.97 07.94
Current actual value normalization
Current limit
Imax (adjusted maximum current) Ilimit (peak current of the power module)
[%]
Table 1-1 S2.x or S5.x to ON
Current limit 2 3 2 3 4 2 4 3 4 2 3 4 39 5 2 5 3 5 2 3 5 29 4 5 3 4 5 24 2 3 4 5 23
VS
(%)
100
85
68
61
50
46
41
36
34
30
26
The current limit must be reduced at least to the peak value permitted for the motor. It may be necessary to reduce it still further depending on the mechanical system which is driven.
Current controller gain Kp(I)
Kp(I) t
Imax LA 40
Imax =maximum axis current set in A LA =motor winding inductance in mH (refer to the configuringguide, AC motors for feed and main spindledrives)
Table 1-2 S2.x and S5.x to ON Kp(I)
Current controller gain 6 7 6 7 8 6 8 7 8 9 6 9 7 9 6 7 9 8 8 9 7 8 9 11 6 7 8 9 11.5
0.5
2.5
4.5
5.5
6.5
7.5
9.5
Userfriendly interface
The setting range of the current controller gain can be additionally increased using R15 on the parameter board. The following formula is valid for S2.6 to S2.9 closed (ON):
1230 W R15
Kp(I) + 11, 5 )
VS/1-4
04.97 03.96 07.94
Adaptation tables
Definition: o = Contact in the basic OFF setting x = Contact in the ON setting
Table 1-3
Adaptation table for feed module 4/8 A Servomotor Current limit 1) nrated t d [RPM] 6000 6000 3000 6000 3000 6000 3000 2000 3000 4000 6000 2000 2000 2000 3000 4000 2000 Contacts 2 x o x x o o o o o o o o o o o o o 3 o x o x x o o x o o o o o o o o o 4 x o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o 5 o o x o o o o o o o o o o o o o o Imax [A] 3.68 5.44 2.72 4.88 5.44 8.0 8.0 5.44 8.0 8.0 8.0 8.0 8.0 8.0 8.0 8.0 8.0 Current controller gain Contacts 6 o o x x x x o x o o x o x x o x x 7 x x x x x o x x x o o x o x x o x 8 o o o o o o o x o x o o x x o x o 9 o o o o o o o x x o o x o x x o x Kp(I) K (I) 2.0 2.0 2.5 2.5 2.5 1.0 2.0 11.5 7.5 4.0 1.0 7.5 4.5 11.5 7.5 4.5 8.0
1FT 1FT... 5034VAK71 5036VAK71 5042VAF71 5042VAK71 5044VAF71 5044VAK71 5046VAF71 5062VAC71 5062VAF71 5062VAG71 5062VAK71 5064VAC71 5066VAC71 5070VAC71 5070VAF71 5070VAG71 5071VAC71
Mo [Nm] 0.5 0.75 0.66 0.66 1.3 1.3 2.6 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2 4.5 6.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 4.5
Io [A] 0.93 1.4 0.75 1.2 1.5 2.3 3.0 1.3 2.0 2.7 3.9 2.7 3.9 1.8 2.6 3.6 2.9
VS
1) The specified value is the maximum permissible current of the particular power module motor combination. It may be necessary to reduce the specified value depending on the driven mechanical system.
VS/1-5
04.97 03.96 07.94
Table 1-4
Adaptation table for feed module 7.5/15 A Servomotor Current limit 1) nrated t d [RPM] 6000 6000 3000 6000 3000 6000 3000 6000 2000 3000 4000 6000 2000 3000 4000 2000 3000 2000 3000 4000 6000 2000 3000 4000 2000 2000 3000 2000 Contacts 2 o o x x x x x o x o o o o o o o o o o o o x o o o o o o 3 x o x x x x o o o o x o x o o o o o x o o o o o o o o o 4 x o x o x o o o o x o o o o o o o x o o o o o o o o o o 5 x x x x o o o o x o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o Imax [A] 3.68 5.44 3.45 4.5 5.85 9.15 12.7 15.0 5.1 7.5 10.2 15.0 10.2 15.0 15.0 15.0 15.0 7.5 10.2 15.0 15.0 12.7 15.0 15.0 15.0 15.0 15.0 15.0 Current controller gain Contacts 6 o o o o o o o x o x o x o x x o o x o x o x x x x o o o 7 x x o x o x o o x o x x o o x o o x o x o x o o x o o x 8 o o x o x o x o x o x o x o o x x x x o x x o x o x x x 9 o o o o o o o o x x o o x x o x o x x x o x x o x x o o Kp(I) K (I) 2.0 2.0 4.0 2.0 4.0 2.0 4.0 1.0 11.0 6.5 5.5 2.5 9.5 6.5 2.5 9.5 4.0 11.5 9.5 8.0 4.0 11.5 6.5 4.5 8.0 9.5 4.0 5.5
1FT 1FT... 5034VAK71 5036VAK71 5042VAF71 5042VAK71
Mo [Nm] 0.5 0.75 0.66 0.66 1.3 1.3 2.6 2.6 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2 4.5 4.5 4.5 6.5 6.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 4.5 4.5 4.5 10.0 7.0 7.0 10.0
Io [A] 0.93 1.4 0.75 1.2 1.5 2.3 3.0 4.7 1.3 2.0 2.7 3.9 2.7 4.1 5.5 3.9 6.0 1.8 2.6 3.6 5.3 2.9 4.3 5.2 6.1 4.3 6.4 6.2
VS
5044VAF71 5044VAK71 5046VAF71 5046VAK71 5062VAC71 5062VAF71 5062VAG71 5062VAK71 5064VAC71 5064VAF71 5064VAG71 5066VAC71 5066VAF71 5070VAC71 5070VAF71 5070VAG71 5070VAK71 5071VAC71 5071VAF71 5071VAG71 5072VAC71 5073VAC71 5073VAF71 5100VAC71
VS/1-6
04.97 03.96 07.94
Table 1-5
Adaptation table for feed module 12.5/25 A Servomotor Current limit 1) nrated t d [RPM] 6000 3000 6000 3000 6000 2000 3000 4000 6000 2000 3000 4000 6000 2000 3000 4000 6000 2000 3000 4000 6000 2000 3000 4000 6000 2000 3000 4000 2000 3000 4000 6000 2000 2000 2000 3000 4000 2000 1200 2000 Contacts 2 x o o o o x x x x x o o o o o o o o x o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o 3 x x o o x x o o x o x o o x o o o x o x o o x o o o o o x o o o o o o o o o o o 4 x x o x o x o x o x o o o o o o o o x o o x o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o 5 x x x o o x x o o o o o o o o o o x o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o Imax [A] 5.75 6.0 9.0 12.5 17.0 5.75 8.5 10.25 15.75 10.25 17.0 25.0 25.0 17.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 7.5 11.5 17.0 25.0 12.5 17.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 17.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 Current controller gain Contacts 6 o o o o o x x o x x x o x o x x o x o o x x x x x x o x o x x x x o o o x o x o 7 x o x o x x x x x x o x x o o x x x x o o x x x x x o x o o o o x x o o x x x o 8 o x o x o x o x o x o x o x o o o x x x o x o o o x o o x o x o o x x x o x o x 9 o o o o o x x o o x x o o x x o o x x x x x x x o x x o x x o o x o x o o o x o Kp(I) K (I) 2.0 4.0 2.0 4.0 2.0 11.5 8.0 5.5 2.5 11.5 6.5 5.5 2.5 9.5 6.5 2.5 2.0 11.5 11.0 9.5 6.5 11.5 8.0 8.0 2.5 11.5 6.0 2.5 9.5 6.5 4.5 1.0 8.0 5.5 9.5 4.0 2.5 5.5 8.0 4.0
1FT 1FT... 5036VAK71 5044VAF71 5044VAK71 5046VAF71 5046VAK71 5062VAC71 5062VAF71 5062VAG71 5062VAK71 5064VAC71 5064VAF71 5064VAG71 5064VAK71 5066VAC71 5066VAF71 5066VAG71 5066VAK71 5070VAC71 5070VAF71 5070VAG71 5070VAK71 5071VAC71 5071VAF71 5071VAG71 5071VAK71 5072VAC71 5072VAF71 5072VAG71 5073VAC71 5073VAF71 5073VAG71 5073VAK71 5074VAC71 5076VAC71 5100VAC71 5100VAF71 5100VAG71 5101VAC71 5102VAA71 5103VAC71
Mo [Nm] 0.75 1.3 1.3 2.6 2.6 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 6.5 6.5 6.5 6.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 10.0 10.0 10.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 14.0 18.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 15.0 27.0 19.0
Io [A] 1.4 1.5 2.3 3.0 4.7 1.3 2.0 2.7 3.9 2.7 4.1 5.5 8.0 3.9 6.0 7.9 11.6 1.8 2.6 3.6 5.3 2.9 4.3 5.2 7.9 6.1 9.1 12.0 4.3 6.4 8.1 12.5 8.5 11.5 6.2 9.2 12.5 9.4 9.9 12.0
VS
VS/1-7
04.97 03.96 07.94
Table 1-6
Adaptation table for feed module 25/50 A Servomotor Current limit 1) nrated t d [RPM] 6000 3000 6000 4000 6000 2000 3000 4000 6000 2000 3000 4000 6000 3000 4000 6000 2000 3000 4000 6000 2000 3000 4000 6000 2000 3000 4000 6000 2000 3000 4000 6000 2000 3000 4000 2000 3000 4000 6000 2000 3000 4000 1200 2000 3000 Contacts 2 o o o x o o x o o x x o o o x o o o o o o x o o o x x o x o o o o o o x x o o x o o x o o 3 o x o o x o x o x x x x o x o o o x o x o o o o x x o o o o o o o o o x o o o o o o o o o 4 x o x x x x x x o x o o o x o x x x x o x o o o x o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o 5 x x o x o x o o o o o o o x x o x o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o Imax [A] 13.0 15.0 25.0 13.0 19.5 13.0 19.5 25.0 34.0 19.5 30.5 34.0 50.0 12.0 17.0 25.0 13.0 20.5 25.0 34.0 25.0 42.5 50.0 50.0 20.5 30.5 42.5 50.0 42.5 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 30.5 42.5 50.0 50.0 42.5 50.0 50.0 42.5 50.0 50.0 Current controller gain Contacts 6 x o x x x x x o x x x x o x o x x o x o x o x x x x o x x x x x o x x x x x x o x x x x x 7 x o x o o x x x x x x o o x o o x o x o x o o x x x x x x o o o x o x x o o x o o x x o x 8 o x o o x x o x o x o x x x x o x x o x x x o o x o o o x o x o x x o x o x o x x o x o o 9 o o o x o x x o o x x o o x x x x x x o x x x o x x x o x x o o x o o x x o o x o o x x o Kp(I) K (I) 2.5 4.0 2.5 6.5 4.5 11.5 8.0 5.5 2.5 11.5 8.0 4.5 4.0 11.5 9.5 6.5 11.5 9.5 8.0 4.0 11.5 9.5 6.5 2.5 11.5 8.0 7.5 2.5 11.5 6.5 4.5 1.0 11.0 4.5 2.5 11.5 6.5 4.5 2.5 9.5 4.5 2.5 11.5 6.5 2.5
1FT 1FT... 5044VAK71 5046VAF71 5046VAK71 5062VAG71 5062VAK71
Mo [Nm] 1.3 2.6 2.6 2.2 2.2 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 6.5 6.5 6.5 6.5 3.0 3.0 3.0 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 14.0 14.0 14.0 14.0 18.0 18.0 18.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 15.0 15.0 15.0 27.0 27.0 27.0
Io [A] 2.3 3.0 4.7 2.7 3.9 2.7 4.1 5.5 8.0 3.9 6.0 7.9 11.6 2.6 3.6 5.3 2.9 4.3 5.2 7.9 6.1 9.1 12.0 17.5 4.3 6.4 8.1 12.5 8.5 13.0 16.5 25.0 11.5 16.5 21.5 6.2 9.2 12.5 18.0 9.4 14.5 17.5 9.9 16.5 25.0
VS
5064VAC71 5064VAF71 5064VAG71 5064VAK71 5066VAC71 5066VAF71 5066VAG71 5066VAK71 5070VAF71 5070VAG71 5070VAK71 5071VAC71 5071VAF71 5071VAG71 5071VAK71 5072VAC71 5072VAF71 5072VAG71 5072VAK71 5073VAC71 5073VAF71 5073VAG71 5073VAK71 5074VAC71 5074VAF71 5074VAG71 5074VAK71 5076VAC71 5076VAF71 5076VAG71 5100VAC71 5100VAF71 5100VAG71 5100VAK71 5101VAC71 5101VAF71 5101VAG71 5102VAA71 5102VAC71 5102VAF71
VS/1-8
04.97 03.96 07.94
Table 1-6
adaptation table for feed module 25/50 A Servomotor Current limit 1) nrated t d [RPM] 2000 3000 4000 1200 2000 1200 1200 1200 Contacts 2 o o o o o o o o 3 o o o o o o o o 4 o o o o o o o o 5 o o o o o o o o Imax [A] 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 Current controller gain Contacts 6 x x o x o x x o 7 x x x x o x o x 8 o o o x x o o o 9 o o x x o x x x Kp(I) K (I) 8.0 2.5 2.0 11.5 4.0 8.0 6.5 7.5
1FT 1FT... 5103VAC71 5103VAF71 5103VAG71 5104VAA71 5104VAC71 5106VAA71 5108VAA71 5132VAA71
Mo [Nm] 19.0 19.0 19.0 37.0 37.0 45.0 55.0 60.0
Io [A] 12.0 17.5 23.0 14.0 22.5 17.0 20.5 22.5
VS
VS/1-9
03.96 07.94
Table 1-7
Adaptation table for feed module 40/80 A Servomotor Current limit 1) nrated t d [RPM] 6000 8000 4000 6000 6000 3000 4000 6000 2000 3000 4000 6000 6000 3000 4000 6000 2000 3000 4000 6000 2000 3000 4000 6000 2000 3000 4000 6000 4000 6000 2000 3000 4000 6000 4000 2000 3000 4000 6000 2000 3000 4000 6000 Contacts 2 o o o o o o o o o o o o o o x o o o o o o x o o o o o o o o x x o o o x o o o o o o o 3 o o o x x x o o x o o x x o o o o o x o o x o x o x o o o o x o o o o x o x o o x o o 4 o o o o x x o x x o x o o x o x o x o o x x x o x o o o o o o o o o o x x o o x o o o 5 o o o x x x x o x x o o x x x o x o o o x o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o Imax [A] 80.0 80.0 80.0 24.0 19.2 19.2 28.8 40.0 19.2 28.2 40.0 54.4 24.0 20.8 27.2 40.0 28.8 40.0 54.4 80.0 20.8 31.2 40.0 54.4 40.0 54.4 80.0 80.0 80.0 80.0 48.8 68.0 80.0 80.0 80.0 31.2 40.0 54.4 80.0 40.0 54.4 80.0 80.0 Current controller gain Contacts 6 o x o x o x x o x x o x x o x x x o o o x x x x x o x x o x o x x o o x x o o x o x o 7 x o o x o x o o x x o o o o x o x o x x x x o x x x o x o x x o o x o x o x o x x o x 8 o o x o x o o x x o o x o x o x x x o x x o o o x o o o o o x o x o x x o x x o x x o 9 o o o o o x x o x x x o x x x o x x x o x x x o x x x o x o x x o o o x x o o x o o o Kp(I) K (I) 2.0 1.0 4.0 2.5 4.0 8.0 6.5 4.0 11.5 8.0 6.0 4.5 6.5 9.5 8.0 4.5 11.5 9.5 7.5 5.5 11.5 8.0 6.5 2.5 11.5 7.5 6.5 2.5 6.0 2.5 11.0 6.5 4.5 2.0 4.0 11.5 6.5 5.5 4.0 8.0 5.5 4.5 2.0
1FT 4101VSK71 4101VSN71 4102VSG71 5046VAK71 5062VAK71 5064VAF71 5064VAG71 5064VAK71 5066VAC71 5066VAF71 5066VAG71 5066VAK71 5070VAK71 5071VAF71 5071VAG71 5071VAK71 5072VAC71 5072VAF71 5072VAG71 5072VAK71 5073VAC71 5073VAF71 5073VAG71 5073VAK71 5074VAC71 5074VAF71 5074VAG71 5074VAK71 5074VSG71 5074VSK71 5076VAC71 5076VAF71 5076VAG71 5076VAK71 5076VSG71 5100VAC71 5100VAF71 5100VAG71 5100VAK71 5101VAC71 5101VAF71 5101VAG71 5101VAK71
Mo [Nm] 20.0 20.0 33.0 2.6 2.2 4.5 4.5 4.5 6.5 6.5 6.5 6.5 3.0 4.5 4.5 4.5 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0 14.0 14.0 14.0 14.0 16.0 16.0 18.0 18.0 18.0 18.0 20.5 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 15.0 15.0 15.0 15.0
Io [A] 33.0 39.0 35.0 4.7 3.9 4.1 5.5 8.0 3.9 6.0 7.9 11.6 5.3 4.3 5.2 7.9 6.1 9.1 12.0 17.5 4.3 6.4 8.1 12.5 8.5 13.0 16.5 25.0 19.0 28.0 11.5 16.5 21.5 32.0 24.5 6.2 9.2 12.5 18.0 9.4 14.5 17.5 26.5
1) The specified value is the maximum permisisble current of the particular power module motor combination. It may be necessary to reduce the specified value depending on the driven mechanical system.
VS/1-10
03.96 07.94
Table 1-7
Adaptation table for feed module 40/80 A Servomotor Current limit 1) nrated t d [RPM] 1200 2000 3000 4000 2000 3000 4000 1200 2000 3000 1200 2000 1200 2000 1200 2000 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 Contacts 2 o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o 3 o o o o x o o x o o o o o o o o o o o o o 4 x o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o 5 o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o Imax [A] 40.0 80.0 80.0 80.0 54.4 80.0 80.0 54.4 80.0 80.0 80.0 80.0 80.0 80.0 80.0 80.0 80.0 80.0 80.0 80.0 80.0 Current controller gain Contacts 6 x o o x x o x x x x x o x x x x x o o o o 7 x o o x x o x x o x x x x o x o x o o x o 8 x x x o o o o x o o x x x x x x x x x o o 9 x x o o x x o x x o x o x o x o x x x x x Kp(I) K (I) 11.5 9.5 4.0 2.5 8.0 6.0 2.5 11.5 6.5 2.5 11.5 5.5 11.5 4.5 11.5 4.5 11.5 9.5 9.5 7.5 6.0
1FT 5102VAA71 5102VAC71 5102VAF71 5102VAG71 5103VAC71 5103VAF71 5103VAG71 5104VAA71 5104VAC71 5104VAF71 5106VAA71 5106VAC71 5108VAA71 5108VAC71 5132VAA71 5132VAC71 5132VSA71 5134VAA71 5134VSA71 5136VAA71 5138VAA71
Mo [Nm] 27.0 27.0 27.0 27.0 19.0 19.0 19.0 37.0 37.0 37.0 45.0 45.0 55.0 55.0 60.0 60.0 70.0 75.0 90.0 85.0 105.0
Io [A] 9.9 16.5 25.0 31.5 12.0 17.5 23.0 14.0 22.5 34.0 17.0 26.8 20.5 32.5 22.5 35.5 26.0 28.0 34.0 31.5 39.0
VS
VS/1-11
03.96 07.94
Table 1-8
Adaptation table for feed module 80/160 A Servomotor Current limit 1) nrated t d [RPM] 6000 8000 4000 6000 4000 6000 4000 6000 4000 6000 6000 3000 4000 6000 4000 6000 2000 3000 4000 6000 4000 6000 2000 3000 4000 6000 4000 6000 3000 4000 6000 2000 3000 4000 6000 1200 2000 3000 4000 3000 4000 2000 3000 4000 Contacts 2 o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o x o x o x o o o o x x o o o o x x o o o o o o o o 3 o o o o o o o o x o x o o o o x o x o x o x x o x o x o x x o o x o o x o x o x o o o x 4 o o o o o o o x x o x x o x x x x x x o x o o x o o o o o x x x x x o o x o o o o o x o 5 o o o o o o o x x x x x x o x o x o o o o o x o o o o o x o o x o o o x o o o o o x o o Imax [A] 160.0 160.0 160.0 160.0 160.0 160.0 160.0 41.6 38.4 57.6 38.4 41.6 57.6 80.0 41.6 65.5 41.6 65.6 80.0 97.6 80.0 97.0 48.0 73.6 108.8 160.0 108.8 160.0 46.4 62.4 80.0 41.6 65.6 80.0 136.0 46.4 80.0 108.8 160.0 108.8 160.0 57.6 80.0 108.8 Current controller gain Contacts 6 x x x x o x x x o x x o x o x o x x x x o x o o x o o o x x o o x x o x o o o x x x o x 7 o x x o x x o o o o o o x x o o x x o x x x o x o o x o x o o o o o o x o x x o o x o o 8 x o o x x o x x o x x x o x o x x o o o x o x o o x x x o o x x o x x x x x x x x o o x 9 o o x o o o o o x o o x x o x o x x x o o o x x x o o o x x o x x o o x x o o o o x x o Kp(I) K (I) 4.5 2.5 8.0 4.5 5.5 2.5 4.5 4.5 6.0 4.5 4.5 9.5 8.0 5.5 6.5 4.0 11.5 8.0 6.5 2.5 5.5 2.5 9.5 7.5 6.5 4.0 5.5 4.0 8.0 6.5 4.0 9.5 6.5 4.5 4.0 11.5 9.5 5.5 5.5 4.5 4.5 8.0 6.0 4.5
1FT 4101VSK71 4101VSN71 4102VSG71 4102VSK71 4104VSG71 4104VSK71 4106VSG71 5064VAK71 5066VAG71 5066VAK71 5071VAK71 5072VAF71 5072VAG71 5072VAK71 5073VAG71 5073VAK71 5074VAC71 5074VAF71 5074VAG71 5074VAK71 5074VSG71 5074VSK71 5076VAC71 5076VAF71 5076VAG71 5076VAK71 5076VSG71 5076VSK71 5100VAF71 5100VAG71 5100VAK71 5101VAC71 5101VAF71 5101VAG71 5101VAK71 5102VAA71 5102VAC71 5102VAF71 5102VAG71 5102VSF71 5102VSG71 5103VAC71 5103VAF71 5103VAG71
Mo [Nm] 20.0 20.0 33.0 33.0 45.0 45.0 59.0 4.5 6.5 6.5 4.5 10.0 10.0 10.0 7.0 7.0 14.0 14.0 14.0 14.0 16.0 16.0 18.0 18.0 18.0 18.0 20.5 20.5 10.0 10.0 10.0 15.0 15.0 15.0 15.0 27.0 27.0 27.0 27.0 34.0 34.0 19.0 19.0 19.0
Io [A] 33.0 39.0 35.0 47.0 46.0 60.0 56.0 8.0 7.9 11.6 7.9 9.1 12.0 17.5 8.1 12.5 8.5 13.0 16.5 25.0 19.0 28.0 11.5 16.5 21.5 32.0 24.5 36.0 9.2 12.5 18.0 9.4 14.5 17.5 26.5 9.9 16.5 25.0 31.5 31.5 39.5 12.0 17.5 23.0
VS
VS/1-12
03.96 07.94
Table 1-8
Adaptation table for feed module 80/160 A Servomotor Current limit 1) nrated t d [RPM] 1200 2000 3000 3000 1200 2000 3000 3000 1200 2000 3000 1200 2000 3000 1200 2000 3000 1200 2000 1200 2000 1200 2000 1200 2000 1200 1200 Contacts 2 x o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o x o x o o o 3 x x o o o x o o o o o x o o x o o x o x o o o o o o o 4 x o o o x o o o x o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o 5 o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o Imax [A] 62.4 108.8 160.0 160.0 80.0 108.0 160.0 160.0 80.0 160.0 160.0 108.8 160.0 160.0 108.8 160.0 160.0 108.8 160.0 108.8 160.0 136.0 160.0 136.0 160.0 160.0 160.0 Current controller gain Contacts 6 x o x o x o x o x o o x x o x x x x x x x x x x x x x 7 x o o x x x o o x o o x x x x x x x o x o x o x o x x 8 x x o x x o x x x x x x o x x o x x o x o x o x o x x 9 x x x o x x o o x x o x x o x x o x o x x x x x o x x Kp(I) K (I) 11.5 9.5 6.5 5.5 11.5 7.5 4.5 4.0 11.5 9.5 4.0 11.5 8.0 5.5 11.5 8.0 5.5 11.5 6.5 11.5 6.5 11.5 6.5 11.5 6.5 11.5 11.5
1FT 5104VAA71 5104VAC71 5104VAF71 5104VSF71 5106VAA71 5106VAC71 5106VAF71 5106VSF71 5108VAA71 5108VAC71 5108VAF71 5132VAA71 5132VAC71 5132VAF71 5132VSA71 5132VSC71 5132VSF71 5134VAA71 5134VAC71 5134VSA71 5134VSC71 5136VAA71 5136VAC71 5136VSA71 5136VSC71 5138VAA71 5138VSA71
Mo [Nm] 37.0 37.0 37.0 48.0 45.0 45.0 45.0 57.0 55.0 55.0 55.0 60.0 60.0 60.0 70.0 70.0 70.0 75.0 75.0 90.0 90.0 85.0 85.0 110.0 110.0 105.0 140.0
Io [A] 14.0 22.5 34.0 44.0 17.0 26.8 42.5 54.0 20.5 32.5 50.5 22.5 35.5 47.5 26.0 41.0 55.5 28.0 47.0 34.0 56.0 31.5 47.5 41.0 61.5 39.0 52.0
VS
VS/1-13
03.96 07.94
Table 1-9
Adaptation table for feed module 100/200 A Servomotor Current limit 1) nrated t d [RPM] 6000 8000 4000 6000 4000 6000 4000 6000 4000 6000 6000 3000 4000 6000 4000 6000 2000 3000 4000 6000 4000 6000 3000 4000 6000 2000 3000 4000 6000 1200 2000 3000 4000 3000 4000 2000 3000 4000 1200 2000 3000 3000 1200 2000 3000 3000 Contacts 2 o x x o o o o o o o o o o o o o o x o o o o x o x x o x o x x o o x o o x x o o o o x x o o 3 x o o o o o o x x x x x x o x o o x o x o x x x o x x o x x x o x x x x o x x o x x x x o o 4 o o o o o o o o o x o o x x x x x x x o x o x o x x o x o x x x o o o o x o o x o o x o o o 5 o o o o o o o x x o x x o o o o x o o o o o x x o x x o o x o o o o o x o o x o o o o o o o Imax [A] 136.0 170.0 170.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 60.0 60.0 82.0 60.0 60.0 82.0 100.0 82.0 100.0 52.0 78.0 100.0 136.0 100.0 136.0 46.0 60.0 92.0 46.0 60.0 92.0 136.0 46.0 78.0 100.0 136.0 122.0 136.0 60.0 92.0 122.0 60.0 100.0 136.0 136.0 78.0 122.0 200.0 200.0 Current controller gain Contacts 6 x x o o x x o x x o o x x x o x x x o x x x x o x o o o o x o x x o o o x o x x o x x x o x 7 x x o x o x x o x x o x o x o x x x x x o x x o o o o o o x o o o x o o o x x x x o x x x o 8 o o x x o o x x o x x o o o o o x o x o x o o o x x o o x x x x x x x x o x x o x x x o x x 9 o o x o x o o o x o o x x o x o x x o o o o x x o x x x o x x o o o o x x o x x o o x x o o Kp(I) K (I) 2.5 2.0 9.5 5.5 6.5 2.5 5.5 4.5 8.0 5.5 4.0 8.0 6.5 2.5 6.0 2.5 11.5 8.0 5.5 2.5 4.5 2.5 8.0 6.0 4.5 9.5 6.0 6.0 4.0 11.5 9.5 4.5 4.5 5.5 4.0 9.5 6.5 5.5 11.5 8.0 5.5 4.5 11.5 8.0 5.5 4.5
1FT 4101VSK71 4101VSN71 4102VSG71 4102VSK71 4104VSG71 4104VSK71 4106VSG71 5066VAK71 5072VAG71 5072VAK71 5073VAK71 5074VAF71 5074VAG71 5074VAK71 5074VSG71 5074VSK71 5076VAC71 5076VAF71 5076VAG71 5076VAK71 5076VSG71 5076VSK71 5100VAF71 5100VAG71 5100VAK71 5101VAC71 5101VAF71 5101VAG71 5101VAK71 5102VAA71 5102VAC71 5102VAF71 5102VAG71 5102VSF71 5102VSG71 5103VAC71 5103VAF71 5103VAG71 5104VAA71 5104VAC71 5104VAF71 5104VSF71 5106VAA71 5106VAC71 5106VAF71 5106VSF71
Mo [Nm] 20.0 20.0 33.0 33.0 45.0 45.0 59.0 6.5 10.0 10.0 7.0 14.0 14.0 14.0 16.0 16.0 18.0 18.0 18.0 18.0 20.5 20.5 10.0 10.0 10.0 15.0 15.0 15.0 15.0 27.0 27.0 27.0 27.0 34.0 34.0 19.0 19.0 19.0 37.0 37.0 37.0 48.0 45.0 45.0 45.0 57.0
Io [A] 33.0 39.0 35.0 47.0 46.0 60.0 56.0 11.6 12.0 17.5 12.5 13.0 16.5 25.0 19.0 28.0 11.5 16.5 21.5 32.0 24.5 36.0 9.2 12.5 18.0 9.4 14.5 17.5 26.5 9.9 16.5 25.0 31.5 31.5 39.5 12.0 17.5 23.0 14.0 22.5 34.0 44.0 17.0 26.8 42.5 54.0
VS
VS/1-14
03.96 07.94
Table 1-9
Adaptation table for feed module 100/200 A Servomotor Current limit 1) nrated t d [RPM] 1200 2000 3000 1200 2000 3000 1200 2000 3000 1200 2000 1200 2000 1200 2000 1200 2000 1200 1200 Contacts 2 x o o o x o o x o x o x o o o o o x x 3 o x o o o o o o o x o x o x o x o o o 4 x o o x o o x o o o o o o o o o o o o 5 o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o Imax [A] 92.0 136.0 200.0 100.0 170.0 200.0 100.0 170.0 200.0 122.0 200.0 122.0 200.0 136.0 200.0 136.0 200.0 170.0 170.0 Current controller gain Contacts 6 x x x x o x x o x x x x x x x x x x x 7 x x o x o o x o o x x x x x x x x x x 8 x o x x x o x x o x o x o x o x o x x 9 x x o x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x Kp(I) K (I) 11.5 8.0 4.5 11.5 9.5 6.5 11.5 9.5 6.5 11.5 8.0 11.5 8.0 11.5 8.0 11.5 8.0 11.5 11.5
1FT 5108VAA71 5108VAC71 5108VAF71 5132VAA71 5132VAC71 5132VAF71 5132VSA71 5132VSC71 5132VSF71 5134VAA71 5134VAC71 5134VSA71 5134VSC71 5136VAA71 5136VAC71 5136VSA71 5136VSC71 5138VAA71 5138VSA71
Mo [Nm] 55.0 55.0 55.0 60.0 60.0 60.0 70.0 70.0 70.0 75.0 75.0 90.0 90.0 85.0 85.0 110.0 110.0 105.0 140.0
Io [A] 20.5 32.5 50.5 22.5 35.5 47.5 26.0 41.0 55.5 28.0 47.0 34.0 56.0 31.5 47.5 41.0 61.5 39.0 52.0
VS
VS/1-15
07.94
VS
VS/1-16
07.94
2 Speed controller optimization Feed modules (VS)
Speed controller optimization
2
VS
(if required) (if required)
The additional smoothing functions in the speed controller loop (damping mechanical resonance effects) are described in Section 3. Proceed as follows when optimizing the speed controller: 4. Tachometer adjustment 5. Gain Kp 6. Integral action time TN 7. Adaptation TN 8. Icomponent limiting 9. Drift compensation (offset) The unit must be poweredup to optimize the speed controller Sections 2.1, 2.2, 2.3 and 2.8. Therefore please refer to Section 7 Poweringup.
The potentiometer scale divisions (in the setting tables) are defined as follows:
8 7 8 7 9/ 10 10
The setting shown in the diagram corresponds to 7 scale divisions.
6 6 55 44
3 3 2 2
0 0/1 1
VS/2-17
2.1 Tachometer adjustment Feed modules (VS)
04.97 07.94
2.1
Tachometer adjustment
For motors with tachometer voltages 16.5 V, it is necessary to also proceed according to Section 1.1.
Potentiometer T Setting range 0.7 nrated 2.2 nact N 2.2 nrated
VS
nact N/ nact 2.2 2 1.8 1.6 1.4 1.2 1 0.8 0.6 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 910 Tachometer potentiometer (scaled) Fig. 2-1 Tachometer adjustment
Extending the setting range using R3 and R10 (only for the userfriendly interface).
Function nact N > 0.7 nrated nact N < 2.2 nrated Component Increase R3 Mount R10 Mounted 0 (as supplied) Open (as supplied)
2.2
Setting the proportional gain Kp without adaptation

The proportional gain Kp of the speed controller can be set using potentiometer Kp. The range can be extended if required using the fixed resistor R50 (only for the userfriendly interface ; R50 = 68 k (as supplied)). The gain, set using the Kp potentiometer is additionally influenced by the setting of potentiometer TN.
VS/2-18
04.97 07.94
2.3 Setting the integral action time TN without adaptation Feed modules (VS)
Kp 170 160 140 120 100 80 60 40 20 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 910 Setting of pot. Kp Fig. 2-2 Proportional gain Kp as a function of the Kp and TN potentiometers Center Lefthand endstop Potentiometer TN Right hand endstop
VS
2.3
Setting the integral action time TN without adaptation

The speed controller integral action time is set using potentiometer TN; the range can be, if required, extended using C2 (only for the userfriendly interface).
TN in ms 45 40 30 20 10 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Setting of pot. TN Fig. 2-3 Integral action time TN as a function of potentiometer TN
VS/2-19
2.4 Integral action time with adaptation (if required) Feed modules (VS)
04.97 07.94
2.4
Integral action time with adaptation (if required)

Adaptation is activated and preset via R34 (only the userfriendly interface), and S3.5 (S6.5 for a 2nd axis) for the standard interface.
R34 = open R34 = mounted
Adaptation inactive (as supplied) Adaptation operates acc. to the following diagrams
VS
TN R34 + potentiometer ADAPT Potentiometer TN
TNadapt
nx2 Adaptation fully effective
nx1 Transition range Adaptation ineffective
nx
Fig. 2-4
Integral action time dependency
nx = jnsetp. + nact.j
TNadapt/TN 0.9 0.7 0.5 0.3 0.1 0 R34 = 10 kW R34 = 0 W or standard interface
910
Setting of the ADAPT potentiometer Fig. 2-5 Dependency of adaptation TN
VS/2-20
04.97 07.94
2.5 Proportional gain with adaptation (only userfriendly interface) Feed modules (VS)
2.5
Proportional gain with adaptation (only userfriendly interface)
Wichtig Offsets can occur in the transition range.
Adaptation is activated and preset using R38 (if required):

R38 = open R38 = mounted Adaptation inactive (as supplied) Adaptation operates acc. to the following diagrams
VS
Kp Kpadapt R38 Kp R50 + potentiometer Kp nx2 Adaptation fully effective Fig. 2-6 Transition range nx1 Adaptation ineffective nx
Proportional gain Kp as a function of the speed
nx = jnsetp. + nact.j
Kpadapt/Kp 35 25 15 5 0 0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 Fixed resistor R38 in W
Fig. 2-7
Adaptation Kp as a function of R38 in the adaptation fully effective range
VS/2-21
2.6 Setting the adaptation range (generally not required) Feed modules (VS)
04.97 07.94
2.6
Setting the adaptation range (generally not required)

The adaptation range can be set using the following resistors: R40 R543 R544 Userfriendly interface Standard interface 1st axis (from Order No. 6SN11180AD110AA1) Standard interface 2nd axis (from Order No. 6SN11180AE110AA1)
Maximum adaptation range (as supplied) Adapt. reduced acc. to the following diagram
Rj = open Rj = inserted
VS
R40 in kW 150 130 110 90 70 50 30 10 0 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 nx in mV Fig. 2-8 Adaptation range Adap _ tation fully eff_ ective Transition range Adap tation ineffect ive
nx = jnsetp.1+ nact.j
2.7
I component limiting of the speed controller

R52 R547 R550 Userfriendly interface Standard interface 1st axis (from Order No. 6SN11180AD110AA1) Standard interface 2nd axis (from Order No. 6SN11180AE110AA1)
I component fully effective (as supplied) I component ineffective
R52 = open R52 = 0
R52 can be between 100 k and 2 M to limit the speed controller I component, e. g. for slipstick effects.
VS/2-22
04.97 03.96 07.94
2.8 Drift offset Feed modules (VS)
2.8
Drift offset
Adjusted using potentiometer for nset = 0 (terminals 56 and 14 connected)
Potentiometer drift Control range "30 mV
VS
VS/2-23
2.8 Drift offset Feed modules (VS)
04.97 07.94
VS
VS/2-24
12.94 04.97 07.94
3.1 Settings elements with standard interface Feed modules (VS)
Startup, supplementary functions
3
VS
ON Motor counterclockwise direction of rotation for a positive speed setpoint (motor shaft, drive end)1) at terminal 56/14 Curr. normal. (Imax = 23 %) Current controller gain (11.5) Currentcontrolled operation
3.1
Setting elements with standard interface

Setting elements, switch S2 and S3 or S5 and S6 for the 2nd axis
S2/S5 contacts 10 x DIL 1
OFF Motor clockwise direction of rotation for a positive speed setpoint (motor shaft, drive end) at terminal 56/14 Curr. normal. (Imax=100 %)1) Current controller gain (0.5)1) Speedcontrolled operation1)
2...5 6...9 10
S3/S6 contacts 8 x DIL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Function Speed setpoint smoothing Speed actual value smoothing Speed controller smoothing Current setpoint smoothing Speed contr. adaptation Ready/fault2) Master/slave3)4) Currentcontrolled operation
OFF No smoothing1) No smoothing1) No smoothing1) No smoothing1) OFF1) Ready to run signal1) Master1) With I component
ON With = 2.2 ms With = 280 s With = 370 s With = 110 s ON Fault signal Slave4) Without I component1)
1) As supplied 2) Acts on the BB relay of the NE/monitoring module. If the userfriendly and standard interface are used together, or just the standard interface alone, then the BB relay on the NE module dropsout if there is no enable signal or a fault is present. 3) Function only for 2axis version 4) The slave axis must be operated in the currentcontrolled mode with enabled I component.
VS/3-25
3.1 Settings elements with standard interface Feed modules (VS)
04.97 07.94
The following supplementary functions can be set by mounting wired components onto the basic board. (from Order No. 6SN11180AD110AA1 (1 axis) and from Order No. 6SN11180AE110AA1 (2 axis) .
Function Smoothing, speed controller Smoothing nset Smoothing nact Smoothing nset Timer speed controller at its endstop C231 C232 C233 C234 C239 539R, 540R, 541R R542 R543 R545 R547 R548/R549 R553 BKZ axis 1 C235 C236 C237 C238 C240 R536, R537. R538 R542 R544 R546 R550 R551/R552 R554 BKZ axis 2 Value range 0 ... 100nF 0 ... 2.2 mF 0 ... 100nF 0 ... 100nF 0 ... 2.2 mF 0 ... 1 kW, 0.1%, 25ppm/k 62 kW ... 1 0 ... 1 kW 0 ... 1 kW 100 kW ... 2 MW 20 kW ... 1 0 ... 1 kW
VS
Tachometer adaptation Clock frequency PBM Adaptation range Speed setpoint adaptation Limiting, speed controller I component Electronic weight equalization, pos./neg.
Response threshold I2t monitoring
Axial metal film resistors, type of construction 0204 (RM 7.62 mm) and radial MKT capacitors (RM 5.08 mm) must be located at the positions provided. When adapting the tachometer, it should be observed that the resistors have a relative accuracy of 0.1% to one another and a Tk of < 25 ppm/k.
Note Important
The board could be damaged if the incorrect material is used Only suitably qualified personnel may carryout soldering work on the board (maintaining the ESD Guidelines).
3.1.1
Dimensioning the setting elements (standard interface)

a) Smoothing functions Speed controller: T=C231(C235)78 kW nset: T=C232(C236)10 kW nact: T=C233(C236) 10 kW (dependent on the tachometer potentiometer setting) T=C234(C238)5 kW Iset: b) timer, speed controller at its endstop The monitoring time is 230 ms as standard, and can be increased, when required, by mounting C239 (C240). The following simple relationship is valid:
TZst= +1.15
C239 (C240) mF
) 200 ms
VS/3-26
04.97 07.94
3.1.1 Dimensioning the setting elements (standard interface) Feed modules (VS)
c) Tachometer adaptation The following equivalent circuit diagram is valid for the individual tachometer voltages: The tachometer voltage Vtach is normally 40 V at rated speed, which results in a voltagetachoX of 10 V. For a rated speed which significantly deviates from the rated motor speed, it is possible to redimension corresponding to this criterium. The following formula is valid:
V 5kW ( [ R = V 1 1 4 (
x tach.
Vtach.
Rx Vtach.X 8 kW
4 kW
20 kW
Vtach.X Vtach.X
tach.
) 7.5kW] )
VS
d) clock frequency PBM If noise problems occur (the motor makes a whistling sound), then the PWM inverter clock frequency can be changed for both axes together.(Fig. 31) In this case, it must be observed that the available current ( In, Imax) is reduced when the clock frequency is increased (refer to Pj, Section 4.1). The I2t limiting is set in the factory to a pulse frequency of 3.3 kHz and a maximum ambient temperature of 40C. If these values are exceeded (pulse frequency and/or ambient temperature), the response threshold must be adapted (refer to Fig. 3-2).
Fig. 3-1
VS/3-27
3.1.1 Dimensioning the setting elements (standard interface) Feed modules (VS)
04.97 07.94
e) Speed setpoint adaptation If the adjustment range of the tachometer potentiometer is not sufficient (for lower speed range), then the speed setpoint can be adapted via a setpoint voltage divider circuit. The following circuit diagram is valid:
Nset 20 kW 20 kW Rx Speed controller
virt. M
The following relationship is obtained for R545 (R546):
VS
Rx=10kW
nrequired nrated nrequired
f) Limiting, speed controller I component (refer to2.7) The maximum speed controller I component can be limited by mounting R547 (R550). g) Electronic weight equalization The value to be set for the electronic weight equalization is obtained from the current setpoint IsetGwa which can be measured at the test socket T for the axis to be enabled, at standstill (Nset=0).
R= 10V 10kW ISetGwa Caution: ISetGwa 5V R 20 kW!
After mounting, the value at test socket T must be able to be measured with the same polarity, with the axis inhibited. h) Response threshold I2t-monitoring The I2t monitoring limits the current setpoint to a thermally permissible value. The response threshold is 55% of the power module peak current, and, when required, can be reduced corresponding to the following characteristic, by mounting R553 (R554):
Fig. 3-2
VS/3-28
04.97 07.94
3.2 Setting elements with userfriendly interface Feed modules (VS)
3.2
Setting elements with userfriendly interface

Setting elements on the parameter board; terminal = H jumpered with terminal 9, terminal = L open.
Function Ready/fault Relay terminal 672/673/674 Speed/current controlled (permanently selected via switch) Speed/current controlled (selected via terminal) Supplementary setpoint 1 via terminal 22 = H Supplementary setpoint 2 via terminal 23 = H Currentcontrolled operation with/ without I component Controller and pulse inhibit via terminal 65 Master-/slave operation: Master operation Slave operaopera tion
Component(s) R33 = 0 (as supplied) R33 = open S2: 10 = OFF (as supplied) S2: 10 = ON R14 = 0 1); terminal 22 = L R14 = 0 ; terminal 22 = H R16 (as supplied = open)2) R17 (as supplied = open) R18 (as supplied = open) R21 (as supplied = open)2) R19 (as supplied = open) R22 (as supplied = open) R1 = 0 (as supplied) R1 = open R13 = open (as supplied) R13 = 0 R42 + R44 = 0 , S2: 10 = OFF R44 = 0 , R1 + R42 = open, S2: 10 = ON R54 = 360 k (as supplied) R54 as selected R32 = 0 (as supplied) R32 = open S2: 1 = ON (as supplied) S2: 1 = OFF C3 (as supplied = open) C4 (as supplied = open) C5 (as supplied = open) C6 (as supplied = open) R5 = 20 k (as supplied) R42 (as supplied = 0 )2) R12 according to Fig. 33 Condition: Terminal 96 connected to terminal 44 Ready signal fault signal
Effect
Closedloop speed control closedloop current control Closedloop speed control closedloop current control Voltage divider at 10 V Voltage divider at 10 V Voltage divider at the ref. point Voltage divider at 10 V Voltage divider at 10 V Voltage divider at the ref. point I component inhibited P I component active PI Delayed Instantaneous Master operation, terminal 258 = output Slave operation, terminal 258 = input
VS
t = 230 ms R54 [k] =
Timer, speed controller at its endstop
t [ms] 47 0.56
Monitoring, n controller at n stop Direction of rotation reversal (direction of rotation for a positive setpoint at terminal 56/14) Speed controller smoothing Speed setpoint smoothing Speed actual value smoothing Current setpoint smoothing Speed setpoint adaptation2) (only terminal 56/14) Current setpoint adaptation Travel to endstop (set using R12)
Monitoring active Monitoring inactive Motor ccw, drive shaft end Motor cw, drive shaft end = C3 68 k = C4 10 k = C5 5 k = C6 1 k |100% nACTN|=11 ... 5V Isett10 V Limiting according to Fig. 33 Speed controller monitoring inactive
1) As supplied: R14 = open Nset Nrated 2) R= Nmax 0.5 10V
) 40kW
VS/3-29
04.97 07.94
Function Travel to end stop (variable via terminal 96) Settingup operation (central, via terminal 112 on the NE module)
Component(s) R12 = open (as supplied) voltage at terminal 96 according to Fig. 3-4 R12 according to Fig.KEIN MERKER terminal 112 = open (when supplied, terminal 112 to terminal 9)
Effect Limiting acc. to Fig. 3-4, ncontr. monitoring inactive Limiting according to Fig.KEIN MERKER, Speed controller monitoring inactive
Current reduced after timer, n R2 according to Fig. 3-5 controller at end stop, has expi- R32 = open red
Reduction acc. to Fig. 3-5 ncontr. monit. disabled S1duty = 1.1 Irated S1duty = 1.1 Irated Limiting acc. to Fig. 3-6 no weight equalization Suppl. I set acc. to Fig. 3-7 Suppl. I set acc. to Fig. 3-7
VS
Current reduced after the I2t timer has expired Response threshold I2t Electronic weight equalization1)
R2 = open (as supplied) R32 = open R9 = 30 k (as supplied) R9 according to Fig. 3-6 R46 + R48 = open (as supplied) R46 for neg. I set at socket T R48 for pos. I set at socket T R6, R7, R8 tolerance 0.1%
Tachometer adaptation2)
Rx = Clock frequency R542 Iset Imax 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 0.1 1.0 [%]
[5kW (V
1 1 4
tach.
Vtach.
Vtach.X
Vtach.X
) 7.5kW] )
Refer to Fig.3-1
10.0
100.0
1000.0 R12 [kW]
Final value 1%
Fig. 3-3 1)
Current setpoint limiting as a function R12, j30 Vj terminal 96 j12 Vj
Warning For version 4620087701.00 of the control board, for weight compensation, the internal current setpoint must be reduced via R42!
R42 [kW] = 20 I weight equalization/Imax 1 I weight compensation/Imax
For control boards, from version 4620087701.01 onwards, zero offset cannot be measured after R46 and R48 have been mounted and an axis enabled. If R46 and R48 have been correctly mounted according to Fig. 3-7, the offset must be able to be measured when the axis is inhibited.
2) Refer to Section 3.1.1
VS/3-30
04.97 07.94
Iset Imax 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 0

1
[%]
VS
Final value 1%
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
VT.96
[V]
Fig. 3-4
Current setpoint limiting as a function of the voltage at terminal 96 (R12=open)
Iset Imax 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 Initial 0 value 1.0 1%
[%]
10.0
100.0 R2 [k]
Fig. 3-5
Current setpoint limiting as a function of R2
VS/3-31
04.97 07.94
Icont. Irated 110 100 90 80 70 60
[%] Illegal area
VS
50 40 30 20 10 0 10.0 100.0 1000.0 R9 [k]
Fig. 3-6
Response threshold I2t monitoring as a function R9
Iweight compensation/Imax 1.0 0.8 0.6 0.4 0.3 0.2 0.1 0.08 0.06 0.04 0.03 0.02 0.01 5 6.8 10 5.6 Fig. 3-7 15 22 27 39 56 680 1000 100 150 220 390 47 68 470 R46 and R48 [kW] Illegal area
Supplementary current setpoint for electronic weight equalization
Inverter clock frequency PBM If noise problems occur (the motor makes a whistling sound), the PWM inverter clock frequency can be adapted by mounting R369 on the basic board. In this case, it must be observed that the available current (In, Imax) is reduced when the clock frequency is increased. (refer to Pj Section 4.1) The I2t limiting is designed for a pulse frequency set in the factory to 3.3 kHz and a max. ambient temperature of 40 C. When this value is exceeded (pulse frequency and/or ambient temperature), the response threshold must be adapted (refer to Fig. 3-2). The characteristic is valid according to Fig. 3-1.
VS/3-32
12.94 07.94
4 Setpoint interfaces Feed modules (VS)
Setpoint interfaces
4
VS
Definitions:
X Optimal, taking into account the setpoint input characteristics Possible Not permissible, and to some extent also not possible
Table 4-1
Main setpointsupplementary setpoints Int. setpoint term.22 Int. setpoint term.23 Socket NZ
Mode
Setpoint Main setpoint
Term.56/1 4 X
Term.24/2 0
Term.258
Speed controlled
Supplementary setpoint Main setpoint
X X
Current controlled
Supplementary setpoint Main setpoint Supplementary setpoint Main setpoint Supplementary setpoint Main setpoint Supplementary setpoint X X
X X
Slave, I controlled Current setpoint input Main spindle drive option o tion Main spindle drive operation Main spindle drive option C axis
Table 4-2 Mode
Motor direction of rotation for a positive setpoint and S2.1 = ON Term.56/14 Term.24/20 Term.22 R16/18 cw Term.23 R19/22 cw R21/22 ccw R19/22 cw R21/22 ccw ccw cw (slave) Socket NZ Master/slave term.258
Speed S eed controlled
ccw
cw
R17/18 ccw R16/18 cw
Current controlled
cw
R17/18 ccw
When viewing the motor shaft, drive end J
VS/4-33
4 Setpoint interfaces Feed modules (VS)
07.94
VS
VS/4-34
04.97 07.94
5.1 Presettings Feed modules (VS)
Startup with main spindle drive option
5
VS
The settings for the control parameters for Caxis operation on the parameter board, control parameters for main spindle drive operation, on the option board. The main spindle drive option components which have to be modified, are mounted on solder pins (layout, refer to Section 9). The potentiometer scale divisions (in the setting tables) are defined as follows:
10 9/ 9 10 88
0 0/1 1
2 2 7 3 7 6 3 4 6 55 4
5.1
Presettings
Warning Parameter board changes: Remove R4, R5 and R54 and, if necessary, C4 (when supplied this is not mounted). If this is not observed, it could result in undesirable axis motion!
5.1.1
Settings with the control board removed
Rampup time
Table 5-1 Rampup time from 0 V to 10 V in s via terminal 56/14, set using potentiometer R20 and terminal 102 0 Term.102 open Term.102 to term. 9 0.01 0.1 1 0.11 1.08 2 0.21 2.07 3 0.31 3.06 4 0.4 4.04 5 0.5 5.03 6 0.6 6.02 7 0.7 7.01 8 0.8 8.01 9 0.9 9.04 10 1.11 11.05
The rampup time range via R20 can be changed by modifying R27/R60.
VS/5-35
5.1.1 Settings with the control board removed Feed modules (VS)
04.97 07.94
Torque limiting
Constant power range R76 100
I/Imax
13
VS
Fig. 5-1
23

R213 70 R214
R225 n/nrated in %
100
Torque limiting
Table 5-2
Adjustable start of the constant power range referred to nmax = 10 V in % via R214 0 70 1 65 2 60 3 55 4 50 5 45 6 40 7 35 8 30 9 26 10 22
Pot. R214 Start of the range in %
Table 5-3
Deviations of the selected power to constant power at the point nmax in % via R213 0 +20 1 2 3 4 5 0 6 7 8 9 10 20
Pot. R213 Deviation in %
Table 5-4 R76 in k Iset/Imax in %
Constant torque limiting Iset/Imax in % via R76 (solder pins), R76 is open when supplied 3 10 4.3 20 6.2 30 8.2 40 11 50 15 60 18 70 22 80 27 90
36
100
Intermediate values can be determined by interpolating

Table 5-5 R225 in k Iset/Imax in % Speeddependent torque limiting Iset/Imax in % via R225 (solder pins) for R226 = 20 k 2.4 1 4.7 10 7.5 20 11 30 16 40 22 50 30 60 47 70 70 80 100 85
12 % Iset/Imax are set as standard. Intermediate values are obtained by interpolating.
VS/5-36
04.97 07.94
Normalization ofjM/Pj display

Table 5-6 Pot. R903 Normalization Factor Normalization via potentiometer R903 (when supplied, factor = 1) 0 3 1 2.8 2 2.6 3 2.4 4 2.2 5 2.0 6 1.8 7 1.6 8 1.4 9 1.2 10 1
Relay function, limit value stage output
Terminal selected using 0 resistors
VS
T.110 T.108 T.115 R1081) T.114 T.216 R1051) T.214 T.127 R991) T.126
R170
R1061)
R103
R971)
R98
R1711) |Iact |> Ix

2)
R107 |nact |< nmin

3)
R1041) |nact |< nx3) nact = nset3)
Fig. 5-2
Relay functions
1) As supplied 2) Relay drops out 3) Relay pullsin if the function is fulfilled.
VS/5-37
04.97 07.94
Table 5-7 Limit value stage
Limit value functions Range Settings via fixed values Smoothing for relay contact bounce = C87 Suppressed: nset step u31 mV, R180 = 0 hysteresis = 10 mV, R179 = 2 k 4 62 5 52 6 43 7 33 8 24 9 14 10 4.5
jIactjuIx pot. R211
4.5 %...100 %
Pot. R211 Ix =in %
0 100
1 90
2 81
3 71
VS
jnactjtnmi
n
0.3 %...1.7 % nmax
pot. R10
Smoothing for relay contact bounce = C68, 400 mV hysteresis (as supplied), inactive for C axis: R100 = 0 (as supplied) R274 = 300 k, corresponds to 20 mV hysteresis 4 5 1.02 6 1.16 7 1.31 8 1.45 9 1.59 10 1.74
Pot. R10 nmin=in % jnactjtnx pot. R43 Pot. R43 nx=in %
0 0.3
0.44 0.58 0.73 0.87 3 %...100 % nmax
Relay contact bounce smoothing = C68 4 44 5 54 6 64 7 74 8 84 9 94 10 104
0 3.4
1 13
2 23
3 34
nset = nset*
Only in main spindle operation
Monitoring threshold: nset difft20 mV, R179 = 2 k hysteresis = 10 mV, R180 = 0 extension = 32 ms, C20 = 1 F
Functions via fixed values

Table 5-8 Settings via fixed values Function Rampfunction generator tracking Speed setpoint smoothing Correction setpoint for main spindle operation (term.65 brakes to setpoint, term.24)2) Current actual value/power display Caxis/main spindle drive op. setpoint, MSD: term.56/14 setpoint, C axis: term.24/20 or fixed setpoint via term.22 or term.23 Changeover speed, term.61 Component(s) R270 = 0 (as supplied) R270 = open C40 R900 + R901 = open (as supplied) R900 + 901 = 40 k R160 = open, R207 = 1 k (as supplied) R160 = 1 k, R207 = open Terminal 61 = open Terminal 61 at term.9 Effect Tracking active Tracking inactive [ms] = 10 C40 [F] No correction setpoint Correction setpoint via T.24/20 jM/Pjdisplay jIactjdisplay Main spindle drive operation Caxis operation Changeover, refer to Fig. 53 1)
R77/78
1) Changeover speed = 2)
R77 . (47000 R78 . 15) R77 . 47 kW + R78 . (R77 + 47 kW)
[%]
Warning: The pulses are only canceled when the noff threshold is fallen below!
VS/5-38
04.97 07.94
Speed
n1
MSD operation Term.61 = open
Braking range Term.61 = H (w. r. t. term.9) Parameter changeover point
Change over speed n2 n1 = main spindle drive speed n2 = Caxis speed Fig. 5-3 Changeover function, terminal 61
R77 and R78 t
VS
Parameter changeover for Caxis operation
S Closedloop control parameters, drift setting, setpoint input S Adaptation enable S 200 ms timer switchedin S Several relay functions inhibited S noff shutdown inhibited
5.1.2
Settings in operation
Setting rule
1. Set the Caxis parameters via the parameter board (tachometer, TN, KP, drift). Caxis parameters, refer to the speed controller optimization, Section 2 2. Set the main spindle drive parameters via potentiometers on the option board front panel:
Pot. R44 Pot. R35=ccw Pot. R35=cw
0 2 15
10 1 1
Fig. 5-4
Extending the integral action time using pot. R44 and the influence of pot. R35 on the parameter board, extending TN by a specific factor
VS/5-39
5.2 Analog outputs Feed modules (VS)
04.97 07.94
Table 5-9
Reducing the proportional gain with pot. R45 and the influence of pot. R25 on the parameter board, reduction of Kp in % 0 left 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 8.2 9 4.5 48.7 65 10 0.1 1.5 2.8
Pot. R45 PotentioPotentio meter R25
33.1 29.5 26.3 23.3 20.4 17.5 14.6 11.5 90.9 89.4 87.8 85.9 83.7 81
center right
77.5 72.4 64.4 87 83.7 77.9
95.1 94.3 93.3 92.3 90.9 89.3
VS
Table 5-10
Lowest speed before controller and pulse inhibit (braking to noff for terminal 64/65 pulse cancellation) via potentiometer R1 0 1 0.47 2 0.61 3 0.74 4 0.88 5 1.02 6 1.15 7 1.29 8 1.42 9 1.56 10 1.69
noff as a % of nmax
0.34
Table 5-11
Drift compensation via potentiometer R96 for nset = 0 Control range 30 mV
Potentiometer R96
5.2
Analog outputs
Function Speed actual value Power display (utilization) Current actual value Terminal Term.75 Term.162 Term.162 Boundary condition Nonnormalized speed actual value as for test socket X jM/Pj display (as supplied) Fig. 55, displayjM/Pj , Table 56, Normalization jIactj display by changingover components (Table 58, settings via fixed values)
M display
P display
nact M/P display
M P [M /P ]
max max
Iact = Imax t M/Pjdisplay
Fig. 5-5
VS/5-40
07.94 Feed modules (VS)
Free for supplementary texts
6
J
VS
VS/6-41
07.94 Feed modules (VS)
VS
VS/6-42
07.94
7 Power on Feed modules (VS)
Poweron
Main switch: OFF
7
VS
Adapt the module to the motor, standard settings, Section 1
Startup with battery box
S S S
Connect terminals 48, 63, 64, 663 to terminal 9 Switch (open) between terminal 65 and terminal 9 Terminals 56/14 at the battery box Main switch: ON Check the motorPWM inverter connection:
Set 0 V setpoint at the battery box
S S S
L1, L2, L3 interchanged? Cable for power connection Cable for rotor position and tachometer
Briefly enable term.65 (inching)
Main switch: OFF
Openup the connection between term.63 and term.9 Motor accelerates? Yes fault
No
S S
Enter a low setpoint (e. g. 0.1 V) Briefly enable term.65
Does drive run continuously ?
No fault
Yes 1
VS/7-43
7 Power on Feed modules (VS)
07.94
Enable term.65
Optimize the speed controller or enter experience values, Section 2
VS
Inhibit term.65
Startup completed
Inhibit term.63!
Main switch: OFF
S S
Open the connection between term.64, 65 and terminal 9 Remove the battery box from term.56/14
VS/7-44
03.96 07.94
8.1.1 User-friendly interface Feed modules (VS)
Maintenance and diagnostics
8
VS
8.1
8.1.1
Test sockets and display elements of the feed modules

Userfriendly interface
Test sockets
X W M R T NZ Speed setpoint (output) Current setpoint (output) Supplementary speed setpoint / supplementary current setpoint 2) (input)
Reference ground (output) Current actual value "10 V, corresponds to the set Imax (output) 1) Speed actual value"10 V at rated speed (1FT503V/4V0AF71: "11 V) (output) All outputs have a 1 kW output resistance Fig. 8-1
Operating display
Par. board inserted Pulse enable 663 Controller enable 65 Currentcontrolled
No No
Yes No No No
Yes No Yes No
Yes Yes No No
Yes Yes Yes No
Yes Yes Yes Yes
Speedcontrolled operation (standard operation)

1) 2)
Setting value Imax refer to Section 1.2 Depending on the operating mode, speed/current controlled
VS/8-45
8.1.1 User-friendly interface Feed modules (VS)
03.96 07.94
Fault display
Fault
I2t monitoring or heatsink temperature overtemp. Rot. pos. encoder Speed controller at its limit
X X
X X
VS
Tachometer monitoring Iact = 0 Motor overtemp. 5 V undervoltage (5 V faulted) Effect: Current li- Pulse miting cancel. Term. 5.x T.291 T.297+ T.672/ T.674 Term. 5.x T.5.x T.294 X
X Pulse cancel. T.297+ T.672/ T.674 Pulse cancel. T.672/ T.674 Pulse cancel. T.288+ T.672/ T.674 Pulse cancel. T.288+ T.672/ T.674 Pulse cancellation T.672/ T.6741)
Signal, NE: Message FD:
Sequence when the temperature or I2t monitoring responds
S I2t monitoring:
an alarm is issued at terminal 5.x of the NE module (nonlatching) a minimum of 250 ms before limiting is activated when limiting is activated, fault 1 is displayed and a signal is output at terminal 291 (latching)
S Heatsink temperature rise monitoring:

an alarm is issued at terminal 5.x of the NE module when the heatsink shutdown temperature is reached (nonlatching) the pulses are inhibited, fault 1 is displayed and a signal is output at terminal 291 + terminal 672/terminal 674 after typically 4 s (latching)
Motor overtemperature SIMODRIVE 611 feed modules with closedloop control for 1FT5 servomotors are equipped with an evaluation circuit for the PTC thermistors integrated in the motor windings. The motors are protected from inadmissible high winding temperatures with the monitoring combination (tripping temperature 150 C). As the drive shouldnt unpredictably intervene in the machining process, the trip is only signaled to the SIMODRIVE 611 via individual fault signal terminal 289/294/296 (latching) or centrally via terminals 5.1, 5.2 and 5.3 of the infeed module (latching) when the response temperature is reached (the drive is not shutdown). There is no internal system response to protect the motor. The user must ensure that the motor can thermally recover after the signal has been issued, by appropriately configuring the adaptation control. In this case, it may be required to immediately shutdown the motor.
1) Depending on the mode (ready/fault signal)
VS/8-46
04.97 03.96 07.94
8.1.2 Standard interface Feed modules (VS)
Continued: Motor overtemperature A delay time is not permissible. If the motor is not thermally monitored, when an overload situation occurs or if the drive converter was over dimensioned, the complete drive could be destroyed.
8.1.2
Standard interface
Test sockets and fault displays

W T H2/M
Current actual value 10 V for Imax Current setpoint 10 V at Imax Red LED: Motor encoder fault Tach. fault, rotor position encoder fault Red LED: Axis fault Speed controller at its end stop Heatsink temperature Motor temperature rise I2t monitoring Speed actual value 10 V at rated speed (1FT503V/4V0AF71: 11 V) general reference ground All outputs have a 10 kW output resistance Fig. 8-2
VS
M X
H1/A
Sequence when the temperature or I2t monitoring responds
S I2tmonitoring
min. 250 ms before limiting starts, an alarm is issued at terminal 5.x of the NE module (nonlatching) fault display H1 is output when limiting starts. an alarm is issued at terminal 5.x of the NE module when the heatsink shutdown temperature is reached (nonlatching) the pulses are inhibited, fault H1 is displayed and a signal is issued at terminal 72/terminal 73/terminal 74 of the NE module after typically 4 s (latching)
S Heatsink temperature monitoring:
Motor overtemperature SIMODRIVE 611 feed modules with closedloop control for 1FT5 servomotors are equipped with an evaluation circuit for the PTC thermistors integrated in the motor windings. The motors are protected from inadmissible high winding temperatures with the monitoring combination (tripping temperature 150 C). As the drive shouldnt unpredictably intervene in the machining process, the trip is only signaled to the SIMODRIVE 611 or centrally via terminals 5.1, 5.2 and 5.3 of the infeed module (latching) as signal when the response temperature is reached (the drive is not shutdown). There is no internal system response to protect the motor. The user must ensure that the motor can thermally recover after the signal has been issued, by appropriately configuring the adaptation control. In this case, it may be required to immediately shutdown the motor. A delay time is not permissible. If the motor is not thermally monitored, when an overload situation occurs or if the drive converter was over dimensioned, the complete drive could be destroyed.
VS/8-47
8.2 Troubleshooting Feed modules (VS)
04.97 03.96 07.94
8.2
Table 8-1
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Fault, standard interface H1 H2 H1 H2 H1 H1 Possible fault cause RMS torque too high? ambient temp.u40 _C? Actual value cable and shield correctly connected? Motor encoder defective? Motor overloaded, RMS torque too high? Refer to F2 Axis mechanically locked? RMS torque too high? Motor incorrectly connected? External moment of inertia too high? RMS to high (mechanically locked)? Motor feeder interrupted, motor feeder, shortcircuit/ground fault (Vce monitoring stored up to POWERON)? Fault cannot be removed replace module 5V level faulted ! replace module
Fault, user friendly interface 1 2
VS
3 4 5 6 7
VS/8-48
04.97 07.94
9.1 Connecting terminals Feed modules (VS)
Appendix
9.1
Table 9-1 Term. No. U2 V2 W2 PE1 PE2 P600 M600 X151/ 351 562) 142) AS1 AS2 663 9 65 9 22 23 202) 242) 966) 446) 66) 2586) 166) 289 288 290 291 293 294 296 297 299 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) X321 X321 X331 X331 X331 X331 X331 X331 X331 X331 X331 X331 X331 X331 X331 X331 X331 X341 X341 X341 X341 X341 X341 X341 X341 X341
9
Function Typ e 1) O I I I/O I/O I/O I I NC I O I O I E I I I O I I/O O I NO NC NO NC NO NC NO NC Typ. voltage/limit values Max. crosssection According to the Planning Guide Bolt Bolt Busbar Busbar Ribbon cable 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2
Connecting terminals
Userfriendly interface Desig.
VS
Motor connection Protective conductor Protective conductor DC link DC link Equipment bus Speed setpoint 1 Differential input Checkback contact Relay, start inhibit Pulse enable3) Enable voltage3)5) Controller enable3) Enable voltage3)5) Select int. fixed setpoint 1 3)/ currentcontrolled operation Select int. fixed setpoint 2 3) Speed setpoint 2/current setpoint, different input Current setpoint limiting Electronics voltage Integrator inhibit, n controller Current setpoint (master/slave) Norm. current actual value Relay signals, center contact Speed controller at its limit I2t monitoring Motor temperature rise Tachometer/rotor position encoder fault
3ph. 0...450 V AC 0V 0V +300 V 300 V
0V... 10V7) max. 250VAC/1A, 30 VDC/2A +21...30 V +24 V +13...30 V +24 V +13...30 V +13...30 V 0V...10 V (340 s smoothing)7) 0...30 V 15 V/10 mA +13...30 V 0 V...10 V 0 V...10 V/Ri=1 k
4)
max. 30 V/1 A max. 30 V/1 A max. 30 V/1 A max. 30 V/1 A max. 30 V/1 A max. 30 V/1 A max. 30 V/1 A max. 30 V/1 A
I = input, O = output, NC = NC contact, NO = NO contact (for signal: Closed=high, open=low) Reference point of the differential input Reference ground terminal 19 (not connected with general reference ground terminal 15) Voltage referred to PE potential Refer to NE Section 3.1 ... 3.2 Terminal T.15 on the NE module is the reference ground. The commonmode range of the differential input is "24V with respect to the PE potential and may never be exceeded.
VS/9-49
04.97 07.94
Table 9-1 Term. No. 672 673 674
Userfriendly interface Desig. X341 X341 X341 X311 Function Typ e 1) NO I NC Typ. voltage/limit values 30 V/1 A4) 30 V/1 A 30 V/1 A Max. crosssection 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2
Ready fault signal Motor encoder
VS
1) 2) 3) 4)
I = input, O = output, NC = NC contact, NO = NO contact (for signal: Closed=high, open=low) Reference point of the differential input Reference ground terminal 19 (not connected with general reference ground terminal 15) Voltage referred to PE potential
VS/9-50
04.97 07.94
Table 9-2 Term. No. 1022) 612) 753) 1623) 110 108 115 114 216 214 127 126
Main spindle drive option (only possible for userfriendly interface)

Desig. X312 X312 X312 X312 X322 X322 X322 X322 X322 X322 X322 X322 Function TH = 1 : 10 Caxis operation nact Pact/Iact5) jIactjuIx jnactjtnmin jnactjtnx nset= nset* Type 1) I I O O NO/NC4) I NO/NC4) I NO/NC4) I NO/NC4) I Typ. voltage/limit values +13 V...30 V/RE = 1.5 k +13 V...30 V/RE = 1.5 k 0 V...10 V 0 V...10 V 30 V/1.0 A max 30 V/1.0 A max 30 V/1.0 A max 30 V/1.0 A max 30 V/1.0 A max 30 V/1.0 A max 30 V/1.0 A max 30 V/1.0 A max Max. crosssection 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2
VS
Table 9-3 Term. No. U2 V2 W2 PE1 PE2 P600 M600
Standard interface
Desig. Function Type
1)
Typ. voltage/limit values
Max. crosssection According to the Planning Guide Bolt Bolt Busbar Busbar Ribbon cable 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2
Motor connection Protective conductor Protective conductor DC link DC link Equipment bus Checkback signal contact Relay, start inhibit Pulse enable 2) Enable voltage 2) Speed setpoint/current setpoint (differential input) Controller enable2) Enable voltage2) Select I controller2) Enable voltage2) Speed setpoint/current setpoint (differential input) Controller enable2) Enable voltage2) Select I controller2) Enable voltage2)
O I I I/O I/O I/O NC I O I I I O I O I I I O I O
3ph. 0...450 V AC 0V 0V +300 V 300 V 250 V AC/1 A, 30 V DC/2A +21 V...30 V +24 V 0 V...10 V +13 V...30 V +24 V +13 V...30 V +24 V 0 V...10 V +13 V...30 V +24 V +13 V...30 V +24 V
7) 7)
X151/351 AS1 AS2 663 96) 56.1 14.1 65.1 96) 22.1 96) 56.2 14.2 65.2 96) 22.2 96) X321 X321 X321 X321 X331 X331 X331 X331 X331 X331 X332 X332 X332 X332 X332 X332
1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2
1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7)
I = input, O = output, NC = NC contact, NO = NO contact (for signal: Closed=high, open=low) Reference ground terminal 19 (not connected with general reference ground terminal 15) Terminal 15 on the NE module is the reference ground. Can be optionally changedover using jumpers The power display is set as standard refer to NE Section 3.1 ... 3.2 The common mode range of the differential input is "24V with respect to the PE potential and may never be exceeded.
VS/9-51
9.2 Block diagram, MSD option board Feed modules (VS)
07.94
9.2
Block diagram, MSD option board
U5 X312
6.23
R124 R125 V9 V10 V14 R80 R85 V21 3 2 1 V22 C64 U6
R77 R78 R76 R226 R225 3 2 1 R214
V29 V31
C59 C61 R170
V30 U4 U7 V32 K4
VS
X322 R239 R2 R5 R96
R171 R105 R106 R107 R103 R104 R99 R97 R98 R108 R48 R906 3 2 1 R207 R45 N6 R44 R1 1 N7 V20 3 2 1 V39 N8 R903 3 2 1 R211 C41 1 R160 N13 R902 1 C5 R270 X10 C5 5 5 K1 1 5 K2 1 5 K3 V12
N8
C39
R213 R100 R274
V45 V47 N1 V6 V8 V35 N3 V1
50
49
V17 V42 R10 3 2 1 R43 R31 C4 U1 X7 X8 C20 R33 C18 U3
C8 U2 3 2 1 R20
C38
V4 3 2 1
+ +
C37
X11 X12 C68
N14
V52 R101 R102 R157
R901
R900
R285
R284
X9 N16 N12 X3 X4 R180 N11
X1 C40 X2 R179 R60 C28
N5 N17
X305 N5 1 2 N4 R111 R112
R27
N18
V19
V18
V43
X5 X6 C87
R161 R92 R16 R93
N10
C22 R164
Fig. 9-1
Block diagram MSD option board
The capacitors are assigned to the adjacent solder pins.
VS/9-52
07.94
9.3 Block diagram, parameter board Feed modules (VS)
9.3
Block diagram, parameter board
X85
R1 R2 C4 X50 X55 X51 X56 R3 R20 C1 C5 X52 X57 R4 X53 X58 R11 R25 C2 R5 X54 X59 R9 S1 X60 X69 R10 X61 X70 C3 R6 R7 R8 R12 X62 X71 X83 R36
R13 R14 R15 R16 6 R17 R18 R19 S2 R21 1 R22 R23 1 R24 R26 R27 R28 R29 R30 R31 R32 R33 2
X72 R34 R37 R38 R39 R40 R41 R42 R43 R44 R45 R46 R47 R48 R49 R50 R51 R52 R53 R54 X81
X82
Drift Tacho meter
X88
X87
X86
Kp(N)
R35
TN Adapt
C8
X84
X91
Fig. 9-2
Block diagram, parameter board
X304
VS
10
VS/9-53
9.4 Block diagram, standard interface Feed modules (VS)
04.97 07.94
9.4
Block diagram, standard interface
VS
VS/9-54
Feed modules, resolver control (VR)
Short startup, standard settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1 1.2 1.3 Pole numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Speed actual value normalization [RPM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Current controller settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VR/1-3 VR/1-3 VR/1-4 VR/1-5 VR/2-13 VR/2-14 VR/2-15 VR/2-16 VR/2-16 VR/3-17 VR/3-17 VR/3-17 VR/3-18 VR/3-20 VR/4-21 VR/4-21 VR/4-22 VR/5-23 VR/6-25 VR/7-27 VR/8-29 VR/9-31 VR/9-31 VR/9-32 VR/9-32 VR/9-34 VR/9-35 VR/9-35 VR/9-35
Optimization, speed controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 Tachometer adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the proportional gain Kp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the integral action time TN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drift offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VR
Startup, supplementary functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 Position processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Current setpoint limiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Other functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating feed modules without connected motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setpoint interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1 4.2 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External speed setpoint smoothing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 6 7 8 9
Free for expansions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Free for expansions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Powerup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance and diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1 9.2 9.2.1 9.2.2 9.3 9.3.1 9.3.2 Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block diagram, resolver control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block diagram, DIL switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connector assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X311/X312, encoder interface, axis 1/axis 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X391/X392, WSG interface, axis 1/axis 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VRi
12.94 07.94
Startup steps for feed drive modules, resolver control
Startup is subdivided into steps, after the standard setting, other startup steps can follow, or the equipment can be poweredup.
Short startup standard settings Optimization, speed controller Supplementary functions
Sect. 1
Sect. 2
Sect. 3 Sect. 4
VR
Setpoint interfaces
Power.up, Sect. 7
Service and diagnostics Appendix
Sect. 8 Sect. 9
VRii
07.94
1.1 Pole numbers Feed modules, resolver control (VR)
Short startup, standard settings
1
VR
The setting elements (switches) are located on the board, and must be set before the control card is installed in the inverter module.
1.1
Pole numbers
Wichtig The pole (pair) numbers for the motor and resolver must be set before startup. Otherwise, the drive will be locked.
Axis 1: Axis 2:
Table 1-1 Pole numbers 2p motor Axis 1 Axis 2 S1.x ON S2.x ON
DIL switch S1, contacts 14 DIL switch S2, contacts 14
4
1 1
6
2 2
8
1+2 1+2
2p resolver
S1.x ON S2.x ON
4
3 3
6
4 4
8
3+4 3+4
The pole pair numbers of the motors are dependent on the shaft height.
Table 1-2 Shaft height Pole No. 2P Pole numbers of 1FT6 motors 36 4 48 4 63 6 80 8 100 8 132 6
Table 1-3 Shaft height Pole No. 2P
Pole numbers of 1FK6 motors 36 6 48 6 63 6 80 6 100 8
The pole (pair) number of the standard resolver is 2p=2. The pole (pair) number of the resolver is specified on the motor rating plate.
VR/1-3
1.2 Speed actual value normalization [RPM] Feed modules, resolver control (VR)
04.97 07.94
1.2
Speed actual value normalization [RPM]

These normalizations are valid for standard resolver pole numbers, 2p=2.
S Normalization for special pole numbers, 2p=4, 6, 8, on request

It is recommended that normalization is set up for the motor rated speed. For motors with rated speeds 4500 RPM it is recommended that the normalization is set, which is closest to the required rated system speed. For motors with rated speed 1500 RPM, the 2000 RPM normalization should be set. Axis 1: Axis 2:
Table 1-4
DIL switch S4, contacts 14 DIL switch S4 contacts 58

Speed normalization nrated 2000 3000 1+3 5+7 3000 2+4 6+8 6000 1+2+3+4 5+6+7+8
VR
Axis 1 Axis 2
S4.x ON S4.x ON
Optionally possible
Refer to Section 2.1 for more detailed information regarding the speed ranges which can be set.
VR/1-4
04.97 07.94
1.3 Current controller settings Feed modules, resolver control (VR)
1.3
DIL switch
Current controller settings

Axis 1: Axis 2: DIL switch S3 DIL switch S6
Current actual value normalization

Current limit
Imax (set value)
ILimit (power module)
[%]
Imax must be reduced down to at least the peak current permitted for the motor.
Table 1-5
Current actual value normalization [%]
IMAX/ILIMIT [%] Axis 1 Axis 2 S3.x ON S6.x ON
100
70 1+2 1+2
VR
Current controller gain

Kp(I)
Imax *
LA
ILimit* Current limit* LA
<
25
25
Imax = set maximum current (RMS value) of the axis in A LA = rotating field inductance of the motor in mH (RMS value) (refer to the Planning Guide, AC Motors for Feed and Main Spindle Drives). Roundoff the calculated values to values which can be set!
Table 1-6
Current controller gain Kp (I)
Kp(I)
Axis 1 S3.x ON
2
3+7
3
4+8
4
3+4 + 7+8 3+4 + 7+8
5
5+9
6
3+5 + 7+9 3+5 + 7+9
7.5
4+5 + 8+9 4+5 + 8+9
8.5
3+4+ 5+7+ 8+9 3+4+ 5+7+ 8+9
9.5
3+6 + 7+10 3+6 + 7+10
10.5 11.5 12.5 13.5 14.5 16

4+6 + 8+10 4+6 + 8+10 3+4+ 6+7+ 8+10 3+4+ 6+7+ 8+10 5+6 + 9+10 5+6 + 9+10 3+5+ 6+7+ 9+10 3+5+ 6+7+ 9+10 4+5+ 6+8+ 9+10 4+5+ 6+8+ 9+10 3+4+ 5+6+ 7+8+ 9+10 3+4+ 5+6+ 7+8+ 9+10
Axis 2
S6.x ON
3+7
4+8
5+9
Adaptation tables
Definition:
o = Contact in the basic OFF setting x = Contact in the ON setting
VR/1-5
04.97 07.94
Table 1-7
Adaptation tables for feed modules, resolver control 3/6A Current act. val. normaliz. Axis 1: S3 Axis 2: S6 nrated [RPM] 6000 6000 3000 6000 3000 2000 3000 2000 Contact 1+2 x o o o o o o o Imax [%] 70 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 Current controller gain Kp(I) Axis 1: S3 Axis 2: S6 Contact 3+7 o x o x o x x x 4+8 o x x x x x x x 5+9 x o o o x x x o 6+10 o o x o o x o x Kp(I) K (I) 5.0 4.0 10.5 4.0 7.5 16.0 8.5 11.5
Servomotor Mo [Nm] 60 0.83 1.65 2.15 2.15 4.15 3.30 3.30 5.00 Io [] 60 1.2 2.15 1.55 2.55 2.50 1.60 2.25 2.30
1FT 60314AK 60344AK 60414AF 60414AK 60444AF 60616AC 60616AF
VR
60626AC
1FK 60326AK 60406AF 60406AK 60426AF
Mo [Nm] 60 0.90 1.30 1.3 2.65
Io [] 60 1.40 1.10 2.2 2.20
nrated [RPM] 6000 3000 6000 3000
Contact 1+2 o x 0 o
Imax [%] 100 70 100 100
Contact 3+7 x x x x 4+8 x o 0 x 5+9 o x 0 o 6+10 o o 0 o
Kp(I) K (I) 4.0 6.0 2.0 4.0
VR/1-6
04.97 07.94
Table 1-8
Adaptation table for feed modules, resolver control 5/10 A Current act. val. normaliz. Axis 1: S3 Axis 2: S6 nrated [RPM] 6000 3000 6000 3000 6000 3000 4500 6000 2000 3000 4500 6000 2000 3000 2000 Contact 1+2 x x o o o o o o x o o o o o o Imax [%] 70 70 100 100 100 100 100 100 70 100 100 100 100 100 100 Current controller gain Kp(I) Axis 1: S3 Axis 2: S6 Contact 3+7 o o o x x x o x x o o o o o x 4+8 o x x o x x x x x x o x x x o 5+9 x x x x o x x o x o x o x x x 6+10 o x o x o x o o x x o o x o x Kp(I) K (I) 5.0 14.5 7.5 13.5 4.0 16.0 7.5 4.0 16.0 10.5 5.0 3.0 14.5 7.5 13.5
Servomotor Mo [Nm] 60 1.65 2.15 2.15 4.15 4.15 3.30 3.30 3.30 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 7.90 7.90 6.60 Io [] 60 2.15 1.55 2.55 2.50 4.85 2.25 3.35 4.10 2.30 3.40 4.80 6.40 3.50 5.00 3.40
1FT 60344AK 60414AF 60414AK 60444AF 60444AK 60616AF 60616AH 60616AK 60626AC 60626AF 60626AH 60626AK 60646AC 60646AF 60818AC
VR
1FK 60406AK 60426AF 60606AF 60806AF
Mo [Nm] 60 1.30 2.65 5.00 6.60
Io [] 60 2.20 2.20 3.60 4.50
nrated [RPM] 6000 3000 3000 3000
Contact 1+2 x o o o
Imax [%] 70 100 100 100
Contact 3+7 o o o o 4+8 x x x x 5+9 o x x x 6+10 o o o o
Kp(I) K (I) 3.0 7.5 7.5 7.5
VR/1-7
04.97 07.94
Table 1-9
Adaptation table for feed modules, resolver control 9/18 A Current act. val. normaliz. Axis 1: S3 Axis 2: S6 nrated [RPM] 6000 3000 4500 6000 3000 4500 6000 2000 3000 4500 6000 2000 3000 4500 6000 2000 3000 2000 6000 1500 Contact 1+2 o x o o o o o x o o o x o o o o o o o o Imax [%] 100 70 100 100 100 100 100 70 100 100 100 70 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 Current controller gain Kp(I) Axis 1: S3 Axis 2: S6 Contact 3+7 x x x o x x o x o o o x o o o o x o o o 4+8 o x x x x x o x o o x x x o x x o x o o 5+9 x x o x x x x x x x o x o x o x x o o x 6+10 o x x o x o o x x o o x x o o x o x o x Kp(I) K (I) 6.0 16.0 11.5 7.5 16.0 8.5 5.0 16.0 12.5 5.0 3.0 16.0 10.5 5.0 3.0 14.5 6.0 10.5 1.0 12.5
Servomotor Mo [Nm] 60 4.15 3.30 3.30 3.30 5.00 5.00 5.00 7.90 7.90 7.90 7.90 6.60 6.60 6.60 6.60 10.40 10.40 16.20 16.20 22.40 Io [] 60 4.85 2.25 3.25 4.10 3.40 4.80 6.40 3.50 5.00 7.60 9.90 3.40 4.90 7.40 9.40 5.50 8.20 7.55 20.50 7.40
1FT 60444AK 60616AF 60616AH 60616AK 60626AF 60626AH 60626AK
VR
60646AC 60646AF 60646AH 60646AK 60818AC 60818AF 60818AH 60818AK 60828AC 60828AF 60848AC 60848AK 61028AB
1FK 60606AF 60636AF 60806AF 60836AF 61008AF
Mo [Nm] 60 5.00 9.10 6.60 13.30 15.00
Io [] 60 3.60 6.60 4.50 8.50 10.20
nrated [RPM] 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000
Contact 1+2 x o o o o
Imax [%] 70 100 100 100 100
Contact 3+7 x x o o o 4+8 o o o x x 5+9 o x x x o 6+10 x o x o o
Kp(I) K (I) 9.5 6.0 12.5 7.5 3.0
VR/1-8
04.97 07.94
Table 1-10
Adaptation table for feed modules, resolver control 18/36 A Current act. val. normaliz. Axis 1: S3 Axis 2: S6 nrated [RPM] 4500 6000 3000 4500 6000 4500 6000 3000 4500 6000 2000 3000 4500 6000 2000 3000 4500 1500 2000 3000 4500 1500 2000 3000 Contact 1+2 x o x o o o o o o o x o o o o o o x o o o o o o Imax [%] 70 100 70 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 70 100 100 100 100 100 100 70 100 100 100 100 100 100 Current controller gain Kp(I) Axis 1: S3 Axis 2: S6 Contact 3+7 x x x o x o x x x x o x x o x x x x x o o o x x 4+8 x o x x o x o o o x x o x x x x x x o x x x x x 5+9 o o x o x o x x x o x o o o x x o x x x o x x x 6+10 x x x x o x o x o o x x o o x o o x x o o x o o Kp(I) K (I) 11.5 9.5 16.0 10.5 6.0 10.5 6.0 13.5 6.0 4.0 14.5 9.5 4.0 3.0 16.0 8.5 4.0 16.0 13.5 7.5 3.0 14.5 8.5 8.5
Servomotor Mo [Nm] 60 5.00 5.00 7.90 7.90 7.90 6.60 6.60 10.40 10.40 10.40 16.20 16.20 16.20 16.20 22.40 22.40 22.40 22.40 22.40 22.40 22.40 41.50 41.50 22.00 Io [] 60 4.80 6.40 5.00 7.60 9.90 7.40 9.40 8.20 12.20 14.65 7.55 11.30 16.70 20.50 10.00 14.40 20.40 7.40 10.20 14.20 20.60 13.80 18.40 16.30
1FT 60626AH 60626AK 60646AF 60646AH 60646AK 60818AH 60818AK 60828AF 60828AH 60828AK 60848AC 60848AF 60848AH 60848AK 60868AC 60868AF 60868AH 61028AB 61028AC 61028AF 61028AH 61058AB 61058AC 60848SF
VR
1FK 60636AF 60836AF 61008AF 61018AF 61038AF
Mo [Nm] 60 9.10 13.30 15.00 22.40 30.00
Io [] 60 6.60 8.50 10.20 14.40 19.00
nrated [RPM] 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000
Contact 1+2 x o o o o
Imax [%] 70 100 100 100 100
Contact 3+7 o x x o o 4+8 x o o o x 5+9 x x x x o 6+10 o x o o o
Kp(I) K (I) 7.5 13.5 6.0 5.0 3.0
VR/1-9
07.94
Table 1-11
Adaptation table for feed modules, resolver control 28/56 A Current act. val. normaliz. Axis 1: S3 Axis 2: S6 nrated [RPM] 6000 4500 6000 6000 3000 4500 6000 3000 4500 6000 2000 3000 4500 2000 3000 4500 1500 2000 3000 1500 2000 1500 2000 3000 1500 2000 1500 3000 4500 6000 3000 2000 Contact 1+2 x
X
Servomotor Mo [Nm] 60 5.00 7.90 7.90 6.60 10.40 10.40 10.40 16.20 16.20 16.20 22.40 22.40 22.40 22.40 22.40 22.40 41.50 41.50 41.50 58.00 58.00 62.00 62.00 62.00 79.00 79.00 95.00 22.00 22.00 22.00 29.50 50.00 Io [] 60 6.40 7.60 9.90 9.40 8.20 12.20 14.65 11.30 16.70 20.50 10.00 14.40 20.40 10.20 14.20 20.60 13.80 18.40 27.70 18.50 24.00 18.50 25.00 37.00 24.00 31.50 28.00 16.30 22.90 31.00 22.30 25.00
Current controller gain Kp(I) Axis 1: S3 Axis 2: S6 Contact 3+7 x x x x o x x x x o x x x x x o x x x x x x o x x o o o x x x x 4+8 x x o o x x o x o o x o o x x o x o o x o x o o x x x x o x o x 5+9 o o o x x o x x x x x o x x o x x x x x o x x x x x x x x o o o 6+10 x x x o x x o x o o x x o x x o x x o x x x x o x x x x o o x x Kp(I) K (I) 11.5 11.5 9.5 6.0 14.5 11.5 6.0 16.0 6.0 5.0 16.0 9.5 6.0 16.0 11.5 5.0 16.0 13.5 6.0 16.0 9.5 16.0 12.5 6.0 16.0 14.5 14.5 14.5 6.0 4.0 9.5 11.5
1FT 60626AK 60646AH 60646AK 60818AK 60828AF 60828AH 60828AK
Imax [%] 70 70 100 70 70 100 100 100 100 100 70 100 100 70 100 100 70 100 100 100 100 70 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
o x x o o o o o x o o x o o x o o o o x o o o o o o o o o o
VR
60848AF 60848AH 60848AK 60868AC 60868AF 60868AH 61028AC 61028AF 61028AH 61058AB 61058AC 61058AF 61088AB 61088AC 61326AB 61326AC 61326AF 61346AB 61346AC 61366AB 60848SF 60848SH 60848SK 60868SF 61058SC
VR/1-10
07.94
1FK 60836AF 61008AF 61018AF 61038AF
Mo [Nm] 60 13.30 15.00 22.40 30.00
Io [] 60 8.50 10.20 14.40 19.00
nrated [RPM] 3000 3000 3000 3000
Contact 1+2 x x o o
Imax [%] 70 70 100 100
Contact 3+7 o o o o 4+8 x x x o 5+9 x x x x 6+10 x o o o
Kp(I) K (I) 14.5 7.5 7.5 5.0
VR
VR/1-11
07.94
VR
VR/1-12
07.94
2 Optimization, speed controller Feed modules, resolver control (VR)
Optimization, speed controller
2
VR
The additional smoothing functions in the speed controller loop (to dampen mechanical resonance effects) are described in Section 3. Proceed as follows when optimizing the speed controller: 1. Tachometer adjustment 2. Gain Kp 3. Integral action time TN 4. Drift compensation (offset) The unit must be poweredup to optimize the speed controller. Therefore, please observe Section 7 Poweringup.
The potentiometer scale divisions (in the setting tables) are defined as follows:
8 7 8 7 9/ 10 10
6 6 55 44
3 3 2 2
0 0/1 1
VR/2-13
2.1 Tachometer adjustment Feed modules, resolver control (VR)
03.96 07.94
2.1
Tachometer adjustment
The actual drive speed can, for a 10 V speed setpoint, be varied within the following range around the rated speed set as described under Section 1.2:
Potentiometer T Setting range 0.6 nrated nact N 1.8 nrated
The rated speeds, set according to Section 1.2 result in the following setting ranges for a 10 V speed setpoint:
VR
2)
2)
nrated to 10800 RPM
3510 RPM nrated to
1760 RPM nrated to
5400 RPM
2)
1170 RPM
3600 RPM
nmotor N 1) nmotor N
1) 2) 2)
1500
2000 2000
3000 3000
4500
6000 [RPM] 6000 [RPM]
Rated motor speed Rated speeds which can be set using the resolver control
Fig. 2-1
When reducing the speed setpoint, the setting range is also appropriately reduced. It is recommended, that motors with a 6000 RPM rated speed are operated with a 8 V speed setpoint, in order to limit the selectable maximum speed. Warning Only the specified setting ranges are possible! The setting range and maximum speed setpoint must be defined, so that the maximum permissible speed of the motor is never exceeded. The maximum permissible motor speeds are specified in the Planning Guide.
VR/2-14
04.97 07.94
2.2 Setting the proportional gain Kp Feed modules, resolver control (VR)
2.2
Setting the proportional gain Kp

The proportional gain Kp of the speed controller can be set using potentiometer Kp. The gain, set with the Kp potentiometer is only insignificantly influenced by the setting of the TN potentiometers.
Kp 170 160 140 120 100 80 60 40 20 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Setting, potentiometer Kp Fig. 2-2 Proportional gain Kp as a function of the Kp potentiometer
VR
If the electronic weight equalization is active (refer to Section 3.3) this proportional gain is increased by the following factor:
Kp (with weight equalization) Kp Iweight equalization
1+
IMax
VR/2-15
2.3 Setting the integral action time TN Feed modules, resolver control (VR)
12.94 07.94
2.3
Setting the integral action time TN

The speed controller integral action time is set using potentiometer TN.
TN in ms 45 40 30 20 10 0 0 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
VR
Fig. 2-3
Setting of pot. TN Integral action time TN as a function of TN potentiometer
2.4
Drift offset
Compensation for nset = 0 using a potentiometer
Potentiometer drift Control range "45 mV
VR/2-16
07.94
3.1 Position processing Feed modules, resolver control (VR)
Startup, supplementary functions
3
VR
3.1
Position processing
The WSG interface is not influenced by the controller inhibits (terminals 63, 64, 65, 663) and from the central reset (terminal R). The output signals are switched into a highohmic condition if encoder faults develop and for a poweron reset.
Switch for axis 1 Motor pole pair No. 1) Resolver pole pair No. 1) 4) Phase sequence of tracks A, B (WSG) Pulse number of the WSG interface Zero mark offset3) S1.x S1.x S1.6=OFF S1.6=ON S1.7=OFF S1.7=ON S1.8+S11.x=OFF S1.8=ON S11.1=ON S11.2=ON S11.3=ON S11.4=ON S11.5=ON S2.x S2.x
Switch for axis 2
Effect 2p=2, 4, 6, 8 corr. to p=1, 2, 3, 4 2p=2, 4, 6, 8 corr. to p=1, 2, 3, 4 A before B, clockwise dir. of rotation 2) B before A, clockwise dir. of rotation 2) 512 pulses/revolution 1024 pulses/revolution Offset by 0d mechanical Offset by 5.625d mechanical Offset by 11.25d mechanical Offset by 22.5d mechanical Offset by 45d mechanical Offset by 90d mechanical Offset by 180d mechanical
S2.6=OFF S2.6=ON S2.7=OFF S2.7=ON S2.8+S11.x=OFF S2.8=ON S11.6=ON S11.7=ON S11.8=ON S11.9=ON S11.10=ON
3.2
Current setpoint limiting

Function Switch for axis 1 S12.x=OFF S12.4=ON S12.3=ON S12.3+4=ON S12.2=ON S12.2+3=ON S12.1=ON Switch for axis 2 S12.x=OFF S12.8=ON S12.7=ON S12.7+8=ON S12.6=ON S12.6+7=ON S12.5=ON Effect Limiting to 100% Limiting to 75% Limiting to 55% Limiting to 45% Limiting to 25% Limiting to 20% Limiting to 5%
Current setpoint limiting when selected using terminal 96 or for settingup operation Caution! The same limiting is effective for both functions
1) 2) 3) 4)
The pole pair numbers must be set before startup (refer to Section 1) When viewing the drive shaft end The resulting zero mark offset is the sum of all set offsets The number of zero marks per mechanical revolution is the same as the pole pair number p of the resolver
VR/3-17
3.3 Other functions Feed modules, resolver control (VR)
07.94
3.3
Other functions
Function Switch for axis 1 S5.1=OFF/ON S5.2=OFF/ON S5.5=OFF/ON S5.7=OFF/ON Components for axis 1 C1355) C1435) C1345) R4486) R3496) R3486) Switch for axis 2 S5.3=OFF/ON S5.4=OFF/ON S5.5=OFF/ON S5.6=OFF/ON S5.8=OFF/ON Components for axis 2 C1485) C1495) C1475) R4546) R3566) R3556) Effect Enable/inhibit Enable/inhibit Changeover, fault/ready signal 2nd axis as slave 3) 1 s / 300 ms As supplied
Integrator inhibit, speed controller Integrator inhibit, I controller 1) Fault message Master/slave Timer stage 2) Function
4)
VR
Smoothing: Speed setpoint Speed actual value Speed controller TN limits in the speed controller Weight equalization pos. ISET Weight equalization neg. ISET
33 nF corresponds to 220 ms 1 nF corresponds to 160 ms
Calculating the smoothing time constants
Speed setpoint tset = C135(C148) 6.67 kW Speed actual value tact = C143(C144) 6.67 kW Speed actual value tnReg = C134(C147) 160 kW The following components are on the component side (Page 2):C135, C143, C134, R348, R349, R454 The following components are located on the solder side (Page 1):C148, C149, C147, R355, R356, R448
External dimensioning, speed setpoint smoothing
Refer to Chapter 4.2.
VR/3-18
07.94
3.3 Other functions Feed modules, resolver control (VR)
Parameterization of the electronic weight equalization
IWeight equalization/Imax
1.0 0.8 0.5 0.4 0.3 0.2 0.1 0.08 0.06 0.04 0.03 0.02 0.01 5 10 20 33 56 680 100 150 220 390 47 68 470 not in the permissible range
RX [kW]
Fig. 3-1
Supplementary current setpoint for electronic weight equalization
VR
Master slave operation
Currentcontrolled operation must always be selected for the slave axis using terminal 22. For the 2axis control, master and slave can only be operated with opposing directions of rotation. When using a oneaxis control as master, the directions of rotation for the master and slave can be selected to either be opposing or the same. The selection is realized by connecting the current setpoint output (terminal 258, terminal 15) to the current setpoint differential input (terminal 24, terminal 20).
1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6)
This function is only effective in the closedloop current controlled mode; in the closedloop speed controlled mode, the current controller integrator is always enabled For terminal 65 and monitoring speed controller at its limit Caution: Master and slave directions of rotation oppose each other Adaptation, only for difficult operating conditions. Adaptation is realized, if required, by solderingin SMD components SMD component, type of construction 0805 SMD component, type of construction 0204/MiniMelf; equivalent, type of construction 0805
VR/3-19
3.4 Operating feed modules without connected motor Feed modules, resolver control (VR)
07.94
3.4
Operating feed modules without connected motor

Twoaxis modules can be operated as singleaxis module using the measures subsequently described. To permit correct operation of the drive group, the motor temperature and encoder fault monitoring signals must be suppressed at the axis with is not connected. To realize this, the following signals at the encoder interface (X311/X312) of the axis which is not connected, must be connected using shortcircuit jumpers.
Measure 1 2 3
Signal TEMP_PLUS SIN_PLUS SIN_MINUS
Pin 13 3 4
Jumper
Pin 25 9 11
Signal TEMP_MINUS RES_POS RES_NEG
VR
Warning If measure 1 is not made, the group signal I2t motor temperature of the I/R or URE module is set to fault (overtemperature). If measure 2,3 is not made, the ready relay of the I/R and UE module signals fault/not ready.
VR/3-20
04.97 07.94
4 Setpoint interfaces Feed modules, resolver control (VR)
Setpoint interfaces
4.1 Overview
4
VR
Definitions:
X
Optimal, taking into account the characteristics of the setpoint input Possible Not permitted, also, to some extent, not possible
Table 4-1
Main setpointsupplementary setpoints Setpoint Main setpoint Supplementary setpoint T.56/14 X X X T.24/20 T.258/151)
Operating mode Speedcontrolled
Currentcontrolled
Main setpoint Supplementary setpoint
Slave, Icontrolled Current setpoint input
Main setpoint Supplementary setpoint Main setpoint Supplementary setpoint
Master, speedcontrolled Current setpoint output
1)
Only for 1axis version, For 2axis version, the connection is realized on the board
VR/4-21
4 Setpoint interfaces Feed modules, resolver control (VR)
04.97 07.94
4.2
External speed setpoint smoothing

Mounting locations C135 and C148 are provided on the board (refer to Section 3.3) for the internal speed setpoint smoothing. These mounting locations are provided for SMD capacitors.Time constants of approx. 1 ms can be achieved. Higher time constants must be realized by connectingup the appropriate circuitry to the speed setpoint input, outside the board. The following external circuit is recommended:
20k
Rext=2k
20k
NO f
Term. 56 Cext
NO
VR
f
NO NO f
Term. 14 20k 20k
NO
Rext=2k
External speed setpoint smoothing
Internal speed setpoint input
Fig. 4-1
The following is valid for the smoothing time constant of the speed setpoint: tset, total = tset + tset, external tset tset, external = internal speed setpoint smoothing (refer to Section 3.3) = Cext. * 2 * Rext. = Cext. * 4k
VR/4-22
03.96 07.94
5 Free for expnsions Feed modules, resolver control (VR)
Free for expansions
5
J
VR
VR/5-23
5 Free for expnsions Feed modules, resolver control (VR)
07.94
VR/5-24
03.96 07.94
6 Free for expansions Feed modules, resolver control (VR)
Free for expansions
6
J
VR
VR/6-25
6 Free for expansions Feed modules, resolver control (VR)
03.96 07.94
VR/6-26
03.96 07.94
7 Powerup Feed modules, resolver control (VR)
Powerup
Main switch: OFF
7
VR
Adapt module to the motor, standard settings, Section 1
Startup using the battery box
S S S
Connect terminals 48, 63, 64, 663 to terminal 9 Switch (open) between terminal 65 and terminal 9 Terminal 56/14 at the battery box Check connection, motorPWM inverter: Main switch: ON
S S S S
L1, L2, L3 interchanged? power connecting cable encoder cable pole pair number setting for motor and resolver
Set the setpoint from the battery box to 0V
Briefly enable T.65 (inching)
Main switch: OFF
Open connect. between T.63 and T.9 Motor accelerates? Yes fault
No
S S
enter a low setpoint (e. g. 0.1 V) briefly enable T.65
Drive runs continuously?
No fault
Yes 1
VR/7-27
7 Powerup Feed modules, resolver control (VR)
03.96 07.94
Enable terminal 65
Optimize the speed controller or set known values, Section 2
Inhibit terminal 65
If required, commission supplementary functions: Section 3
VR
Startup completed
Inhibit terminal 63!
Main switch: OFF
S S
open the connection between T.64, 65 and T.9 disconnect the battery box from T.56/14
VR/7-28
04.97 07.94
8 Maintenance and diagnostics Feed modules, resolver control (VR)
Maintenance and diagnostics
8
VR
Test sockets
Terminal 16 = Iact and terminal 75 =nact are available for measurement purposes. Normalization: Terminal 16 10 V corresponds to Imax Terminal 75 10 V corresponds to nrated (refer to Sect. 2.1)
LED display
An LED is available on the front panel for fault diagnostics. Depending on the operating mode selection, either ready or fault is displayed.
LED display LED dark LED bright At least one axis is inhibited via a terminal or as the result of an fault signal. At least one axis is inhibited as the result of an fault signal.
Table 8-1
Effect in the ready mode Effect in the fault mode
Both axes of a twoaxis board are enabled Both of the axes of a twoaxis board are not inhibited as a result of a fault signal.
Table 8-2
Fault signals, causes Fault Effect Stored

1)
Speed controller at its endstop Encoder fault Heatsink overtemperature Motor overtemperature
Stored 1) Prealarm to the NE module, stored after 4 s 1) Prealarm to the NE module, not stored
1)
Stored = pulse inhibit
VR/8-29
8 Maintenance and diagnostics Feed modules, resolver control (VR)
07.94
X391/X392
To support fault diagnostics, the following signals are available at the connector of the WSG interface. 2) Signal level : HCMOS / 5V
Table 8-3 Signal READY
Signals for fault analysis Name Hardware reset Pin 1 Status L=Low Status H=High
Power supply voltage o.k.
Power supply voltage not o.k.: Runup after poweron P5 defective Fault: Heatsink temperature too high Fault: The speed controller has been at its limit for 1s/300ms WSG interface enable A, B, R signals valid
ER_IL ER_TNR EN_WSG
I2t monitoring Speed controller end stop Enable WSG signals
9 10 11
No fault No fault WSG interface inhibited A, B, R signals in a highohmic condition hardware reset active encoder fault
VR
Warning
2)
Internal signals on the board for fault analysis! Not intended for use in external boards!
VR/8-30
04.97 07.94
9.1 Terminals Feed modules, resolver control (VR)
Appendix
9.1
Table 9-1 T. No. 56 14 24 20 75 15 16 96 9 22 9 663 AS1 AS2 9 65.1 9 65.2
9
Function Speed setpoint Differential input Speed/current setpoint Differential input Typ e 1) I I I I O O O I O I O I NC NC O I O I 30VDC/1A +13V...30V 24V +13V...30V 0V...10V 0V 0V...10V +13V...30V +24V +13V...30V 24V +21V...30V max. 250VAC/1A 0V...10V Typ. voltage/limit values 0V...10V Max. crosssection 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2
Terminals
Terminals Location 2) X321/322 X321/322 X321/322 X321/322 X321/322 X321/322 X321/322 X321/322 X321/322 X321/322 X331 X331 X331 X331 X332 X332 X332 X332
VR
Speed actual value Reference potential Active current actual value Switchin Iset limiting Enable potential Changeover, n/Icontrolled Enable potential Pulse enable Relay, start inhibit floating contact Enable potential Controller enable, axis 1 Enable potential 3) Controller enable, axis 2 3)
For the 1axis version, X332 has the following assignment:

Table 92 T. No. 9 65.1 15 258 Terminals Function Enable potential Controller enable Reference potential Current setpoint Typ e 1) O I O O Typ. voltage/limit values +24V +13V...30V 0V 0V...10V Max. crosssection 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2
Location X332 X332 X332 X332
1) 2) 3)
I = input, O = output, NC = NC contact X321=1st axis, X322=2nd axis Only for 2axis version
NO = NO contact (for signal: Closed= high/open= low)
VR/9-31
9.2 Block diagrams Feed modules, resolver control (VR)
12.94 07.94
9.2
9.2.1
Block diagrams
Block diagram, resolver control
X351 S3 S6 S5 Smoothing/axis 1
R323 R454 C172 R652 R348 R675 C134 R518 R151 C143 C135 C6 R624 R422 R566 R349 R623 R374 R371
VR
When viewing the component side (side 2)
X301
S11
S2
S1
Fig. 9-1
Component side
VR/9-32
S4
X321
12.94 07.94
9.2 Block diagrams Feed modules, resolver control (VR)
When viewing the solder side (side 1)
SMD components
VR
Smoothing/axis 2
Fig. 9-2
Solder side
R448 R355
C147
C148 C149 R356
VR/9-33
9.2.2 Block diagram, DIL switch Feed modules, resolver control (VR)
04.97 07.94
9.2.2
S1
Block diagram, DIL switch

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Motor pole number Resolver pole number NC Phase sequence of tracks A, B (WSG) Pulse number, WSG interface Zero mark offset Motor pole number Resolver pole number NC Phase sequence of tracks A, B (WSG) Pulse number, WSG interface Zero mark offset Current actual value normalization Current controller gain (active current) Axis 1 Current controller amplifier (reactive current) Axis 2 Axis 1
S2
S3
VR
S4
Speed actual value normalization, axis 1 Axes 1 and 2 Speed actual value normalization, axis 2 Integrator inhibit, speed controller, axis 1 Integrator inhibit, current controller, axis 1 Integrator inhibit, speed controller, axis 2 Integrator inhibit, current controller, axis 2 Ready/fault signal 2nd axis as slave; only valid for 2axis control Timer stage, axis 1 Timer stage, axis 2 Current actual value normalization Current controller gain (active current) Axis 2 Current controller amplifier (reactive current)
S5
Axes 1 and 2
S6
S11
Zero mark offset, axis 1 Axes 1 and 2 Zero mark offset, axis 2
S12
Current setpoint limiting, axis 1 Axes 1 and 2 Current setpoint limiting, axis 2
Fig. 9-3
DIL switches
VR/9-34
04.97 07.94
9.3 Connector assignment Feed modules, resolver control (VR)
9.3
9.3.1
Resolver control
Connector assignment
X311/X312, encoder interface, axis 1/axis 2
25pin subminiatureD plug connector, UNC440 screw locking, connected using preassembled cable
Table 9-2 Signal SIN_PLUS SIN_MINUS M COS_PLUS COS_MINUS RES_POS RES_NEG TEMP_PLUS TEMP_MINUS Resolver control 3 4 5, 8, 24 6 7 9 11 13 25 Motor 1 2 11 12 10 7 8 9
VR
Refer to Section 3.4 for axis which is not used
9.3.2
Resolver control
X391/X392, WSG interface, axis 1/axis 2

25pin subminiatureD plug connector, UNC440 screw locking, connected using preassembled cable
Table 9-3 Signal M O A_INV B B_INV R R_INV READY ER_IKL ER_TNL EN_WSG 1) Standard WSG interface type: RS422A / driver: 75ALS192 Remarks WSG 1) WSG 1) WSG WSG
1) 1)
Type Reference pole RS422A RS422A RS422A RS422A RS422A RS422A HCMOS ! HCMOS ! HCMOS ! HCMOS !
Resolver control 2 3 4 6 7 12 13 1 9 10 11
Numerik 11 1 9 10 3 4 12 NC NC NC NC
FMNC 9 15 14 13 12 10 11 NC NC NC NC
WSG 1) WSG WSG

1) 1)
only X392 2) Diagnostics 2) Diagnostics 2) Diagnostics 2)
Warning
2)
Internal signals on the board for fault analysis! Not intended for use in external boards!
VR/9-35
9.3 Connector assignment Feed modules, resolver control (VR)
07.94
VR
VR/9-36
Main spindle modules (HS)
First steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 StartUp Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Startup instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operator control and display elements, control parameters . . . . . . . . . Overview, setting data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HS/1-3 HS/1-4 HS/1-7 HS/1-8 HS/1-12 HS/1-13 HS/2-15 HS/2-15 HS/2-15 HS/2-17 HS/2-20 HS/2-24 HS/2-24 HS/2-25 HS/2-26 HS/2-29 HS/2-29 HS/2-30 HS/2-30 HS/2-43 HS/2-47 HS/2-47 HS/3-53 HS/3-53 HS/3-56 HS/3-56 HS/3-57 HS/3-59 HS/3-59 HS/3-59 HS/3-63 HS/3-64 HS/3-65 HS/4-69 HS/4-69 HS/4-75
Determining and setting the system configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1 2.1.1 2.1.2 2.1.3 2.2 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.3 2.3.1 2.3.2 2.3.3 2.3.4 2.3.5 2.3.6 Motor and converter data sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Initializing the system configuration with standard motors . . . . . . . . . . System configuration with special motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System configuration with star/delta motors, 2 motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standard applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Firmware version and module versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting parameters for standard applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Other applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oriented spindle stop (via NC auxiliary function M19) . . . . . . . . . . . . . C axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spindle positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Openloop torque controlled operation (master/slave) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitor function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HPC axis (FW 2.00) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HS
Parameterization of the drive converter interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1 3.2 3.2.1 3.2.2 3.3 3.3.1 3.3.2 3.3.3 3.3.4 3.3.5 Analog speed setpoint interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Permanentlywired terminal functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Freelyprogrammable terminal functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Output terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Permanentlywired relay functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Freelyprogrammable relay functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable relay function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor encoder signals for NC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controller optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1 4.2 Optimization, speed controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optimization, current controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HSi
07.94
Diagnostics and fault analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1 5.1.1 5.1.2 5.1.3 5.1.4 5.1.5 5.1.6 5.1.7 5.2 5.2.1 5.2.2 Diagnostic aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Measured value displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Status displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test sockets X1, X2, IR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Minimum/maximum value memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transient recorder function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Openloop current/frequency control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fault analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fault display, fault acknowledgment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fault message list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HS/5-77 HS/5-77 HS/5-77 HS/5-78 HS/5-81 HS/5-82 HS/5-84 HS/5-84 HS/5-86 HS/5-87 HS/5-87 HS/5-88 HS/6-93 HS/6-94 HS/6-99
Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 Flow diagram for short startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Code numbers for the power modules and standard motors . . . . . . . .
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HS/6-103 Connector assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HS/6-108 Addresses, RAM variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HS/6-112 Setting and check data (parameter list) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HS/6-113
HS
6.5 6.6
HSii
04.97 07.94
1 First steps Main spindle modules (HS)
First steps
1
Warning This unit must be professionally transported stored, installed and mounted as well as careful operator control and service to guarantee perfect, safe and reliable operation. Severe bodily injuries or material damage can result if this warning information is not observed. The boards have components which can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge. Please observe the ESDS information in the foreword.
HS
Note
The board MLFB (Order No.) 6SN11210BA110AA1 can only be operated with firmware from 3.00. The boards, MLFB (Order Nos.): 6SN11210BA110AA0 6SN11210BA120AA0 6SN11210BA130AA0 may only be operated with Firmware 2.xx.
HS/1-3
1.1 StartUp Guidelines Main spindle modules (HS)
12.94 07.94
1.1
StartUp Guidelines
Structure of the Startup Guide
The Startup Guide is structured according to the sequence of the various startup steps. To startup standard applications, where the preset drive converter interfaces (Section 1.5) and controller optimization when shipped are adequate, then only the highlighted startup steps are of significance.
1 First steps
2 System configuration
3 Converter interfaces
4 Contr. optimization
S S S S
Startup guidelines Startup instructions Operator control and display elements, control parameters Overview, setting data Connections
Motor and converter data sets standard motors special motors star/delta motors, 2 motors Standard applications Additional applications auxiliary function M19 CAxis Spindle positioning torquecontrolled operation monitor function HPC axis
S S S
Analog speed setpoint interface Input terminals Output terminals
S S
Speed controller current controller
S S
HS
5 Diagnostics, fault analysis
Diagnostic resources
Fault analysis
6 Appendix
S S S
Fig. 1-1 Startup steps
Flow diagram for short startup Code numbers for power sections and standard motors Connection overviews
S S S
Connector assignment Addresses, RAM variables Setting and monitoring data
HS/1-4
07.94
Parameter list
Warning Parameter settings, which are not listed in the parameter list (refer to Section 6.6) may not be changed.
The parameter descriptions are in the form of tables. The sequence in which they are listed is the actual parameterizing sequence.
Table 1-1 Example of the parameter display Parameter attributes Number Mot. 1 Mot. 2 Change effective online, RESET, after initialization, after conversion P051 setting range Description
P040.1
P270.1
4 10
Value range Dimensions
Parameter designation Brief description of the parameter FW x.xx
HS
Parameter attributes
S Number
Mot. 1 Generally valid parameters, parameters for motor 1 (star) when using star/delta motors or 2 motors Mot. 2 Parameters for motor 2 (delta) when using star/delta motors or 2 motors (P001) Display parameter P040.1 Gearbox stagedependent parameters
HS/1-5
10.94 07.94
S Change effective
Online Change is immediately effective RESET The unit must be powereddown and up again After conversion A conversion program is initiated by setting to 1H, after which the parameter is automatically reset to 0H (P143, P177, P237, P239). After initialization Initialization is started by setting P097 to 1H.
S P051
Write protection parameters Remove write protection by entering 4H and 10H
Setting range
HS
For several control words, the functions are activated by setting bits. Example: Bit 8 Bit 9 0100H 0200H or or Bit 6 Bit 7 0040H 0080H
A combination of several functions is entered by hexadecimal addition. Example: Bit 8 + bit 9 0300H or Bit 6 + bit 7 00C0H
Description
S FW x.xx
Firmwarerelease dependent coding of the function and parameter extensions. The extension is available from the specified firmwarerelease.
HS/1-6
03.96 07.94
1.2 Startup instructions Main spindle modules (HS)
1.2
Startup instructions
using
Startup possibilities
S operator control and display elements (refer to Section 1.3) S RS232C interface with an IBM ATcompatible computer and startup software (refer to foreword)
Reinitialize drive converter (if required)
If an already initialized driveconverter is to be reinitialized, then proceed as follows:
S if required, backup the setting data (parameters) S remove write protection: Set P051 to 4H S start initialization: Set P097 to 0H S overwrite the parameters in the drivemachine data memory:
Set P052 to 1H, and wait until P052 resets itself to 0H.
S poweron reset:
Powerdown the unit and powerup approximately 2 s after the display has disappeared: P095 must then appear in the display.
S initialize (Section 2.1)

Firmware replacement (if required)
The firmware can be replaced using the userprompted startup software for main spindle and induction motor modules, from version V2.00.
Board 6SN11210BA1V0AA0 6SN11210BA110AA1
HS
Firmware release before FW 3.00 from FW3.00
Procedure:
S backup setting data (parameters) S replace the firmware using the startup program S initialize with the pulses and controller inhibited (Section 2.1) S reload the backedup settings S backup the setting data in the drivemachine data memory (Section 1.3)
Startup of series machines, module replacement, component replacement
The drive converter setting data (parameters) can be saved on floppy disk using the startup software. Proceed as follows to startup additional drive converters (startup of series machines):
1. Initialize with the pulses and controllers inhibited:
Enter P095 power module code number according to Table 61. 1) Motor code number and motor encoder pulse number are saved on the floppy disk, and therefore do not have to be entered. Start initialization. 2. Load and save the setting data from the floppy disk.
1)
Power module with MLFB (Order No.) 6SN112V1AV0VVVA1 are automatically identified from FW 3.00. It is then no longer possible/necessary to enter P095.
HS/1-7
1.3 Operator control and display elements, control parameters Main spindle modules (HS)
07.94
1.3
Operator control and display elements, control parameters
Operator control and display elements
The following operator control and display elements are available on the front panel to startup and parameterize the SIMODRIVE 611 analog system, main spindle drive module:
S 3 op. contr. keys + , S 6character LCD
and
key)
The functions of the operator control elements are illustrated using parameter P039 as example. Gearboxstage dependent parameters are listed with subparameter numbers (e.g. P039.1 toP039.8).
<<
>>
HS
Parameter number
<
>
Subparameter number
Parameter value
<
>
<<
>>
HS/1-8
04.97 07.94
Control parameters
Note If data storage (P052) is interrupted due to power failure or the power being disconnected, then the modified/changed values are lost, and when the power returns, the converter displays fault message F07. The parameter values can be reset after fault message F07 is acknowledged (refer to Sec. 5.2.2).
Table 1-2
Control parameters P051 Setting g range g 0...7FFF hex Description p Write protection Remove the write protection by entering 4H or 10H. Transfer parameters into FEPROM Transfer into the drivemachine data memory is initiated by setting to 1H. The parameter is reset to 0H after successful transfer. Control word Bit Value 0000H 0 0001H 0000H 1 0002H 0000H 0010H 0000H 0020H For a rampfunction generator fast stop, the speed setpoint is digitally set to zero but the motor remains magnetized. The drive pulses are canceled when the drive comes to a stop. Speed setpoint smoothing, inactive Speed setpoint smoothing, active Speed actual value smoothing inactive Speed actual value smoothing active if simultaneously P090 bit 3=0 FW 3.0 Inverter clock Bit 10/bit 9/bit 8 frequency [kHz] 0000H 0100H 0200H 0300H 0400H 0500H 0600H 0700H 3.2 2.8 FW 3.0 6.3 5.0 FW 3.0 4.7 3.9 FW 3.0 7.8 5.9 FW 3.0 The ready relay pullsin if there is no fault and the pulses and controller are enabled. The ready relay pullsin if there is no fault.
Parameter attributes Number Change effective Mot. 1 Mot. 2 P051 P151 P052 P152 Online
Online
0...1 hex
P053
Online
0...FFFF hex
HS
8 9 10
Note: A pulse frequency > 3.2 kHz is only possible if the drive is de rated (refer to Fig. 13).
HS/1-9
04.97 07.94
Table 1-2
Control parameters P051 Setting g range g 0000H 11 0800H 0000H 1000H Description p Fault message F79 not suppressed, Fault message F79 suppressed Rampfunction generator tracking, active Rampfunction generator tracking, inactive Bipolar speed setpoint evaluation Unipolar speed setpoint evaluation FW 2.00 Cyclic display of parameter number active Cyclic display of parameter number inactive FW 3.0
Parameter attributes Number Change effective Mot. 1 Mot. 2
12
13
0000H 2000H
15
0000H 8000H
P090
Online
10
0...FFFF hex
Control word Bit Value 0000H 0001H 0 Parameter format, hex display Parameter format, dec display Caution! Parameter settings in the hex format are ineffective! Fault message F09 activated Fault message F09 suppressed FW 2.00 Extended monitoring for F09 inactive Extended monitoring for F-09 active (shortcircuit M/P5) FW 3.00 Speed controller clock [ms] Standard operation 1000 HPC axis without filter 500 with filter 600 possible from FW 3.0 Standard operation 525 HPC axis without filter 300 with filter 350 If bit 3 is changed, it only becomes effective after saving in the FEPROM and poweringdown and on again Speed controller without integration inhibit Speed controller with integrator inhibit (for M19) Fault message F-18 suppressed Fault message F-18 active (FW 3.00) Speed controller integrator, when limited, is set to the difference between a torque limit and P component Speed controller integrator is held when limited FW 2.00
HS
1 0000H 0002H 0000H 2 0004H 0000H RESET 0008H 3
Online 4
0000H 0010H
0000H 0020H 0000H
0040H
HS/1-10
04.97 07.94
Various inverter clock frequencies can be parameterized, please observe current derating.
Table 1-3
Currents as a function of the inverter clock frequency, MSD analog fT In/Is6/Imax in A Code No. 6 7 13 8 9 10 11 12 fT=3.20 kHz 24/32/32 30/40/51 45/60/76 45/60/76 60/80/102 85/110/127 120/150/193 200/250/257 In/Is6/Imax in A fT=4.70 kHz 20/26/26 26/34/44 39/52/65 39/52/65 51/68/86 73/95/109/ 101/127/163 169/211/217 In/Is6/Imax in A fT=6.30 kHz 15/20/20 21/28/36/ 32/43/54 32/43/54 41/54/69 60/78/90 81/102/131/ 135/169/174 In/Is6/Imax in A fT=7.80 kHz 10/14/14 17/23/29 26/34/43 26/34/43 31/42/53 48/63/72 62/78/101 104/130/134
Power moOrder Nos. dule type 6SN11231AA0V 6SN11241AA0V 6SN11351BA1V 50 A 80 A 108 A 120 A 160 A 200 A 300 A 400 A 0CAV 0DAV 0LAV 0GAV 0EAV 0FAV 0JAV 0KAV
Power moOrder Nos. dule type 6SN11231AA0V 6SN11241AA0V 6SN11351BA1V 50 A 80 A 108 A 120 A 160 A 200 A 300 A 400 A 0CAV 0DAV 0LAV 0GAV 0EAV 0FAV 0JAV 0KAV
In/Is6/Imax in A Code No. 6 7 13 8 9 10 11 12 fT=2.80 kHz
In/Is6/Imax in A fT=3.90 kHz
HS
from FW3.00 24/32/32 30/40/51 45/60/76 45/60/76 60/80/102 85/110/127 120/150/193 200/250/257 22/29/29 28/37/48 42/56/71 42/56/71 56/74/95 79/103/119 111/139/179 185/232/238 19/25/25 25/33/42 37/50/63 37/50/63 49/65/83 71/91/106 98/122/157 163/203/209 16/21/21 22/30/38 34/45/57 34/45/57 43/58/73 63/82/95 86/108/139 144/180/185
HS/1-11
System configuration Speed setpoint

P093, P094 P053, P091, P092, P106, P107, P108, P111, P112, P117, P118, P119
1.4
Motor encoder sensing HPC axis Control parameters function parameter 1

P126, P129, P130, P131 P134, P135, P136, P137, P138, P139
HPC
P109, P110, P149
HS
Controller optimization
Fig. 1-2
HS/1-12
position controller
P141, P142, P143
P036, P037, P038, P098, P267, P268
X412
Motor temperature sensing
P063, P064, P065, P291
Spindle encoder sensing Spindle positioning

P121, P122, P123, P124, P125 P144, P145, P146, P148, P149
P141
1.4 Overview, setting data Main spindle modules (HS)
Setting data
Position ref. value function parameter 2 Speed setpoint smoothing Torque limiting
P039, P040, P041, P042, P043, P050 P248, P269, P270, P271, P272, P273, P290 P018, P053 P019
X432
Round.off Pgain, integral action time P031, P032, P265, P266 Adaptation Max. speed
P029, P264 P035, P044, P045, P046, P075, P274 P195, P196, P198, P199, P201, P202 P203, P283, P284, P285, P286, P288 P289, P293
Motor encoder sensing Speed controller
P033
M19
X421 56 14
Rampfct. generator
P016, P017
P054, P055, P056, P058 P062
Analog Speed setpoint setpoint P014, P015, P024, P030 Digital filter
P103, P104, P117 P118, P276, P277 P280, P281
24 8
Torque setpoint smoothing
P053, P258
current controller
P116, P120, P278, P292
Channel CAxis selection P114, P115, P149 P113 Torque setpoint slip monitoring
P340, P341, P343, P344, P345, P346
P048, P049, P068
P081
Overview, setting data
P082
Initialization Standard motor

Initialization parameter
P083
Special motor
Initialization parameter
P084 P022, P261
P085 P156, P157
P086
Oscillation Freeprog. enable terminals P154, P155,

P095, P096, P098, P097 P095, P096, P098, P097
Shutdown with no overshoot
Star/delta motor, 2 motors P095,

P096, P098, P097 Initialization parameter
P087
General control parameters

P051, P052, P053, P090, P151, P152
P088
P089
motor data set star motor motor 1
X431 E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E7 E8 E9 X441 A11 A21

Relay messages
P021, P023, P027, P047, P260, P262, P263 P256, P257
P241
P242
P159, P160, P161, P162, P163, P164, P165, P166, P167, P168, P169, P170, P171, P172, P173, P174, P175, P176, P177
P243
Freeprog. relay functions relay function Variable relay functions

P185, P186, P187, P188, P189, P190, P191, P192, P193, P194, P247
P159, P160, P161, P162, P163, P164, Motor data P165, P166, set P167, P168, P169, P170, P171, P172, P173, P174, P175, P176, Transfer motor P177 data
Transfer motor data
P244
P245
A31 A41 A51 A61

P247 ?
P179, P181
P246
X451 A91
Diagnostic functions ! dn/dt monitoring P20 Min/Max
Invert relay fct.
motor data set delta motor motor 2
A92
P206 to P218
Analog outputs D P012, P013, P026,
P066, P067, P068, P069, P071, P078, P079
Transient recorder function I/f openloop control

P311, P312, P313
P219, P220, P221, P222, P223, P224, P225, P226, P227, P228, P229, P230, P231, P232, P233, P234, P235, P236, P238 P237, P239 P180
Zero marks/Bero
P320, P321
04.97 07.94
X1 X2
Test sockets
D P072, P073, P074,
P076, P077, P080
Transfer motor data Enable changeover
04.97 07.94
1.5 Connections Main spindle modules (HS)
1.5
Connections
X432
Spindle encoder, Bero X412 or encoder output at the NC Test sockets
Motor encoder, RON 350
Warning!
DAU 3 X1 IR X421 56 14 24 8 663 65 81 E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E7 E8 E9 9 X411
X2 DAU 4
It is not permissible to connect spindle encoders to MSD control modules (MLFB 6SN11VVVBA130VA0)! If this is not observed, the drive converter and spindle encoder could be damaged.
M
X451 A91 M A92 M 289 A11 A21 A31 A41 A51 A61 672 673 674 AS1 AS2 X4332)
nset1 nset2
DAU 1 DAU 2
Inputs X431 IF RF HSS

2nd Md limit1)
Outputs X441 nact = nset1) Md < Mdx1) nact < nmin1) nact < nx1)
Motor temp. rise1) Converter overtemp.1)
TH = 01) Reset1) M191) Md controlled1) Oscillation1) G. box stage, bit 01) G. box stage, bit 11) G. box stage, bit 21) Enable voltage RS232C Interface
HS
Ready/fault
Signal. contact Start inhibit Bero connection
LC display + X151 P Equipment bus X351
P 600 DC link M 600
Motor terminals Fig. 1-3 Connections
U2
V2
W2
PE1
PE2
PE3
1) Freelyprogrammable terminals and relay functions as supplied 2) only for MLFB (Order No.) 6SN11210BA110AA1
HS/1-13
07.94 Main spindle modules (HS)
HS
HS/1-14
04.97 07.94
2.1.1 Initializing the system configuration with standard motors Main spindle modules (HS)
Determining and setting the system configuration
Warning The motor could accelerate to inadmissibly high speeds and terminal 64 (NE) and terminal 65 (controller inhibit) could become ineffective if incorrect values are set in P098. Only terminal 663 (axisspecific pulse cancellation) open is effective.
2.1
2.1.1
Initializing
Table 2-1
Motor and converter data sets

Initializing the system configuration with standard motors
HS
Initialization Parameter attributes
Number Mot. 1 P095 Mot. 2
Chance effective After initial ization After initial ization After initial ization
P051
Setting range
Description
6...13 dec
Power module code number Presetting: 7 (Section 6.2) from FW 3.00 Presetting: 3 1) Motor code number Presetting: 101 (Section 6.2) Encoder pulse number, motor measuring system Presetting: 2048 for 1PH4, 1PH6 Adapt for 1PH2 and toothedwheel encoder. Initialization SEtUP message is displayed. The selected motor/power module combination is loaded into the drivemachine data memory. The P000 operating display is displayed after successful initialization.
P096
101...425 dec
P098
128...4096 dec
P097
0...1 hex
1)
Power modules with MLFB (Order No.) 6SN12V1AV0VVVA1 are automatically identified from FW 3.00. It is then no longer possible to change P095.
HS/2-15
2.1.1 Initializing the system configuration with standard motors Main spindle modules (HS)
12.94 07.94
Operation from an uncontrolled infeed
Table 2-2
Operation from uncontrolled line supply infeed (UE) Parameter attributes
Chance effective After conversion After conversion
P051
Setting range
Description
10
100...6000 RPM
Speed at start of field weakening Multiply init. by the fact. Vsupply0.002 (corresponds to 0.8 for Vsupply=400V)
1 V
P176
10
1...150 %
Stall torque reduction factor 1 2 Multiply init. value by the factor V) (Vsupply0.002 (corresponds to 0.64 for Vsupply=400V) Start calculation, motor The calculations for the entered motor are started. 99 is entered in P096. Parameter transfer into the FEPROM
P177
online
10
0...1 hex
P052
online
0...1 hex
HS
HS/2-16
04.97 07.94
2.1.2 System configuration with special motors Main spindle modules (HS)
2.1.2
System configuration with special motors
Note When special motors are used, the motor data must be discussed with the responsible SIEMENS office.
Overview
S Initializing special motors S Motor data set S Characteristics for the flux setpoint and magnetizing inductance.
Initializing special motors

Table 2-3 Initializing special motors Parameter attributes Number Mot. 1 P095 Mot. 2 Chance effective After initial ization After initial ization P051 Setting range Description
HS
6...13 dec Power module code number Presetting: 7 (Section6.2) from FW 3.00 Presetting: 3 1) Motor code number Presetting: 101 (Section 6.2) Motor code number of a standard motor is entered, whose motor data approximately correspond to those of the special motor. Encoder pulse number, motor measuring system Presetting: 2048 Initialization SEtUP message is displayed. The selected motor/power module combinations are loaded into the drivemachine data memory. The operating display P000 is displayed after successful initialization.
P096
101...425 dec
P098
After initial ization
128...4096 dec
P097
0...1 hex
1)
Power modules with MLFB (Order No.) 6SN112V1AV0VVVA1 are identified automatically from FW 3.00. It is then not possible to change P095.
HS/2-17
04.97 07.94
Motor data set
For special motors, the motor data must be entered. The motor data list (P159 to P176) is provided in Section 6.6.
Table 2-4
Motor data set Parameter attributes
Chance effective online
P051
Setting range
Description
0.000 mH...65.535 mH
from FW 3.00 Lowleakage motors require a series reactor to smooth the phase currents. The series reactor acts on the drive converter just like an increased stator leakage reactance P169/229. Previously, P169/P229 had to be manually adapted. P158 and P294 influence the stall limiting and the preassignment (presetting) of the current controller. Motor data for motor 1 Motor data is entered for the special motor Start calculation, motor 1 (P096) The calculations for the entered special motor are started. 99 is entered in P096. Parameter transfer into the FEPROM
P159 to P176 P177
After conversion online
10 10
Refer to Section 6.6 0...1 hex
HS
P052
online
0...1 hex
HS/2-18
04.97 07.94
Flux setpoint and magnetizing inductance characteristic

Table 2-5 Flux setpoint and magnetizing inductance characteristic Parameter attributes Number Mot. 1 P172 P173 Mot. 2 Chance effective After conversion After conversion P051 Setting range Description
10 10
10...10000 RPM 100...6000 RPM
Upper speed Lh characteristic (magnetizing inductance characteristic) Speed at the start of field weakening Speed at the start of field weakening for the flux setpoint characteristic and the lower speed for Lh characteristic When an uncontr. infeed is used, the calc. value 1 must be multiplied by the factor Vsupply0.002 V (corresponds to 0.8 for Vsupply= 400V)
P175
After conversion
10
100...300 %
Gain factor, Lh characteristic P175 = Lh2 (at n=P172) Lh1 (at n=P173) 100 % = constant Lh over the complete speed range
. 100 %
HS
P176
After conversion
10
1...150 %
Stall torque reduction factor Stall torque limit: P176 > 100 %: Stall torque limit increased P176 < 100 %: Stall torque limit decreased For operation from an uncontr. infeed, the calc. 1 )2 value must be mult. by the fact.(Vsupply0.002 V (corresponds to 0.64 for Vsupply= 400V)
Flux setpoint
Magnetizing inductance L
h
Lh2
P175 [%]
Lh1 (Rated value) Speed [RPM]
100 %
P173
P173
P172
Speed [RPM]
HS/2-19
2.1.3 System configuration with star/delta motors, 2 motors Main spindle modules (HS)
04.97 07.94
2.1.3
System configuration with star/delta motors, 2 motors

Note When special motors are used, the motor data must be discussed with the responsible SIEMENS office.
Overview
S Initializing star/delta motors, 2 motors S Motor data sets S flux setpoint and magnetizing reactance characteristic S Motor changeover
Initializing star/ delta motors, 2 motors

Table 2-6 Initializing star/delta motors, 2 motors Parameter attributes Number Mot. 1 P095 Mot. 2 Chance effective After initial ization After initial ization Setting range P051 6...13 dec Power module code number Presetting: 7 (Section 6.2) from FW 3.00 Presetting: 3 1) Motor code number Presetting: 101 (Section 6.2) The following motor code number should be entered, depending on the system configuration: Star/delta standard motor Enter the even (star motor) Motor code number Star/delta special motor Enter an even motor code number of a standard motor (star), whose motor data approximately correspond to those of the special motor. 2 standard motors Enter the motor code number of the first standard motor 1. stand. motor is entered 2 special motors Enter a motor code number of standard motor whose motor data approximately correspond to the first special motor. P098 After initial ization 128...4096 dec Encoder pulse number, motor measuring system Presetting: 2048 Description
HS
P096
101...425 dec
1)
Power modules with MLFB (Order No.) 6SN12V1AV0VVVA1 are automatically identified from FW 3.00. It is then not possible to change P095.
HS/2-20
04.97 07.94
Table 2-6
Initializing star/delta motors, 2 motors Parameter attributes
Chance effective
P051
Setting range
Description
0...1 hex
Initialization The SEtUP message is displayed. The selected motor/power module combination is loaded into the drivemachine data memory. The operating display P000 is displayed after successful initialization.
P238
After conversion
10
101...338 dec
Motor code number Presetting: 101 (Section 6.2) The motor code number is entered for the 2nd motor (delta) depending on the system configuration. Procedure as for P096. Start the calculation for motor 2 (P238) Parameter transfer into the FEPROM
P052
P239
online online
10 4
0...1 hex 0...1 hex
Motor data sets, special motors
For special motors, the motor data must be entered. The list of motor data sets is provided in the Appendix (refer to Section 6.6).
S P158 to P176, star motor data, or data set, motor 1 S P294, P219 to P236 delta motor data or data set, motor 2
Table 2-7 Motor data sets Parameter attributes Number Mot. 1 P159 to P176 Mot. 2 P219 to P236 Chance effective After conversion Setting range P051 10 Refer to Section 6.6 Motor data for motor 1/motor 2 Motor data is entered depending on the system configuration: Star/delta standard motor no input required Star/deltaspecial motor, enter the motor data for star (P159 to P176) and delta (P219 to P236) 2 standard motors no input required 2 special motors Enter the motor data for the 1st special motor (P159 to P176) and 2nd motor (P219 to P236) input P158 P294 online 4 0.000 mH...65.535 mH from FW 3.00 Lowleakage motors require a series reactor to smooth the phase currents. The series reactor acts on the drive converter just like an increased stator leakage reactance P169/229. Previously, P169/P229 had to be manually adapted. P158 and P294 influence the stall limiting and the preassignment (presetting) of the current controller Description
HS
HS/2-21
04.97 07.94
Table 2-7
Motor data sets Parameter attributes
Number Mot. 1 P177 Mot. 2 P237
Setting range P051 10 0...1 hex
Description
Start calculation, motor 1(P096)/motor 2 (P238) The calculations for the entered motor data are started if P180=0. Parameter transfer into the FEPROM
P052
online
0...1 hex
Flux setpoint and magnetizing inductance characteristic

Table 2-8 Flux setpoint and magnetizing inductance characteristic Parameter attributes Number Mot. 1 P172 Mot. 2 P232 P233 Chance effective After conversion After conversion P051 Setting range Description
10 10
10...10000 RPM 100...6000 RPM
Upper speed Lh characteristic (magnetizing inductance characteristic) Speed at the start of field weakening Speed at the start of field weakening for the flux setpoint characteristic and the lower speed for Lh characteristic When an uncontr. infeed is used, the calc. value must be multiplied by the factor Vsupply0.002 1 V (corresponds to 0.8 for Vsupply= 400V) Gain factor Lh characteristic P175 = Lh2 (at n=P172) Lh1 (at n=P173) 100 % = constant Lh over the complete speed range . 100 %
HS
P173
P175
P235
After conversion
10
100...300 %
P176
P236
After conversion
10
1...150 %
Stall torque reduction factor Stall torque limit: P176 > 100 %: Stall torque limit increased P176 < 100 %: Stall torque limit decreased For oper. from an uncontr. infeed, the calc. va1 )2 lue must be mult. by the factor (Vsupply0.002 V (corresponds to 0.64 for Vsupply= 400V)
Flux setpoint
Magnetizing inductance L
h
Lh2
P175 [%]
Lh1 (Rated value) P173 Speed [RPM]
100 %
P173
P172
Speed [RPM]
HS/2-22
03.96 07.94
Motor changeover
Table 2-9 Motor changeover Parameter attributes Number Mot. 1 P180 Mot. 2 Chance effective online P051 Setting range Description
10
0...1 hex
Enable motor changeover (star/delta) 0H: Motor changeover not possible 1H: Enable motor changeover Note: For the changeover request, a freelyprogrammable input terminal (E1 to E9) must be assigned function number 5 (parameterization, Section 3.2.2)
HS
HS/2-23
2.2 Standard applications Main spindle modules (HS)
04.97 07.94
2.2
2.2.1
Standard applications
Operating display
The actual converter operating status is displayed in parameters P000 and P100.
Table 2-10
Operating display Display
Function group Relay function

freelyprogr. relay function 1 terminal A11 P241 nact = nset1) freelyprogr. relay function 2 terminal A21 P242 |Md| < Mdx1) freelyprogr. relay function 3 terminal A31 P243 |nact| < nmin1) freelyprogr. relay function 4 terminal A41 P244 |nact| < nx1) freelyprogr. relay function 5 terminal A51 P245 mottemp1) freelyprogr. relay function 6 terminal A61 P246 var. relay function (P186)1) ready/fault terminal 672/674 P053 ready The segment is driven if the appropriate relay has pulledin.
Operating mode
drive not enabled:progress condition refer to column equipment status speed controlled operation
Equipment status
pulse enable at the NE module missing (T.63/T.48)
Operating mode
Display in P000: (only for star/delta mode) star circuit selected
Gearbox stage
Gearbox stage 1 is selected
axisspecific pulse enable missing (T663)
Gearbox stage 2 is selected delta circuit selected Gearbox stage 3 is selected
HS
torque controlled operation torque controlled operation with slip monitoring Operating mode M19 spindle positioning mode Operating mode Caxis Operating mode HPC axis 0.5 ms or 0.3ms digital filter is active
controller enable missing at the NE module (T.64 and/ or controller ena- Display in P100: ble missing at the (only for spindle posimain spindle mo- tioning mode) dule (T65) RFG enable position 1 semissing (T.81) lected
inactive
Gearbox stage 5 is selected setpoint enable missing (select terminal function No. 16) position 2 selected Gearbox stage 6 is selected
position 3 selected Torque direction display for enabled motor: position 4 selected
Operating mode HPC axis 0.6 ms or 0.35ms diag. functions, I/f controlled operation Oscillation function has been selected (from fct. 3.00)
motor operation
generator operation incremental positioning selected
Gearbox stage 8 is selected Gearbox stage 1...8 Selected via freely programmable terminal function P081...P089 =9, 10, 11
Speed controller clock fast, clock is active
1)
as supplied
HS/2-24
04.97 07.94
2.2.2 Firmware version and module versions Main spindle modules (HS)
2.2.2
Table 2-11
Firmware version and module versions

Firmware and module version Parameter attributes
Number Mot. 1 (P099) (P150) Mot. 2
Chance effective
P051
Setting range
Description
0.00...99.00
Firmware release Board code
Function of connector X432: F00H No function 200H with additional input for spindle encoder 300H Output, pulse encoder signal for external use
HS
HS/2-25
2.2.3 Setting parameters for standard applications Main spindle modules (HS)
04.97 07.94
2.2.3
Setting parameters for standard applications
Overview
S Speed settings S torque limits S Motor temperature monitoring S Oscillation
Speed setting values

Table 2-12 Speed settings Parameter attributes Number Mot. 1 P022 Mot. 2 P261 Chance effective online P051 Setting range Description
HS
P025 online 4
1...nrated RPM
Shutdown speed, pulse cancellation When the controller is inhibited and the shutdown speed has been fallen below, the drive is switched into a nocurrent condition (shutdown without overshoot). Pulses are canceled with a delay after the controller is inhibited FW 3.00 Pulse cancellation can be delayed after controller inhibit after braking along the down ramp via P025.
0...15000 ms
Control inhibit n
Braking along the down ramp
Pulse cancellation initiated
Shutdown speed P022 t Time delay, P025 P029 P264 online 4 0...nmaxMot RPM Speed limiting Max. motor speed setting Encoder phase error correction If the two encoder tracks are not precisely shifted through 90, then this results in torque ripple. Setting resolution 1 corresponds to 0.18 max. value 400 corresponds to 72
P036
online
400...400 dec
HS/2-26
03.96 07.94
Table 2-12
Speed settings Parameter attributes
P051
Setting range
Description
1...32000 RPM
Changeover speed, motor encoder evaluation Above this speed, the fine evaluation of the speed actual value generation is disabled. (from firmware V2.00, no longer relevant) Hysteresis, P037/P267 (from firmware V2.00, no longer relevant)
P038
P268
online
1...500 RPM
Torque limit values
Table 2-13
Torque limits Parameter attributes
Number Mot. 1 P039.1 P041 Mot. 2 P269.1 P271
Chance effective online online
P051
Setting range
Description
4 4
5...300 % 5...100 %
1st torque limit (referred to the rated motor torque) 2nd torque limit Is activated by terminal 111 and when the speed, set in P050/P290 is exceeded. Changeover speed from Md1 to Md2 Regenerative limiting (referred to P039/P269 or P041/P271) Changeover speed for P040/P270 Hysteresis, P042/P272
HS
P050 P040.1 P042 P043
P290 P270.1 P272 P273
online online online online
4 4 4 4
0...nmaxMot RPM 5...100 % 1...nmaxMot RPM 0...nmaxMot RPM
Torque [%] (referred to the rated motor torque) P050 P039.1 Motoring P041 P040.1 Generating P039.1 P042 Max. selectable torque limit: Imaxconv. I0 mot Iratedmot maximum converter current noload motor current rated motor current I2maxconv I02 Mot I2ratedmot I02 Mot 100 % (referred to 10 s overload) Speed [RPM]
HS/2-27
04.97 07.94
Motor temperature monitoring

Table 2-14 Motor temperature monitoring Parameter attributes Number Mot. 1 P063 Mot. 2 P291 Chance effective online P051 Setting range 0...170 C Description
Maximum motor temperature when exceeded, after approx. 1 s: Alarm motor overtemperature relay Time in P065: Pulse cancellation and fault message F14 Fixed temperature The motor parameter is calculated using this fixed temperature if a value 0. Caution! The motor temperature monitoring is inactivated. Timer, motor temperature monitoring
P064
online
0...170 C
P065
online
0...600 s
HS
Oscillation
Table 2-15 Oscillation Parameter attributes Number Mot. 1 P154 P155 P156 P157 Mot. 2 Chance effective online online online online P051 Setting range Description
4 4 4 4
nmaxMot... nmaxMot RPM nmaxMot... nmaxMot RPM 10...10000 ms 10...10000 ms 0...10000 ms from FW 3.00
Oscillation setpoint 1 Oscillation setpoint 2 Oscillation pause time 1 Oscillation interval time 2 When a 0 is entered, only the value in P154 is effective, from FW 3.00
Speed [RPM] P154
P155 P156 P157
Time [ms]
HS/2-28
10.94 07.94
2.3 Other applications Main spindle modules (HS)
2.3
2.3.1
Other applications
Oriented spindle stop (via NC auxiliary function M19)
Function M19 can be selected using a select terminal (E1 to E9) (refer to Section 3.2.2).
Table 2-16
Oriented spindle stop (via NC auxiliary function M19) Parameter attributes
P051
Setting range
Description
nmaxMot... nmaxMot RPM
M19, speed setpoint normalization Speed, which is reached for the analog input voltage in P024. + = clockwise rotation for a positive speed setpoint = counterclockwise rotation for a negative speed setpoint M19, offset correction e. g. positive correction 2FH negative correction FF00H M19, changeover speed Speed changeover point of the setpoint normalization factor. When the selected speed is fallen below, the values, entered in parameters P054 and> P055 become effective. Shutdown threshold, roundingoff M19 If the selected speed is fallen below, the speed setpoint smoothing and roundingoff are disabled. Restart is realized after canceling M19 operation. FW 2.00 M19, switching threshold, I component speed controller Speed actual value threshold for switchingin the integral action time from the speed controller. The integral action time is reenabled if the absolute value of the speed, entered in P062, is fallen below. Control word P062 is activated by setting bit 4 = 1 (corresponds to 10H) in P090.w
P055
online
C000...4000 hex
P056
online
0...nmaxMot RPM
HS
P058
online
0...nmaxMot RPM
P062
online
0...nmaxMot RPM
P090
online
10
0...FFFF hex
HS/2-29
2.3.2 C axis Main spindle modules (HS)
10.94 07.94
2.3.2
C axis
Caxis operation can be switchedin using a select terminal (E1 to E9) (Section 3.2.2). The setpoint can only be entered via terminals 24 and 8.
Table 2-17
Caxis Parameter attributes
Number Mot. 1 P114.1 Mot. 2
Change effective online
P051
Setting range
Description
nrated1...nrated1 RPM
Normalization, speed setpoint C axis Speed, which is reached for the analog input voltage in P024. + = clockwise rotation for positive speed setpoint = counterclockwise rotation for negative speed setpoint Offset correction for P114 Max. correction value 2000 or E000 corresponds approx. to 1/8 of P114, if P024 = 10.0
P115.1
online
C000...4000 hex
HS
2.3.3 Spindle positioning
Overview
S function description S Position reference values S Function parameter 1 S Position controller S Openloop control parameters S Function parameter 2 S diagnostics parameter S short startup
Function description
Without a higherlevel closedloop position control loop of a numerical control, the main spindle is positioned from the same direction of rotation or with a direction of rotation reversal.
HS/2-30
12.94 07.94
2.3.3 Spindle positioning Main spindle modules (HS)
There are various ways of sensing the position:
S with motor encoder (sin/cos tracks) without gearbox (all parameters are pre
initialized for this case)
S with motor encoder (sin/cos tracks) and external zero marks (BERO) at
the spindle when the gearbox stage is changedover
S with incremental spindle encoder (max. 8192 pulses per revolution), only for
versions with spindle encoder input (6SN11VVVBA120VA0) Spindle encoder signals are always evaluated as squarewave including pulse quadrupling.
Warning It is not possible to connect spindle encoders to main spindle drive control cards with pulse encoder signal outputs for external use (MLFB 6SN11VVVBA130VA0)! If this is not observed, the equipment and spindle encoder could be damaged.
The hardware configuration must be entered via P141. The select terminal function Positioning on (Funct.No. 28) must be connected via parameters P081 to P089 to one of the freelyprogrammable terminals E1 to E9 (refer to Section 3.2.2). Positioning is initiated by connecting the enable voltage to the selected terminal. Positioning is executed in several phases:
HS
S Drive braking
Starting from any speed, the drive brakes down to the search speed along the ramp specified by the rampup/rampdown generator. The speed setpoint is entered from the positioning control and if a speed setpoint is injected at terminal 56, this is suppressed. The search speed, is the highest speed from which the drive can brake at the reference position in one revolution without overshoot. The upper search speed limit is defined by the deceleration capability of the drive, and thus by the external moment of inertia.
S Position identification
The closedloop position controller is switchedin after the search speed has been reached and the zero mark identified.
HS/2-31
10.94 07.94
S Travel to reference position

The final rotation before the target is subdivided into three phases, dependent on the distance from the target.
Speed (RPM) Search speed P146 Ref. position identified Braking curve P139 Gradient 1 P136 Phase 1 2 Gradient 2 P13 or 138 3 360 Last revolution P134 P135 0 Distance (degrees)
HS
Fig. 2-1 Travel into position
The initiation points and gradients of the individual sections can be set. Thus, the approach characteristics can be adapted to the widest range of requirements (P134 to P139). If the drive is rotating at a lower speed than the search speed, it can accelerate up to the search speed to reduce the positioning time. (P142). In most cases, it is sufficient to adapt the search speed P146 and adapt parameters P137 or P138 for optimization purposes.
S Reference format
The position reference value may only have values from 0 to max. +32767; from firmware release V2.00 max. 64000 I/rev. (corresponds to max. encoder pulse number between two zero pulses). The direction of rotation is obtained from the polarity of the search speed. Position reference values are entered in encoder pulses. When positioning with the motor encoder, P141 allows a multiplication factor to be entered to improve the reference value resolution. This multiplication factor can be 1, 2, 4, 8, 16 and 32. The multiplication factor can be selected so high that an arithmetic pulse number of up to 32768 is obtained. Example: RON350 standard encoder (2048 pulses). When using multiplication factor 16 this results in a calculated pulse number of 32768. This value must be entered into P131. Setpoint inputs from 0 to 32768, from firmware release V2.00, max. 64000 pulses/revolution are possible. If higher values are entered, fault message FP01 is output when positioning.
HS/2-32
07.94
S Enter the position reference value

Positioning can be realized with four internal position reference values per gearbox stage (P121 to P122 and P124 to P125).
Select terminal function 23 0 1 0 1 Select terminal function 27 0 0 1 1 Position reference value 1 2 3 4 Parameter for position reference value P121 P122 P124 P125
Another reference value can be selected, using select terminal functions 23 and 27 after the reference position has been reached. In this case, the signal at both terminals must be changed within 20 ms so that it can be considered to be simultaneous. When selecting a new position via a gearbox stage terminal, the in position status is only executed, if the signal at the terminal, with function 28 (positioning on) again changes from low to high. Contrary to select terminal functions 23 and 27, in this case, the zero mark is always passedover again.
S Incremental position reference value

An incremental position reference value per gearbox stage can be entered via parameter P123. If the spindle is in position, and a positive edge appears at the freelyprogrammable terminal, assigned the select function 22, then the incremental position reference value is added to the current position reference value, and the drive travels to this calculated new position. This procedure can be restarted after the new position has been reached. For parameter P123, contrary to P121, P122, P124 and P125, negative values are also permissible.
HS
S Zero mark offset

A zero mark shift can be entered via parameters P129/P130. Setting possibility: Select positioning control (P149 = 1H) Inhibit controllers and pulses. Rotate the spindle through a complete revolution and then set it into the required position (check via P140 corresponds to the position actual value).Set P129 to 1H, and wait until the parameter is automatically set again to 0H. The current position is now transferred as the new zero mark. The difference to the actual zero mark is displayed in P130. If the spindle is now positioned to 0H, then the spindle moves to the position, which was stored in P130.
S Relay signals
Select relay functions 9 and 10 (refer to Section 3.3.2) are available for the position reached relay signals. The associated tolerances are entered via parameters P144 and P145.
HS/2-33
07.94
S Spindle resynchronization (zero mark)

When using a BERO zero mark, the position counter status of the spindle is resynchronized after each gearbox stage change. This resynchronization can be inhibited, or can be selected specifically via select terminals. Setting possibility: Spindle resynchronization can be suppressed after a gearbox stage change, by setting bit 1 in parameter P149. In this case, a signal change at one of the freelyprogrammable terminals, assigned the select terminal function gearbox stage, bit 0 to bit 2, is then interpreted as parameter changeover from the position controller. Actual mechanical gearbox stage changeovers, when positioning to a motor encoder with external zero mark must be signaled to the position controller via select terminal function 29. Select terminal function 29 latchesin. The high signal level must be available for at least 20 ms.
Position reference values

Table 2-18 Position reference values Parameter attributes
HS
P051
Setting range
Description
0...64000 dec
Position reference value 1 Value is entered in encoder pulse number (max. input is increments per revolution) Position reference value 2 Position reference value, incremental Value is entered in encoder pulse number (max. input is increments per revolution) Position reference value 3 Position reference value 4
P122 P123
online online
4 4
0...64000 dec 32768...32767 dec 0...64000 dec 0...64000 dec
P124 P125
online online
4 4
HS/2-34
07.94
Function parameter 1
Table 2-19 Function parameter 1 Parameter attributes Number Mot. 1 P126 Mot. 2 Change effective online P051 Setting range Description
0.0...180 degrees
Bandwidth integrator enable, speed controller In order to improve the approach characteristics when positioning, it is sometimes advantageous, if the speed controller integrator is disabled. The integrator inhibit (I component = 0) is canceled in the target range. The target range bandwidth can be set via this parameter. Startup parameter, C axis/position. The integrator inhibit function is enabled by setting bit 5 (20H) via P149. Setting the internal zero mark When bit 0 (1H) is set, the zero mark offset to the hardware zero mark is entered in P130 (actual position counter status). Zero mark shift Enters the difference to the hardware zero mark Max. pulse number between 2 zero marks The pulse number for one spindle revolution is entered. If a spindle encoder (squarewave signals) is used, then quadrupling must be taken into account. If positioning is realized with gearbox and BERO, the difference between two consecutive BERO zero marks can be readout via P133. P133 indicates the most accurate results in the speed range 100 to 500 RPM. Data readout at standstill indicate incorrect values.
P149
online
0...FFFF hex
P129
online
0...1 hex
P130 P131
online online
4 4
0...64000 dec 128...64000 dec
HS
HS/2-35
10.94 07.94
Position controller
Table 2-20 Position controller Parameter attributes Number Mot. 1 P134 P135 P136 P137 Mot. 2 Change effective online online online online P051 Setting range Description
4 4 4 4
0.0...180.0 degrees 0.0...180.0 degrees 0...FFFF hex 0...FFFF hex
Intervention point P136 Intervention point P137/P138 P gain, gradient 1 P gain, gradient 2 Gain setting when positioning with spindle encoder. P gain, gradient 2 (HMS) Gain setting when positioning with motor encoder. Multiplier for braking parabola Factor to set the gradient of the braking characteristic, refer to Fig. 2-1.
P138 P139
online online
4 4
0...FFFF hex 0...FFFF hex
HS
HS/2-36
04.97 07.94
Control parameters
Table 2-21 Openloop control parameters Parameter attributes Number Mot. 1 P141 Mot. 2 Change effective online via P 143 P143 P051 Setting range Description
0...FFFF hex
Switching parameters, positioning Bit Value 0000H 0001H Evaluation of the motor encoder signals (HMS evaluation) Evaluation of the spindle encoder signals Note: X432 must be configured as spindle encoder input. This is only possible for board versions 6SN11210BA12 (always) and 6SN11210BA1V (using P033=0). Otherwise, fault message F10 is output. Spindle encoder signals are always evaluated as squarewave, including the pulse quadrupling. Zero pulse from the encoder External zero pulse (e.g. Bero ) Spindle encoder phase sequence is not inverted Spindle encoder phase sequence is inverted (actual value reversal) Setpoint multiplication factor 2 for positioning to a motor encoder with internal zero mark. Setpoint multiplication factor 4 for positioning to a motor encoder with internal zero mark. Setpoint multiplication factor 8 for positioning to a motor encoder with internal zero mark. Setpoint multiplication factor 16 for positioning to a motor encoder with internal zero mark. Setpoint multiplication factor 32 for positioning to a motor encoder with internal zero mark.
0000H 0002H 0000H
HS
0004H 0100H
8 0200H 9 0400H 10 0800H 11 1000H 12
Note: After changing the setpoint multiplication factor (bits 8 to 12), before transferring the new settings the pulse number must be adapted in P131 using P143. The changed settings must then be activated using P143. The setting of parameter P141 is transferred and activated, by changing the contents of parameter P143 from 0 to 1!
HS/2-37
07.94
Table 2-21
Openloop control parameters Parameter attributes
P051
Setting range
Description
0...1 hex
Transfer parameter P141 Values changed in P141 are transferred if P143 = 1. The parameter is automatically reset to 0. Flag for speed increase Bit Value 0000H The drive first accelerates to search speed, if positioning is started from a speed which is lower than the search speed, and then the position is approached (faster positioning). The spindle is not accelerated to the search speed, and the spindle moves into position from the instantaneous speed. Zero mark monitoring (fault FP02) is enabled. When positioning with a BERO, the zero mark is evaluated at each positioning sequence, otherwise, only after gearbox stage changeovers. The zero mark monitoring is also inhibited after gearbox stage changeover, with P142, bit 0 = 1. Zero mark monitoring (fault FP02) is inhibited.
P142
online
0...21 hex
0 0001H
0000H
HS
5
0020H
HS/2-38
07.94
Function parameter 2
Table 2-22 Function parameter 2 Parameter attributes Number Mot. 1 P144 Mot. 2 Change effective online P051 Setting range Description
0.00...18.00 degrees 0.00...18.00 degrees 0...4 nrated
Response bandwidth, relay 1 Setting for the relay signal in position 1 (refer to Section 3.3.2) Response bandwidth, relay 2 Search speed Speed setting value, where the position approach sequence is started. Motion window If the spindle is moved out of its position for pulse inhibit during positioning operation, then when the pulses are reenabled, the reference position is reapproached through the shortest path. If bit 3 is set in P149, this is only realized, if the motion window (P148) was not exited, and the terminal with function No. 28 (high) was not switched.
P145 P146
online online
4 4
P148
online
0.0...180.0 degrees
HS
HS/2-39
03.96 07.94
Table 2-22
Function parameter 2 Parameter attributes
P051
Setting range
Description
0...FFFF hex
Startup parameter, C axis/position. Bit Value

0000H Positioning inhibited, the control is not processed for positioning, i. e., positioning is not possible, and any position actual value displays are not accurate! The control is processed for positioning, and positioning is possible. When a positioning command is received (terminal with function No. 28, high), then the spindle is re synchronized, if the signal changes at a freely programmable terminal, assigned with the select terminal function gearbox stage bit 0 to bit 2. The spindle is only resynchronized, if there was a positive edge at a select terminal, with function 29, before the positioning command. Position reference values are not mirrored. The absolute position reference values are mirrored. For positioning sequences the position is approached from the selected direction. The position always approached with the same direction of rotation; the direction of rotation is specified by the polarity of the search speed. (Exception, refer to P148) The speed controller integral action time is active. The speed controller integral action time is disabled. In the target range (can be set via P126), the integral action time becomes active again. Overshoot reduced after braking to the search speed FW 2.00 Speed setpoint roundingoff (P019) is also effective during positioning. Speed setpoint roundingoff (P019) is deactivated when the positioning command is received. The speed setpoint smoothing (P018) is never active during positioning, independent of P149.
0
0001H 0000H
1
0002H
HS
2
0000H 0004H 0000H
0008H
0000H
0020H
0040H 0000H
0080H
HS/2-40
04.97 07.94
Diagnostic parameters
Table 2-23 diagnostics parameter Parameter attributes Number Mot. 1 (P100) (P128) Mot. 2 Change effective P051 Setting range Description
Operating display P100 (refer to Section 2.2.1) Actual position reference value The actual reference position is displayed in parameter P128 in encoder pulses. The value is only updated, if the positioning software is enabled with P149 = 1. Absolute position actual value without zero mark offset Difference between 2 ext. zero marks Displays the difference between two consecutive BERO zero marks (P141 = 2). Absolute position actual value with zero mark shift Position counter status with reference to the BERO The position counter status when positioning with a BERO is displayed. Diagnostics, motor encoder zero mark Diagnostics, spindle encoder zero mark
(P132) (P133)
(P140) (P147)
HS
(P320) (P321)
HS/2-41
07.94
Short startup
Startup example Hardware design: Encoder signals and zero pulse from the motor encoder
P149 must be set to 1H to enable the position program. Enter the hardware configuration via parameter P141 0 corresponds to the encoder signals from the motor encoder Set P141 to 0H (this is the presetting; if P141 is changed, the change must be transferred with P143 = 1 .
Enter a pulse number between two zero marks in P131
Can the position be set by manually rotating the spindle?
No
1. Enable drive (terminals 663, 65, 81) Yes 1. Issue controller and pulse inhibit. 2. Rotate the spindle through a complete revolution, and then rotate it to the reference position (the position actual value is displayed via P140). 2. With the speed setpoint entered, rotate the spindle through at least one revolution and then stop in position. 3. Disconnect terminals 65 and 663.
HS
Write 1H into P129: The parameter value automatically resets itself, so that this position is defined as software zero mark. The offset to the hardware zero mark is displayed in parameter P130.
Test position value: 1. Enable the drive (terminals 663, 65, 81) 2. Enter the speed setpoint 3. Select the select terminal (E1 to E9) with function No. 28 for positioning. The motor brakes to the search speed, and stops in the specified reference position. (The position reference value and actual value can be checked using P128 and P140.)
Required position reached?
No
Change position value via P121
Yes Optimize position using parameters P134 to P139. The search speed can be changed via P146. Additional functions (refer to the parameter description, tables 2-21 and 2-22) via parameters P142 and P149. The response bandwidth for both relay signals can be changed via P144 and P145. Store the changed parameters in FEPROM (P052). End
HS/2-42
03.96 07.94
2.3.4 Openloop torque controlled operation (master/slave) Main spindle modules (HS)
2.3.4
Openloop torque controlled operation (master/slave)
Overview
S function description S parameter settings S Parameter description S slip monitoring
Openloop torque controlled operation is necessary if the speed controller in the NC is used or for the slave drive for master/slave applications. The open loop torque controlled mode can be selected via a select terminal, E1 to E9 (refer to Section 3.2.2). For master/slave operation (2 spindle drives can be operated rigidly coupled), the torque setpoint must be fed from the master via a D/A converter output (adaptation P066 or P068 refer to Section 3.3.5) to the slave drive (adaptation P048, P049).
Warning If the mechanically rigid coupling is released, the slave drive must be changed over to closedloop speed control, otherwise the drive will accelerate to max. speed, although the Md setpoint input is 0.
HS
Master drive Speed setpoint Term. 56/14 D/A converter output assignment via P066/068 Term. A9n Speed setpoint Torque setpoint Term. 56/14 M 3
Rigid or quasi rigid coupling, which can also be operationally released.
Slave drive
Mdset adaptation Term. 24/8 via P048/049 Term. En Select terminal, or torque control (fct. No. 4)
M 3
Speed setpoint for the slave for openloop torque control operation with slip Slip monitoring monitoring
Term. En Select terminal, slip monitoring (fct. No. 32) FW 2.00
Slave drive: For rigid coupling, openloop torque control With coupling released, closedloop speed control Fig. 2-2 Master/slave operation
HS/2-43
04.97 07.94
Note For controller inhibit in the openloop torque controlled mode, the spindle must be braked via the Md setpoint input; the pulses are only internally canceled after the shutdown speed (P022) has been reached.
Parameter settings
Example: In order that the torque setpoint is available at terminals A92 and M of the master drive torque setpoint, address 0C6CH must be written into parameter P068. Parameter P069 can be used, by shifting, to define which voltage is available at a specific torque. The normalization of the rated motor torque can be taken from the contents of address 0F52H. Address 0F52H must be entered into P250 in order to determine this value, and the normalization value for the rated torque can be read out of P251.
Contents, P251 (hex)
Shift factor P069 0 1 2 3 0 1 2
Value to be changed (hex) 0C00 1800 3000 6000 1000 2000 4000
HS
0C00
Output voltage D/A converter 2 [V] at Mdrated 0.94 1.88 3.75 7.50 1.25 2.50 5.00
1000
At the max. output voltage, the torque limit in P039 must be taken into account (160 % corresponds to Mdrated . 1.6), and it must be ensured, that saturation does not occur (> 10 V). If the slave drive is switched to the torque mode, parameters P048 and P049 are still effective. Torque adaptation can be executed using P048 (corresponding to P014 in closedloop speed controlled operation) and torque drift can be compensated with P049 (corresponding to P015 in closedloop speed controlled operation). Parameter P049 is not suitable for compensating for frictional forces. P048 and P049, are ineffective in the closedspeed controlled mode. From firmware release 3.00 The torque data is updated every 1 ms via address 304C (previously 20 ms) and is normalized with 5 V 8 the rated motor torque. Example: Output via terminals A92 and M P68=304CH P69=0H Normalization can be influenced by P26. For P26=100%, 5 V corresponds to the rated torque. For P26=160%, 8 V corresponds to the rated torque.
HS/2-44
03.96 07.94
Parameter description
Table 2-24 Parameter description Parameter attributes Number Mot. 1 P048 P049 Mot. 2 Change effective online online P051 Setting range Description
4 4
250...250 % C000...4000 hex
Normalization, Mdset The setting is referred to the rated motor torque. Torque setpoint offset
Openloop torque control with slip monitoring FW 2.00
The mechanical coupling between drives through a friction connection can cause the openloop torque controlled slave drive to slip. Using this function, the slave drive monitors the speed actual value deviation from the speed setpoint, and reduces the drive torque when a specific speed tolerance has been exceeded. Assignment, speed setpoint channels:
S master drive, terminals 56/14 S slave drive, terminals 24/8

The slip monitoring function can be activated using the select terminal function No. 32 (refer to Fig. 2-2).
HS
HS/2-45
12.94 07.94
Table 2-25
slip monitoring Parameter attributes
P051
Setting range
Description
0.1...100.0 %
Speed deviation, slip monitoring Permissible speed deviation referred to the actual speed setpoint. Hysteresis to P340 Torque reduction, slip monitoring If the speed deviation, parameterized in P340, is fallen below, the torque setpoint is reduced. Delay time, slip monitoring Delay time, until the torque reduction has been canceled. Torque reducing speed, slip monitoring Speed, at which the torque setpoint is reduced. Torque increasing speed, slip monitoring Speed, at which the torque setpoint is increased. Speed deviation, actual slip monitoring If the displayed value is greater than the threshold set in P340, slip occurs and the monitoring becomes active.
P346 P341
online online
4 4
0.0...100.0 % 0.0...100.0 %
P343
online
0...999 ms
P344 P345 (P347)
online online online
4 4
0.01...100.00 %/ms 0.01...100.00 %/ms
HS
nact nset
P346 P340 @jnsetj
Reduction factor for Mdset P344 100 %
P341 P343
P345
t
nact nset nset @> 100 %
(P347) =
HS/2-46
04.97 07.94
2.3.5 Monitor function Main spindle modules (HS)
2.3.5
Monitor function
The address contents (data in the RAM area) of the main spindle drive module can be read via parameters P249 to P251.
Note A list of important measurement quantities (RAM variables) and their addresses are provided in the Appendix (Section 6.5).
Table 2-26
Monitor function Parameter attributes
Number Mot. 1 P249 P250 P251 Mot. 2
Change effective online online online
P051
Setting range
Description
10 10
Segment, memory location monitor Segment address selection Address, memory location monitor Offset address selection Value display, memory location monitor Displays the contents of address P249/P250
HS
2.3.6
HPC axis (FW 2.00)

In the HPCaxis mode, only the freelyprogrammable terminals E1 to E6 can be assigned with functions.
Overview
S function description S system configuration S converter interfaces S controller optimization S diagnostics
The HighPrecision C axis (HPC) mode permits improved load and control characteristics by reducing the speed controller clock to 0.5 or 0.6 ms. 0.3 or 0.35 ms is possible from FW 3.0. Expanded functional scope in the HPCaxis mode: flux adaptation (noise reduction) it is possible to parameterize 2 digital filters in the torque setpoint channel for 0.6 ms speed controller clock (from FW 3.0=0.35 ms possible)
HS/2-47
2.3.6 HPC axis Main spindle modules (HS)
03.96 07.94
The following functions are not available in the HPCaxis mode: torque setpoint smoothing reciprocation NC auxiliary function M19 2nd torque limit value rampfunction generator Speed contr. adaptation gearbox stage changeover spindle positioning reduced terminal and relay functions smoothing D/A converter P/Pmax display
System configuration
Prerequisites for HPCaxis operation: speed range: " nrated motor selection only possible for motor 1 (star operation) HPC axis has priority over a standard C axis changeover into the standard mode is realized online; all functions are then available again.
HS
S Selecting HPC axis

Table 2-27 Selecting HPC axis Parameter attributes Number Mot. 1 P149 Mot. 2 Change effective online P051 Setting range Description
0...FFFF hex
Startup parameter, C axis/position. Bit 8 Value 0000H 0100H HPC axis cannot be selected HPC axis can be selected
The HPCaxis mode is selected via the select terminal function No. 30
S Torque limit values

Table 2-28 Torque limit values Parameter attributes Number Mot. 1 P109 Mot. 2 Change effective online P051 Setting range Description
5...180 %
Torque limit value, HPC Sets the max. permissible torque, referred to the rated motor torque. Regenerative limit, HPC Limits the torque in regenerative operation, referred to P109.
P110
online
5...100 %
HS/2-48
07.94
Drive converter interfaces
S Analog setpoint
The analog speed setpoint or Md setpoint can only be entered via setpoint channel 2 (terminal 24/8). The speed setpoint is limited to " nrated motor.
Table 2-29
Analog speed setpoint Parameter attributes
P051
Setting range
Description
C000...4000 hex
Offset correction, speed setpoint HPC Drift adjustment for the analog speed setpoint input Normalization, speed setpoint HPC The speed, which should be reached, at the analog input voltage, which was set in P024, can be set using P094.
P094
online
nrated1... +nrated1 RPM
S Permanentlywired terminal functions

Terminals 663, 65 and 81 are also available in the HPCaxis mode.
HS
S Freelyprogrammable terminal functions

Only the input terminals E1 to E6 (P081 to P086) are evaluated. The following terminal functions are available (refer to Section 3.2.2)
Table 2-30 Terminal functions Terminal functions Reset fault memory (R) (fault acknowledgment) Opentorque loop controlled operation Integrator inhibit, speed controller Speed setp. smoothing Suppress F11 (travel to endstop) HPC axis Inverter clock frequency Function No. 3 4 8 25 26 30 33.34
HS/2-49
07.94
S Permanentlywired relay functions

Terminals 672/673/674 are also available in the HPCaxis mode.
S Freelyprogrammable relay functions

The statuses of the nonavailable relay functions are frozen when the HPC axis mode is selected. The following relay functions are available (refer to Section 3.3.2):
Table 2-31 Relay functions Terminal functions nact < nmin Motor overtemperature, alarm Converter overtemperature, alarm Variable relay function 1 Variable relay function 2 Function No. 1 5 6 7 8
HS
Table 2-32
S Speed setpoint smoothing
Speed setp. smoothing Parameter attributes
P051
Setting range
Description
3...10000 ms
Smoothing time, speed setpoint HPC (switchedin/out using P053 or via select terminal function No. 25) Control word Bit 4 Value 0000H 0010H Speed setpoint smoothing inactive Speed setpoint smoothing active
P053
online
0...FFFF hex
S Speed controller gain, integral action time

Table 2-33 Speed controller gain, integral action time Parameter attributes Number Mot. 1 P111 Mot. 2 Change effective online P051 Setting range Description
3.0...240.0 dec
P gain, speed controller HPC The Pgain setting is, for the same gain factor, a factor of 4 smaller than in the standard mode. Speed controller integral action time, HPC
P112
online
2...6000 ms
HS/2-50
07.94
S Flux adaptation
Table 2-34 Flux adaptation Parameter attributes Number Mot. 1 P119 Mot. 2 Change effective online P051 Setting range Description
5...100 %
Flux adaptation, HPC Reduction of the motor magnetic flux (noise reduction)
S Digital filter, torque setpoint channel

2 digital filters can be parameterized in the HPCaxis mode, which are connected in series. However, a filter can only be activated, if the speed controller sampling time is set to 0.6 ms via P117. The actual sampling time can be seen in the operating display (Section 2.2.1). (digital filter, also refer to Section 4.1).
Table 2-35 digital filter, torque setpoint channel Parameter attributes Number Mot. 1 P118 Mot. 2 Change effective online P051 Setting range Description
HS
0...FFFF hex
Typ. torque setpoint filter Bit Value 0000H 0 0001H 0000H 8 0100H 0000H 9 0200H Bandstop characteristics, standard mode Low pass characteristics, standard mode Bandstop, filter 1 HPCaxis mode Low pass filter 1 HPCaxis mode FW 2.00 Bandstop filter 2 HPCaxis mode Low pass filter 2 HPCaxis mode FW 2.00
P091
online
45...750 Hz
Frequency filter 1 HPC Low pass filter: 3 dB transition frequency Bandstop: Center frequency Quality, filter 1 HPC Filter quality of the bandstop filter, quality = 1, corresponds to 1.00 Frequency, filter 2 HPC Quality, filter 2 HPC
P092
online
0.50...10.00 dec
P107 P108
online online
4 4
45...750 Hz 0.50...10.00 dec
HS/2-51
04.97 07.94
Table 2-35
digital filter, torque setpoint channel Parameter attributes
Change effective
P051
Setting range
Description
0...FFFF hex
Torque setpoint filter selection Bit Value 0000H 0001H 0000H 8 0100H 0000H 9 0200H 0000H Filter, standard mode inactive Filter, standard mode active Filter 1 HPCaxis mode inactive Filter 1 HPCaxis mode active FW 2.00 Filter 2 HPCaxis mode inactive Filter 2 HPCaxis mode active FW 2.00 Speed controller sampling time 0.5 ms, no filter is possible in the HPC axis mode. 0.3 ms possible from FW 3.00 Speed controller sampling time 0.6 ms, filters can be activated in the HPCaxis mode, FW 2.00. 0.35 ms possible from FW 3.00.
online online
online
RESET
0400H 10
HS
Diagnostics
The following diagnostic functions are not available in the HPC axis mode:
S diagnostics parameter P020 (dn/dt monitoring), P320, P321 S transient recoder function S I/f controlled operation (openloop)
J
HS/2-52
10.94 07.94
3.1 Analog speed setpoint interface Main spindle modules (HS)
Parameterization of the drive converter interfaces
3.1
Analog speed setpoint interface
Overview
S speed setpoint channel selection S normalization, analog speed setpoint S unipolar speed setpoint input (fixed direction of rotation) S Steadystate minimum speed
Speed setpoint channel selection
Table 3-1 Speed setpoint channel selection Parameter attributes Number Mot. 1 P113 Mot. 2 Change effective online P051 Setting range Description
HS
0...3 dec
Channel selection, speed setpoint P113 0 1 2 31) Term. 56/14 off on off on Term. 24/8 off off on on
1) Setpoint inputs are added
HS/3-53
03.96 07.94
Normalization, analog speed setpoint
Table 3-2
Normalization, analog speed setpoint Parameter attributes
Number Mot. 1 P014.1 Mot. 2 P258.1
P051
Setting range
Description
nmaxMot... nmaxMot RPM
Speed for max. motor operating speed Speed, which is achieved for the analog input voltage in P024. + = clockwise direction of rotation for a positive speed setpoint = counterclockwise direction of rotation for a negative speed setpoint Normalization, setpoint Analog speed setpoint voltage for P014/P258 Note: Maximum setpoint voltage at terminal 56/14 and terminal 24/8, " 11 V. Offset correction, speed setpoint e.g. positive correction value 2FH negative correction value FF00H
P024
online
5.0...15.0 V
P015.1
online
C000...4000 hex
HS
Unipolar speed setpoint input

Table 3-3 Unipolar speed setpoint input Parameter attributes Number Mot. 1 P053 Mot. 2 Change effective online P051 Setting range Description
0...FFFF hex
Control word Bit Value 0000H 2000H 13 Speed setpoint, bipolar by generating the absolute value of the speed setpoint, only one direction of rotation is permitted. The direction of rotation is defined using P014/P258. FW 2.00
HS/3-54
07.94
Steadystate minimum speed

Table 3-4 Steadystate minimum speed Parameter attributes Number P030 Change effective online P051 4 Setting range 0...nmaxMot RPM Description Steadystate minimum speed No steadystate operation in the speed range around zero. The range is runthrough with the current ramp up or rampdown times, if the speed setpoint exceeds the steadystate minumum speed in the opposite direction of rotation. Zero speed can only be achieved by inhibiting the permanentlywired enable signals. FW 2.00
Effective setpoint [RPM]
200
200
Input setpoint [RPM]
HS
HS/3-55
3.2.1 Permanentlywired terminal functions Main spindle modules (HS)
10.94 07.94
3.2
Input terminals
Warning Terminal function parameters P081 to P089 may only be programmed when the pulses are canceled (terminal 63 or terminal 663 open).
3.2.1
Table 3-5
Permanentlywired terminal functions
Terminal function Axis specific pulse enable
Description The inverter enable (motor control) is realized if the enable voltage is connected at terminal 663 (axisspecific pulse enable) and terminal 65 (controller enable). If the axisspecific pulse enable is removed with the motor is still rotating, the inverter is inhibited after 20 ms and the motor coasts down in a nocurrent condition. If terminal 65 is opened while the motor is still rotating, the drive brakes along the rampfunction generator ramp. If the absolute speed falls below the nmin threshold (P022), the inverter is inhibited and the motor is brought to a standstill with no overshoot. If the enable voltage is connected to terminal 81, the speed setpoint is enabled. If the input is left open, the speed setpoint is digitally set to zero. The drive brakes along the torque limit without rampfunction generator. If bit 1 is set in P053, the pulses are inhibited when the speed becomes zero.
Terminal number
663
Controller enable
HS
Ramp function generator fast stop
65
81
HS/3-56
12.94 03.96 07.94
3.2.2 Freelyprogrammable terminal functions Main spindle modules (HS)
3.2.2
Overview
Freelyprogrammable terminal functions
S Terminal function assignment S terminal functions
Terminal function assignment

Table 3-6 Terminal function assignment Parameter attributes Number Mot. 1 P081 to P089 Mot. 2 Change effective online P051 Setting range Description
1...34 dec
Terminal function assignment E1 to E9 Terminals E1 to E9 are assigned by entering the function number. The factory setting is provided in the following table.
Terminal functions
Table 3-7 Terminal functions
HS
HS/3-57
3.2.2 Freelyprogrammable terminal functions Main spindle modules (HS)
07.94
Terminal function
Description
Fct. No. 1 2 3
Input terminal when supplied E1 (P081) E6 (P086) E3 (P083)
2nd torque limit Reciprocation Reset fault memory (R) (fault acknowledgment) Openloop torque controlled mode Star/delta operation M19 operation
The 2nd limit torque becomes active if this terminal is energized and the changeover speed in P050 is exceeded. The speed setpoints, described in Section 2.2 Standard applications, are entered to changeover gearbox stages. Remote acknowledgment of fault messages. Terminal 65 (controller enable) must be open to acknowledge faults.
Changeover from speed controlled to torque controlled operation Changeover between star (open) and delta operation (enable voltage) NC auxiliary function for oriented spindle stop. When this terminal is energized, the setpoint normalization, entered in P054 is selected, if the speed falls below the value entered in P054. If the enable voltage is connected to this terminal, the internal rampfunction generator is bypassed The integral component of the speed controller can be inhibited via this terminal
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
4 5 6
E5 (P085) E4 (P084)
Rampup time = 0 Integrator inhibit speed controller Gearbox stage
7 8
E2 (P082)
HS
Using these terminals, terminals a total of eight parameter sets can Bit 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 be entered for setpoint normalization, , speed monitoring, g, Bit 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 controller setting, torque limiting and torque monitoring. Bit 2 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 Setpoint enable (only for speed setpoint) Incremental positioning Position ref. values 1...2 Caxis Speed setpoint smoothing Suppressing F11 Position reference values 3..4 Positioning on Spindle re synchronization HPC axis Slip monitoring Inverter clock frequency If this terminal is open, the setpoint is a digital zero. When the enable voltage is connected to this terminal, the setpoint is enabled (analog setpoint or oscillation setpoint). If the terminal function is not selected, the setpoint is enabled. If the spindle is in position, and if the enable voltage is connected to the terminal, then the incremental position reference value in P0123 is added to the actual position reference value. The drive then moves to the thus calculated new position. Together with the terminal, function number 27, this terminal is used to select the position reference value defined via parameters P121, P122, P124, and P125 (Section 2.3.3.) The more finely graduated setpoint normalization, set in P114 is used in the Caxis mode. Only setpoint 2 (terminal 24 and terminal 8) are evaluated. By connecting the enable voltage to this terminal, a speed setpoint smoothing function is activated. The smoothing time is entered in P018 (also with P053). By connecting the enable voltage to this terminal, fault message F11 (speed controller at its limit) can be suppressed. Together with the terminal, function No. 23, this terminal is used to select the position reference value, defined using parameters P121, P122, P124, and P125 (Section 2.3.3.) By connecting the enable voltage to this terminal, positioning is initiated. A positive edge at this terminal results in resynchronization when the next positioning command is received via terminal, function No. 28.The function latches. By connecting the enable voltage to this terminal, the HPC axis mode is selected when bit 8 was set in P149. FW 2.00 By connecting the enable voltage to this terminal, the openloop torque control is activated with slip monitoring. FW 2.00 Parameter It is possible to toggle between four clock frequencies P053 P331 P332 P333 using these terminals. (from FW 3.00) 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1
9 10 11 16
E7 (P087) E8 (P088) E9 (P089)
22
23
24 25 26 27
28 29 30 32
33 34
HS/3-58
07.94
3.3 Output terminals Main spindle modules (HS)
3.3
Output terminals
Warning It is only permissible to program the relays (P241 to 247) if the pulses are canceled (terminal 63 or 663 open).
3.3.1
Permanentlywired relay functions

Table 3-8 Terminal function Permanentlywired relay functions Description The relay function can be selected using P053: Ready/ no axisspecific fault Bit Value 0000H 0 0001H Checkback signal, start inhibit The relay pullsin, if there is no fault, and the pulses and controller are enabled. Ready relay pullsin, if there is no fault. 672 673 674 Terminal number
HS
The relay (NC contact) pullsin, if the enable voltage is connected to terminal 663, axisspecific pulse enable.
AS1 AS2
3.3.2
Overview
Freelyprogrammable relay functions
S Message assignment S relay functions S Messages which can be parameterized S Control word messages
Note
The relay signals are updated with 20 ms for a 1 ms speed controller clock. For a 0.5 ms speed controller clock, every 10 ms (refer to P90 bit 3).
HS/3-59
3.3.2 Freelyprogrammable relay functions Main spindle modules (HS)
07.94
Message assignment
Table 3-9 Message assignment Parameter attributes Number Mot. 1 P241 to P246 Mot. 2 Change effective online P051 Setting range Description
1...20 dec
Programmable messages 1 to 6 Relay outputs A11 to A61 are assigned by entering the function number. The factory setting is provided in the following table.
HS
HS/3-60
07.94
Relay functions
Table 3-10 relay functions Description The relay pullsin, if the calculated speed actual value, after a setpoint step, enters the tolerance bandwidth around the new setpoint and has stayed within this tolerance bandwidth at least 200 ms. The message is latched in the activated position, until the speed setpoint changes. The tolerance bandwidth can be parameterized in P027. Even if the calculated speed actual value exits the tolerance bandwidth again after 200 ms, the signal remains active, unless, in the meantime, the setpoint has changed. If the tolerance bandwidth is reexited before 200 ms, the acceleration completed message remains inactive. The relay does not dropout due to speed fluctuations caused by load changes. The time of 200ms can be parameterized via P256 FW 3.00 onwards. The relay pullsin atjMdj < Mdx . . This can be set using P047. If the relay nact = nset dropsout when the speed setpoint is changed, then the jMdj < Mdx relay can only dropout 800ms after the relay nact = nset has pulledin again. The time of 800ms can be parameterized via P257 from FW 3.00. The relay pullsin for jnactj < nmin ; this can be set via P021. The relay pullsin at nact < nx; this can be set via P023. The relay dropsout when the motor has an overtemperature condition; this can be set via P063. If the fault condition remains, the drive converter shuts down with fault message F14 after the time, set in P065. The relay dropsout, if the thermoswitch of the main heatsink responds. If the overtemperature condition remains, the conv. shuts down after approx. 20 s with the F15 fault mess. Refer to the description, variable relay function, Section 3.3.3 Refer to the description, variable relay function, Section 3.3.3 The relay pullsin if the positioning program was executed, and the spindle is located within the tolerance bandwidth, set in P144. The relay pullsin if the positioning program was executed, and the spindle is located within the tolerance bandwidth, set in P145. The external auxiliary contactor to change over the winding into the star configuration, can be controlled via this relay. The external auxiliary contactor to change over the winding into the delta configuration, can be controlled via this relay. The message nact = nset (actual) is active, after the calculated speed actual value has entered the speed tolerance bandwidth around the setpoint, and has remained in this tolerance bandwidth for at least 200 ms. If the tolerance bandwidth is exited, then the message nact = nset (actual) immediately becomes inactive. The time of 200ms can be parameterized via P256 from FW 3.00. Fct. No. 2 Relay output A11 (P241)
Relay function Rampup completed
jMdj < Mdx
A21 (P242)
jnactj < nmin jnactj < nx Motor overtemperature alarm Drive converter temperature alarm Variable relay function 1 Variable relay function 2 In position 1 In position 2 Relay, star operation Relay, delta operation nact = nset (actual)
1 4 5
A31 (P243) A41 (P244) A51 (P245)
HS
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 20 A61 (P246)
HS/3-61
07.94
Messages which can be parameterized

Table 3-11 Messages which can be parameterized Parameter attributes Number Mot. 1 P021.1 P023.1 Mot. 2 P260.1 P262.1 Change effective online online P051 Setting range Description
4 4
0...nrated RPM 0...nmaxMot RPM
nmin for nact < nmin message Response value of the jnactj < nmin relay nx for nact < nx message Response value of the jnactj < nx relay Tolerance bandwidth for the nact = nset message Mdx for the Md < Mdx message The setting refers to the actual torque limiting Delay time nact=nset message FW 3.00 Delay time Md < Mdx message FW 3.00
P027.1 P047.1 P256 P257
P263.1
online online online online
4 4 4 4
0...nrated/16 RPM 0...100 % 0.00...0.50 0.00...1.00
HS
Control word messages

Table 3-12 Control word messages Parameter attributes Number Mot. 1 P247 Mot. 2 Change effective online P051 Setting range Description
0...FFFF hex
Control word messages Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 Value 0001H 0002H 0004H 0008H 0010H 0020H Relay function, term. A11 is inverted Relay function, term. A21 is inverted Relay function, term. A31 is inverted Relay function, term. A41 is inverted Relay function, term. A51 is inverted Relay function, term. A61 is inverted
HS/3-62
10.94 07.94
3.3.3 Variable relay functions Main spindle modules (HS)
3.3.3
Table 3-13
Variable relay function

Variable relay function Parameter attributes
Number Mot. 1 P185 P186 Mot. 2
Change effective online online
P051
Setting range
Description
4 4
Address for monitoring 1 Address of the RAM variables Threshold for monitoring 1 Comparison value for RAM variables, contents (addresses, Section 6.5) Pullin delay, monitoring 1 Dropout delay, monitoring 1 Hysteresis, monitoring 1 (hysteresis for threshold, P186) Address for monitoring 2 Threshold for monitoring 2 Pullin delay, monitoring 2 Dropout delay, monitoring 2 Hysteresis, monitoring 2 (hysteresis for threshold, P191) Control word message Bit Value 0000H 8 0100H 0000H 9 0200H 0000H 1000H 12 Variable relay function 1 with sign interrogation Variable relay function 1 with absolute value interrogation Variable relay function 2 with sign interrogation Variable relay function 2 with absolute value interrogation Variable relay function 1 with P186 as threshold Variable relay function 1 as bit test. The threshold (P186) is ANDed with the RAM variables to be monitored (P185) FW2.00 Variable relay function 2 with P191 as threshold Variable relay function 2 as bit test, FW2.00
P187 P188 P189 P190 P191 P192 P193 P194 P247
online online online online online online online online online
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
0.00...10.00 s 0.00...10.00 s 0...FFFF hex 0...FFFF hex 0...FFFF hex 0.00...10.00 s 0.00...10.00 s 0...FFFF hex 0...FFFF hex
HS
0000H 13 2000H
Note A list of the most important measured quantities (RAM variables) and their addresses is provided in the Appendix (Section 6.5).
HS/3-63
3.3.4 Motor encoder signals for NC Main spindle modules (HS)
07.94
3.3.4
Table 3-14
Motor encoder signals for NC

Motor encoder signals for the NC Parameter attributes
P051
Setting range
Description
0...7 dec
Encoder resolution for the NC When using squarewave converted motor encoder signals, the following multiplication factors can be set. Square wave pulses 2048 1024 4096 8192 Limiting speed [RPM] for RON350/ ERN 1387 16000 16000 5000 2500
P033
Factor
1 3 5 7 0
1 0.5 2 4
HS
1 3 5 7 1 0.5 2 4
Pulses are not output from FW 3.00 Toothedwheel encoder 256 I/rev. 256 128 512 1024 24000 24000 24000 12000 Toothedwheel encoder 512 I/rev.
1 3 5 7
1 0.5 2 4
512 256 1024 2048
12000 12000 12000 6000
HS/3-64
07.94
3.3.5 Analog outputs Main spindle modules (HS)
3.3.5
Analog outputs
Overview
S Function S technical data S Parameterization DAU 1, DAU 2 S Fine normalization
Function
analog output of RAM variables for measurement and diagnostics
Technical data
S 2 output channels at terminal A91 (DAU 1) and terminal A92 (DAU 2) S 10 V range S rough normalization, offset compensation S fine normalization for
absolute speed actual value Utilization M/Mrated
HS
S polarity of the output voltage can be set through fine normalization

( 200 %)
HS/3-65
03.96 07.94
Parameterization DAU 1, DAU 2

Table 3-15 Parameterization DAU 1, DAU 2 Parameter attributes Number Mot. 1 P066 Mot. 2 Change effective online P051 Setting range Description
0...FFFF hex
Address, DAU 1 Address of the RAM variables, which are to the output at DAU 1. Presetting: n/nmax (RAM address: 3044H) Shift factor, DAU 1 Selected data values are shifted to the left 1 corresponds to multiplying by 2 n corresponds to multiplying by 2n Offset, DAU 1 Compensation of a possible offset for DAU 1 Address, DAU 2 Presetting: Utilization (M/Mmax or P/Pmax) (RAM address: 3048H) A smoothing function can be set using P071. Shift factor, DAU 2 Offset, DAU 2
P067
online
0...15 dec
P078 P068
online online
4 4
7F...FF80 hex 0...FFFF hex
HS
P069 P079
online online
4 4
0...15 dec 7F...FF80 hex
Output voltage [V] 1st overflow +10.0 2nd overflow 3. overflow 4. overflow
10.0 0000H 2000H 4000H 6000H 8000H A000H C000H E000H FFFFH Hex numerical value Offset = 0 V Fine normalization = 100 %
Shift factor = 0 Shift factor = 2
HS/3-66
03.96 07.94
Fine normalization
Table 3-16
The coarse normalization (P067, P069) must be set to 0H.
Fine normalization Parameter attributes
P051
Setting range
Description
200.0...200.0 %
Normalization DAU nact display For P012 = 100 %, the following is valid: jMax. speed (P029)j corresponds to +10 V. Only effective at address 3044H, preset to DAU1. Update clock is 1 ms from FW 3.00 (previously 20ms) Normalization DAU Utilization display Utilization display n = 0 to nrated: Md/Mdmax n > nrated: P/Pmax (taking into account the actual torque limits P039, P041) The following is valid for P013 = 100 % : jMax. torque j or joutputj corresponds to +10 V. Only effective at address 3048H, preset to DAU2. Update clock is 1 ms from FW 2.40 1ms (previously 20ms) Normalization DAU M/Mrated For P026 = 100 %, the following is valid: jrated torquej corresponds to +5 V M/Mrated is signed, i.e. a negative rated torque corresponds to 5 V. Only effective at address 304CH. Update clock is 1 ms from FW 3.00 1ms (previously 20ms) Smoothing time, DAU utilization display (from FW 2.40, not in the HPCaxis mode) Output via address 3048 H, preset at DAU2.
P013
online
200.0...200.0 %
P026
online
200.0...200.0 %
HS
P071
online
2...32767 ms
Note A list of the most important measured quantities (RAM variables) and their addresses is provided in the Appendix (Section 6.5).
HS/3-67
07.94
HS
HS/3-68
04.97 07.94
4.1 Optimization, speed controller Main spindle modules (HS)
4.1
Overview
Optimization, speed controller

S speed setpoint smoothing S Speed actual value smoothing S Rampfunction generator S Gain, integral action time S Speed controller adaptation S Torque setpoint smoothing (pT1) S Digital filter, torque setpoint channel S Delay time, speed controller at endstop
HS
Speed setpoint smoothing

Table 4-1 Speed setpoint smoothing Parameter attributes Number Mot. 1 P018 Mot. 2 Change effective online P051 Change effective Description
3...10000 ms
Smoothing time, speed setpoint smoothing (switchon/off using P053 or via select terminal function No. 25) Degree of roundingoff, speed setpoint (pT2 element) Is only effective for active speed setpoint smoothing. 0: no roundingoff 30: max. roundingoff Control word Bit 5 0000H 0010H Value Speed setpoint smoothing inactive Speed setpoint smoothing active, if simultaneously, P090 bit 3=0
P019
online
0...30 dec
P053
online
0...FFFF hex
HS/4-69
07.94
Speed actual value smoothing

Table 4-2 Speed actual value smoothing Parameter attributes Number Mot. 1 P034 P053 Mot. 2 Change effective online online P051 Change effective Description
4 4
1...10 ms 0...FFFF hex
Smoothing time, speed actual value smoothing (Enabled/disabled using P053 bit 5) FW 3.00 Control word Bit 4 0000H 0020H Value Speed actual value smoothing inactive Speed actual value smoothing active
Rampfunction generator
Table 4-3 Rampfunction generator Parameter attributes Number Mot. 1 P016.1 P017.1 P053 Mot. 2 Change effective online online online P051 Change effective Description
HS
4 4 4
0.01...64.00 s 0.01...64.00 s 0...FFFF hex
Rampup time, rampfunction generator (from n = 0 to nmax P029) Rampdown time, rampfunction generator (from nmax to n = 0 P029) Control word Bit Value 0000H 1000H Rampfunction generator trakking active Rampfunction generator trakking inactive
12
Speed
Rampfunction generator output
Speed
Speed setpoint
Speed setpoint
Speed actual value Without rampfunction generator tracking Time
Speed actual value With rampfunction generator tracking Time
HS/4-70
07.94
Gain, integral action time

Table 4-4 Gain, integral action time Parameter attributes Number Mot. 1 P031.1 P032.1 P090 Mot. 2 Change effective online online online P051 Change effective Description
4 4 4
3.0...120.0 dec 5...6000 ms 0...FFFF hex
P gain, speed controller Integral action time, speed controller Control word Bit Value 0000H If the speed controller is at its max, the integral component is set to 0. If the speed controller is at its max, the integrator is held. FW 2.00
0040H
HS
HS/4-71
07.94
Speed controller adaptation

Table 4-5 Speed controller adaptation Parameter attributes Number Mot. 1 P195 P196 P198 P199 Mot. 2 P283 P284 P285 P286 Change effective online online online online P051 Change effective Description
4 4 4 4
0...nmaxMot RPM 0...nmaxMot RPM 1.0...120.0 dec 1...200 %
Lower adaptation speed Upper adaptation speed P gain, upper adaptation speed Reduction factor, P gain (multiplication of the Pgain characteristic over the complete speed range) Integral action time, upper adaptation speed Reduction factor, integral action time (multiplication of the integral action time characteristic over the complete speed range) Control word adaptation, speed controller Adaptation only possible in gearbox stage 1! Bit 1 Value 0000H 0002H No adaptation Speed controller adaptation active
P201 P202
P288 P289
online online
4 4
5...6000 ms 1...200 %
P203
P293
online
0...7 dec
HS
P gain [dec ] Integral action time [ms ] P032.1 P202 P199
P198
P199 P031.1 P202
P201
Speed [RPM ] P195 P196
HS/4-72
07.94
Torque setpoint smoothing (pT1)
Table 4-6
Torque setpoint smoothing (pT1) Parameter attributes
Number Mot. 1 P035 P045 Mot. 2 P274
P051
Change effective
Description
4 4
3...10000 ms 1...nmaxMot RPM
Smoothing time, torque setpoint smoothing Switchin speed, torque setpoint smoothing The torque setpoint smoothing is switchedin above this speed Hysteresis P045/P275 Select, torque setpoint smoothing 0: no torque setpoint smoothing 1: torque setpoint smoothing above the switchin speed P045
P046 P044
P275
online online
4 4
0...nrated RPM 0...1 hex
HS
HS/4-73
10.94 07.94
Digital filter torque setpoint channel

Table 4-7 Digital filter, torque setpoint channel Parameter attributes Number Mot. 1 P118 P281 P103 P276 Mot. 2 Change effective online online online P051 Change effective Description
4 4 4
0...FFFF hex 0...1 hex 50...450 Hz
Torque setpoint filter type 0: bandstop characteristics 1: low pass characteristics Frequency, torque setpoint filter Low pass: 3 dB transition frequency Bandstop: center frequency Quality, torque setpoint filter Filter quality of the bandstop, quality = 1, corresponds to 1.00 Select torque setpoint filter 0: disable digital filter 1: enable digital filter P104 2
P104
P277
online
0.10...10.00 dec
P117 P280
online online
4 4
0...FFFF hex 0...1 hex
HS
Amplitude 3dB {
Amplitude
P104 0.5
P103 Low pass
Frequency [Hz]
P103 Bandstop
Frequency [Hz]
Delay time speed controller at its endstop

Table 4-8 Delay time, speed controller at endstop Parameter attributes Number Mot. 1 P248 Mot. 2 Change effective online P051 Change effective Description
100...10000 ms
Delay time, fault message F11 The fault message is output, if the speed controller is at its limit in the time specified in P248 and the speed actual value does not exceed the internal threshold nrated/256.
HS/4-74
04.97 07.94
4.2 Optimization, current controller Main spindle modules (HS)
4.2
Optimization, current controller
Note Normally, it is not necessary to change the following parameters, as the optimum current controller setting is calculated from the motor and power section data.
Overview
S Current controller S Inverter clock frequency
Current controller
Table 4-9
Current controller Parameter attributes
P051
Change effective
Description
HS
225...255 dec
Correction, P gain, current controller A signed offset is added to the current contr. P gain. Changeover speed, current controller adaptation The current controller P gain is increased when the speed is exceeded. Display, Pgain, current controller Displays the actually effective current contr. P gain.
P120
P292
online
500...10000 RPM
(P316)
online
HS/4-75
4.2 Optimization, current controller Main spindle modules (HS)
04.97 07.94
Inverter clock frequency

Table 4-10 Inverter clock frequency 1 Parameter attributes Number Mot. 1 P053 Mot. 2 Change effective online P051 Change effective Description
0...FFFF hex
Control word Bit Value 8 9 10 0000H 0200H 0400H 0600H 0100H 0300H 0500H 0700H Pulse freq. [kHz] 3.2 4.7 6.3 7.8 2.8 from FW 3.00 5.0 from FW 3.00 3.9 from FW 3.00 5.9 from FW 3.00
Note: An inverter clock frequency > 3.2 kHz is only possible with derating (refer to Table 13).
HS
Table 4-11 Inverter clock frequency 2 Parameter attributes Number Mot. 1 P331 P332 P333 Mot. 2 Change effective online online online P051 Change effective Description
4 4 4
07Hex 07Hex 07Hex
Inverter clock frequency 2 from FW 3.00 Inverter clock frequency 3 from FW 3.00 Inverter clock frequency 4 from FW 3.00 Setting possibility Value 0000 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 0006 0007 Pulse freq. [kHz] 3.2 2.8 6.3 5.0 4.7 3.9 7.8 6.1
(P330)
online
2.87.8kHz
Display of the actual clock frequency
HS/4-76
04.97 07.94
5.1 Diagnostic aids Main spindle modules (HS)
Diagnostics and fault analysis
5.1
5.1.1
Table 5-1
Diagnostic aids
Measured value displays
Measured value displays Parameter attributes Number Change effective P051 Setting range Description
Mot. 1 (P001) (P002) (P102) (P003) (P004) (P006) (P007) (P008) (P009) (P010) (P101) (P330)
Mot. 2
20000...20000 RPM 20000...20000 RPM 0...500 V 0...100.0 % 0...700 V 0...150 A 0...100 kVA 0...100 kW 0...150 C 200...200 % 2.8...7.8 kHz
Speed setpoint Speed actual value Motor voltage Utilization (referred to the actual torque limit) DC link voltage Motor current Motor reactive power Motor active power Motor temperature Setpoint for torquecontrolled operation Inverter clock frequency
HS
HS/5-77
5.1.2 Status displays Main spindle modules (HS)
07.94
5.1.2
Status displays
P000, P100 operating display P011 Status of the binary inputs

Table 5-2
refer to Section 2.2.1, Table 2-10
P011, status of the binary inputs
Display
Display value Term. 63 central pulse enable NE Term. 64 central controller enable NE Term. E6 freely programmable via P086 Term. E7 freely programmable via P087 Term. E8 freely programmable via P088 Term. E9 freely programmable via P089 Term. E2 freely programmable via P082 Term. E3 freely programmable via P083 Term. E4 freely programmable via P084 Term. E5 freely programmable via P085 Term. 663 axisspecific pulse enable Term. 65 axisspecific controller enable Term. 81 open rampfunction generator fast stop Term. E1 freely programmable via P081
HS
Several messages can be displayed. The hexadecimal addition is displayed. Example: 4H + 8H = CH
HS/5-78
07.94
P254 Display of active functions 1

Table 5-3 P254 display of active functions 1
Display
Display value Fct. No. 9 gearbox stage bit 0 Fct. No. 10 gearbox stage bit 1 Fct. No. 11 gearbox stage bit 2 Fct. No. 5 star/delta Fct. No. 1 2. torque limit
Fct. No. 6 M19 operation
Fct. No. 2 oscillation
Fct. No. 7 TH = 0
Fct. No. 3 reset fault memory (fault acknowledgment) Fct. No. 4
HS
Fct. No. 16 setpoint enable
Fct. No. 8
integrator inhibit, torque controlspeed controller led operation
HS/5-79
10.94 07.94
P255 Display of active function 2

Table 5-4 P255 display of active functions 2
Display
Display value Fct. No. 26 suppress F11 slip monitoring Fct. No. 33 Inverter clock frequency bit 0 Fct. No. 34 Inverter clock frequency bit1 Fct. No. 32
Fct. No. 23 position ref. values 1...2 Fct. No. 27 position ref. values 3...4 Fct. No. 28 positioning on
Fct. No. 30 HPC axis
HS
Fct. No. 24 C axis
Fct. No. 22 incremental positioning Fct. No. 29 Spindle resynchronization
Fct. No. 25 speed setpoint smoothing active
HS/5-80
04.97 07.94
5.1.3 Diagnostic parameters Main spindle modules (HS)
5.1.3
Table 5-5
Diagnostic parameters Parameter attributes
Number Mot. 1 (P020) Mot. 2
Change effective
P051
Setting range
Description
Diagnostic, speed actual value When continuously increasing by several increments, there is an increased noise level. (counter for dn/dt monitoring) Possible causes: S encoder shield not grounded
S S S S S
(P028)
encoder defective electronic ground not OK motor ground not connected to the main spindle drive module measuring circuit 1 defective entered motor moment of inertia was too high (P159, P219)
Diagnostic Bit 3 Value 0008H Alarm, temperature sensor S interrupted
HS
S
13 2000H
short circuit
Divisioninterrupt due to an error in the calculation routine as incorrect data were input.
(P299)
Checksum, parameter For each save (P052 = 1H), the checksum is generated over the parameter contents. Thus, if there is a change in the drivemachine data, this will be identified. Diagnostics, motor encoder zero mark from FW 3.00 There is an increased noise/disturbance level if this continuously increases by several increments. Possible causes: S encoder shield not grounded
(P320)
S S S S
(P321)
encoder defective electronic ground not OK motor ground not connected to the main spindle drive module Defective measuring circuit
Diagnostics spindle encoder zero mark from FW 3.00 Prerequisite: Positioning with spindle encoder has been selected, spindle encoder pulse number in P131.x is to the power of 10. There is an increased noise/disturbance level if this is continuously increased by several increments. Possible causes: S encoder shield not grounded
S S S S
encoder defective electronic ground not OK motor ground not connected to the main spindle drive module measuring circuit defective
HS/5-81
5.1.4 Test sockets X1, X2, IR Main spindle modules (HS)
03.96 07.94
5.1.4
Test sockets X1, X2, IR
Overview
S function S technical data S assignment S Normalization, IR S Parameterization X1 (DAU 3), X2 (DAU 4)
Function
Analog output of the phase current actual value and RAM variables for measurement and diagnostics.
Technical data
HS
Assignment
S S S S
phase current actual value at test socket IR 2 output channels at X1 (DAU 3) and X2 (DAU 4) voltage range 0...+ 5 V (0 corresponds to +2.5 V) rough normalization, offset compensation for X1 and X2 via parameter
X1: X1 IR X2 M X2: IR: M:
Test socket DAU 3 Test socket DAU 4 Current act. value, phase R Reference ground
Fig. 5-1
Assignment, test sockets
Normalization, phase current IR

Table 5-6 Normalization, IR Power module code numbers (P095) 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Normalization, IR 50 A corresponds to 8.25 V 80 A corresponds to 8.25 V 160 A corresponds to 8.25 V 160 A corresponds to 8.25 V 200 A corresponds to 8.25 V 300 A corresponds to 8.25 V 400 A corresponds to 8.25 V 120 A corresponds to 8.25 V
Power module 50 A 80 A 120 A 160 A 200 A 300 A 400 A 108 A
HS/5-82
12.94 07.94
5.1.4 Test sockets X1, X2, IR Main spindle modules (HS)
Parameterization X1 (DAU 3), X2 (DAU 4)

Table 5-7 Parameterization X1 (DAU 3), X2 (DAU 4) Parameter attributes Number Mot. 1 P076 Mot. 2 Change effective online P051 Setting range Description
0...FFFF hex
Address, DAU 3 Address of the RAM variables which are to be output at DAU 3. Presetting: |P/Prated| (RAM address: 3050H) Shift factor, DAU 3 Selected data values are shifted to the left 1 corresponds to multiplication by 2 n corresponds to multiplication by 2n Offset, DAU 3 A possibly existing offset is compensated for DAU 3 Address, DAU 4 Presetting: nact (RAM address: C04H) Shift factor, DAU 4 Offset, DAU 4
P077
online
0...15 dec
P080
online
7F...FF80 hex
P072 P073 P074
4 4 4
0...FFFF hex 0...15 dec 7F...FF80 hex
HS
Output voltage [V] 1. overflow +5.0 2. overflow 3. overflow 4. overflow
+2.5
0.0 0000H 2000H 4000H 6000H 8000H A000H C000H E000H FFFFH Hex numerical value Offset = 0 V Fine normalization = 100 %
Note A listing of the most important measured quantities (RAM variables) and their addresses are provided in the Appendix (Section 6.5).
HS/5-83
5.1.5 Minimum/maximum value memory Main spindle modules (HS)
04.97 07.94
5.1.5
Minimum/maximum value memory
Function
Table 5-8
Monitoring RAM variables for minimum and maximum values.

Minimum/maximum value memory Parameter attributes
Number Mot. 1 P181 P179 Mot. 2
P051
Setting range
Description
4 4
0...FFFF hex 0...2 hex
Address for min/max memory Address for RAM variable Min/max memory selection 0H: stop memory function 1H: start memory function with absolute value generation 2H: start memory function with bipolar evaluation Minimum value, min/max memory Maximum value, min/max memory
(P182) (P183)
HS
Note A listing of important measured quantities (RAM variables) and addresses is provided in the Appendix (Section 6.5).
5.1.6
Transient recorder function
Function
Simultaneous tracing of 2 RAM variables and output via test sockets X1 and X2.
Technical data
S parallel tracing of two 16bit signals S 640 values tracing depth S 1 ms sampling time (P090, bit 3=0) or 0.525 ms (P090, bit 3=1, from
FW 3.00)
S start and stop conditions (trigger conditions) S cyclic output via D/A converters S trigger condition for data output
HS/5-84
07.94
5.1.6 Transient recorder function Main spindle modules (HS)
Parameterization
Table 5-9 Parameterization Parameter attributes Number Mot. 1 P207 Mot. 2 Change effective online P051 Setting range Description
0...10 hex
Transient recorder setting 1H: start via P206 without start and stop condition 2H: start condition P208 and P209, no stop condi tion, start via P206 5H: stop condition via P210 and P211, no start condition, start via P206 6H: trace with start and stop condition 4H: preassigning the trace memory via P217 Address, signal 1 A listing of important measured quantities (RAM variables) and their addresses are provided in the Appendix (Section 6.5). Address, signal 2 Address for the start condition Address of the RAM variables, which start the trace Threshold for the start condition Start condition mask, is compared with the RAM variable in P208 Address for the stop condition Threshold for the stop condition Transient recorder selection The transient recorder function is started by setting to 1H. Shift factor, signal 1 Refer to the description, test sockets X1, X2, Section 5.1.4 Shift factor, signal 2 Trigger signal 1 Trigger signal amplitude low for D/A converter output Trigger signal 2 Trigger signal amplitude high for D/A converter output Start output for tracing Cyclic outputs of the traced values on the D/A converter Trace signal 1 DAU 3 (X1) Trace signal 2 DAU 4 (X2) The previous assignment of the D/A converters are buffered and are reset after output has been completed.
P212
online
0...FFFF hex
P213 P208
online online
4 4
HS
P209
online
0...FFFF hex
P210 P211 P206
4 4 4
0...FFFF hex 0...FFFF hex 0...1 hex
P215
online
0...15 dec
P216 P217
online online
4 4
0...15 dec 0...FFFF hex
P218
online
0...FFFF hex
P214
online
0...1 hex
HS/5-85
5.1.6 Transient recorder function Main spindle modules (HS)
07.94
Note A listing of the most important measured quantities (RAM variables) and their addresses are provided in the Appendix (Section 6.5).
5.1.7
Openloop current/frequency control
Function Function information
Diagnosing motor encoder faults Above the field weakening speed (P173), the absolute current should be selected to be less than the noload current, as otherwise voltage limiting will be initiated. The result is then erratic running and torque surges. The frequency should be slowly changed, as I/f operation is prone to stalling.
Current/frequency control (openloop) Parameter attributes
Table 5-10
Number Mot. 1 Mot. 2
Change effective online online online
P051
Setting range
Description
HS
P311 P312 P313
4 4 4
0.0...100.0 % 0.0...800.0 Hz 0...1hex
Current for I/f control (referred to the rated motor current) Frequency for I/f control Selection, I/f control 0H: I/f control off 1H: I/f control on
HS/5-86
10.94 07.94
5.2 Fault analysis Main spindle modules (HS)
5.2
5.2.1
Fault analysis
Fault display, fault acknowledgment
Fault display
Display
Inactive
1 fault Several faults, changeover using Fault message number (refer to Table 511) = fault = positioning error key
Fig. 5-2
Fault display
HS
Fault acknowledgment
by
S S
P key
Depress the
P key with the controller inhibited.
If the fault can be acknowledged, the system returns to the operator control program. If the fault cannot be acknowledged, for example, there is a defect, then this can be temporarily suppressed in the display.
S remote acknowledgment
One of the following terminals is energized, with the controller inhibited: terminal R reset at the NE or monitoring module terminal reset fault memory at the main spindle drive module
S powerdown
Powerdown the converter and after the display has disappeared after approx. 2 s, powerup again.
Fault suppression
by
S S
key
operator control program for approx. one The system returns to the minute after depressing the key, without acknowledging the fault.
HS/5-87
5.2.2 Fault message list Main spindle modules (HS)
04.97 07.94
5.2.2
Table 5-11
Fault message list

Fault message list
Fault message F04
Fault
Cause D A/D converter (setpoint channel) faulted
Troubleshooting If this repeatedly occurs, replace the control board
Erroneous setpoint conversion
F07
Data save on FEPROM unsuccessful
D If the fault message is repeatedly output during data save, then the FEPROM is defective. D If the fault message occurred directly after the driveconverter was poweredup, then the drive converter was previously powereddown during a data save. The last parameter changes have therefore not been saved. A new data save
1Restart data save via P52=1 2Replace the control board if fault F07 reoccurs
HS
F08 Irretrievable data loss F09 Fault encoder system 1 (motor encoder) D D D
must be initiated. D Defective FEPROM Replace the control board
Motor encoder not connected or defective Motor encoder cable defective Measuring circuit 1 (speed actual value sensing) defective, incorrectly inserted or incorrect device (P150).
Check the encoder cable/screen or replace the motor encoder, or replace the control board
The fault message can be suppressed using P090 bit 1 from FW2.00. F10 Fault, equipping parameterization, encoder system 2 D Positioning with spindle encoder selected (P141=1, P143=1), incorrect board version FW 1/2 D Positioning with spindle encoder selected (P141=1, P143=1), there is no spindle encoder inserted at X432 FW 3.00 D Positioning with spindle encoder selected (P141=1, P143=1) with output of squarewaveconverted motor encoder signals X432 (P033<>0) FW 3.00 D Output of squarewaveconverted motor encoded signals at X432 (P033<>0) selected, a spindle encoder is inserted at X432 FW 3.00 Correctly adapt P33 (refer to the Startup Guide, Section 3.3.4) Use the correct control board version Connectup the spindle encoder
HS/5-88
04.97 07.94
Fault message F11
Fault
Cause D Motor overloaded D DC link busbar not connected D DC link fuse defective D Transistor in the power module defective D Motor encoder not connected D Motor encoder cable defective D Motor encoder defective D Motor ground not connected D Screen, motor encoder cable not connected D Motor not connected or phase missing D Motor stalled/rotor locked D Measuring circuit 1 (speed actual value sensing) defective or incorrectly connected (the delay time can be set via P248.)
Troubleshooting Prevent motor overload (P004<100%) Tightenup DC link busbar
Speed controller is at its limit, speed actual value missing
Replace the power module Connectup the motor encoder Replace the motor encoder Secure the PE/motor connection Ground the screen or replace the encoder cable Connectup the motor with the correct phase sequence Remove the mechanical blockage The contactor between the motor and drive converter must be closed Replace the control board
F14
Motor overtemperature Motor
D Motor overloaded D Motor current too high, e.g. due to incorrect motor data (P096) D Temperature sensor defective (motor) D Motor fan defective D Measuring circuit 1 (speed actual value motor) defective D Motor winding shortcircuit
Reduce motor load Correct motor data Changeover to the 2nd temperature sensor Connectup the fan Replace the control board or motor encoder Replace the motor
HS
F15
Drive converter overtemperature
D Drive converter overloaded (incorrect motor/ drive converter assignment, incorrect load duty cycle ) D Ambient temperature too high D Fan failed D Defective temperature sensor Acknowledgment: Only after cooling down to below 50C"15K, by poweringdown and poweringup again
Correct motor/drive converter assignment (P95/96) Reduce Mdlimit (P39) Power module too small Replace power module
F16
Incorrect power module code
D Incorrect code number 3 selected in P095 (for power modules without automatic identification) D Incorrect code number selected in P095 (for power modules with automatic identification) from FW3.00
Load the correct code number
F17
I0 motor > Irated power module
D Incorrect motor/drive converter assignment
Io correctly set motor or select a larger power module
HS/5-89
04.97 07.94
Fault message F18
Fault
Cause D Spindle encoder not connected or defective FW 3.00 D Spindle encoder cable defective FW 3.00 D Measuring circuit 2 defective FW 3.00 The fault message can be suppressed via P090 bit 5.
Troubleshooting Connect a spindle encoder or replace Check the encoder/drive converter connecting cable Replace the control board
Fault encoder system 2 (spindle encoder)
F19
Temperature sensor D Interrupted D Shortcircuited
D Temperature sensor defective (PTC thermistor at 20C 600 , if required, use the 2nd PTC thermistor of the motor) D Connection to the sensor interrupted D Measuring circuit 1 defective Acknowledgment: Only by switching the supply voltage off and on
Replace the temperature sensor Reestablish the connection between the temperature sensor motor/drive converter Replace the control board
F61
Maximum motor frequency exceeded
D Encoder pulse number (P098) incorrectly entered FW 2.00 D No forcelocked connection between the master/slave
Correctly enter the encoder pulse number (P98) Reestablish the mechanical forcelocked connection (slavedrive) Enter the correct motor data (field weakening > 1:16)
HS
F79
Division interrupt (this message can be suppressed by setting P053, bit 11)
D Incorrect motor data in P159 to P176 or P219 to P236
FP01
Setpoint > encoder pulse number
D Setpoint input too high (Pto P125, P131). Position reference value, external
Setpoint input must be set lower (max P131)
FP02
Zero mark monitoring has responded
D Zero mark signal from the encoder or BERO interrupted D Incorrect parameterization (P131)
Set the BERO clearance lower or replace the BERO Replace the cabling Replace the encoder Parameter setting in P131 greater than the pulse number per revolution
HS/5-90
04.97 07.94
Fault message FP03
Fault
Cause D Value in P130 > the pulse number in P131
Troubleshooting The entry in P130 must be set lower than the value set in P131
Zero mark offset > encoder pulse number
FP04
No valid zero mark
D When setting P129=1, there is no valid zero mark, e.g. after poweron after the gearbox stage change
The spindle must rotate through at least one revolution (rotate through 3600, and then set P129 to 1 again). If the fault still occurs, check the zero mark If a BERO is used, adjust the clearance, check the cabling or replace the BERO For spindle/motor encoder, check the cabling or replace the encoder
Faults
after
S supply ON
Operating control display inactive at least two phases missing (NE module) at least two input fuses have ruptured (NE module) defective electronics power supply in the NE module converter bus connection (ribbon cable), main spindle drive module NE module not inserted or defective control components defective EPROM/FEPROM defective firmware not loaded
HS
S Controller enable (without fault message)

Motor rotates at a max. 30 RPM at nset > 30 RPM or the motor oscillates (oscillation is not selected) at nset < 30 RPM incorrect motor phase sequence as the feeder cable is interchanged (change 2 phase connections). motor encoder pulse number which was entered is too high
Motor remains stationary for speed setpoints other than zero reciprocation function is selected (P154, P155=0)
Motor briefly moves defective power module J
HS/5-91
04.97 07.94
HS
HS/5-92
07.94
6 Appendix Main spindle modules (HS)
Appendix
HS
HS/6-93
6.1 Flow diagram for short startup Main spindle modules (HS)
07.94
6.1
Flow diagram for short startup

Warning If a fault is acknowledged at the NE module, with the main spindle drive module enabled, then the drive accelerates to nset.
Note If data save is interrupted due to power failure or the power being disconnected, then the values which were changed since the last data save are lost, and the drive converter displays fault message F07 after the power returns. The parameter values can be reset after acknowledging fault message F07 (refer to Section 5.2.2).
START
Before the converter is poweredup:
HS
S S S
check the connections according to the system circuit diagram. withdraw pulse and controller enable (terminal 663, terminal 65) or disconnect completely. determine the code number for the motor and power section (list, refer to tables 61 to 3-5)
Powerup the converter (supply ON)
Does the display remain inactive? no Does a flashing F... appear? no Does the operating display P000 appear (refer to Sect. 2.2.1) yes 1
yes Fault
yes
Fault (refer to Section 5.2.2)
no
HS/6-94
04.97 07.94
1 Set P051 to 4H (remove write protection) Set P097 to 0H (start initialization) Set P052 to 1H (write into FEPROM) Wait until P052 is again set to 0H, then switch the converter off and 2 s after the operating display has been canceled, powerup again.
The module was already commissioned once. In order to adapt a new motor, the initialized status must be estab lished.
P095 or P096 display P095:Enter the power module code No. or check P096:enter the motor type P098:enter the number of encoder pulses per motor revolution. Set P097 to 1H SEtUP is displayed Wait until operating display P000 appears (refer to Section 2.2.1)
HS
Is a special motor used, where there is no code number defined for P096?
yes
Set P051 to 10H (remove write protection) no Enter P159 to P176 Set P177 to 1H (calculate motor data). Wait until P177 is again set to 0H. Set P051 to 4H. Set P052 to 1H. Wait until P052 is again set to 0H. The motor data are transferred into the FEPROM.
Set P051 to 4H.
HS/6-95
07.94
Check the following parameters and if required modify: P014 P015 P024 P016 P017 P029 P021 to P023 , P027 P039 to P043 P047 to P050 Normalization, nset Offset correction, nset Normalization, nset Rampup time, RFG Rampdown time, RFG Max. motor speed, nmaxmot Relay response values for speed monitoring Torque limits
HS
P081 to P089
Freelyprogrammable terminal functions Freelyprogrammable relay functions for Y/ motor
P185 to P194, P241 to P246 P180
Values changed?
no
yes Set P052 to 1H Wait until P052 is again set to 0H. The changed values are transferred into the FEPROM.
HS/6-96
07.94
Status of the two center digits of the operating display P000 (refer to Section 2.2.1)
All enable signals at the NE and MSD modules are switchedout.
Connect the enable voltage to all enable signals at the NE module.
Axisspecific pulse enable, connect the enable voltage to terminal 663 on the main spindle drive module.
Controller enable Connect the enable voltage to terminal 65 on the main spindle drive module.
Connect the speed setpoint at terminal 56 and 14 and set to 0 V (display at P001).
HS
no
Is terminal fct. 16 (setpoint enable) selected and not switched in.
yes
Cancel rampfunction generator fast stop, terminal 81.
Cancel rampfunction generator fast stop, terminal 81.
Enable the setpoint enable via select signal
Slightly increase the speed setpoint. For fault message F11, the speed actual value is faulty, or the motor is incorrectly connected. If the motor oscillates, then either the motor phase sequence is incorrect, or reciprocation is pre selected.
HS/6-97
07.94
Disable the RFG via term. 62 (TH = 0) if the terminal is parameterized.
Optimize the speed controller via P031 and P032.
Readjust the limit values or relay control thresholds as required.
no Values changed? yes Set P052 to 1H.
HS
Wait until P052 is again set to 0H. The changed values are transferred into the FEPROM.
After startup, save the changed parameter values in the file or document in list form.
Set P051 to 0H.
End
HS/6-98
04.97 07.94
6.2 Code numbers for the power modules and standard motors Main spindle modules (HS)
6.2
Code numbers for the power modules and standard motors

Power module code number Order No. 6SN11231AA0V 6SN11241AA0V 6SN11351BA1V 0CAV 0DAV 0LAV 0GAV 0EAV 0FAV 0JAV 0KAV Rated output current [A] 24 30 45 45 60 85 120 200 Peak output current, briefly S640 % 10 min [A] 32 40 60 60 80 110 150 250 Peak output current, briefly S640 %. 10 s [A] 32 51 76 76 102 127 193 257 Power module code number P095 6 7 13 FW 2.40 8 9 10 11 FW 2.00 12 FW 2.00
Table 3-1 Power mod. type 50 A 80 A 108 A 120 A 160 A 200 A 300 A 400 A
Table 3-2 MLFB 1PH6...3ph. motor 101VNF4 101VNG4 103VNF4 103VNG4 105VNF4 105VNG4 105VNZ4 107VNC4 107VNF4 107VNG4 131VNF4 131VNG4 131VNZ0 133VNB4 133VNF0 133VNF4 133VNG0 133VNG4 135VNF0 135VNF4 135VNG4 137VNB4 137VNF4 137VNG0 137VNG4 137VNZ4 138VNF0 138VNF4 138VNG4
Motor code number Rated motor output [kW] 3.7 4.7 5.5 7.0 7.5 9.5 12.0 5.0 9.0 11.5 9.0 12.0 8.0 4.5 11.0 11.0 14.5 14.5 15.0 15.0 20.0 7.9 18.5 24.0 24.0 11.0 22.0 22.0 28.0 Rated motor current [A] 12.5 13.7 17.9 19.4 22.5 25.3 27.0 22.7 26.9 29.8 27.2 32.1 23.2 26.0 26.7 31.3 31.5 37.5 35.0 41.3 50.6 43.6 50.2 50.0 57.8 41.8 51.5 61.0 66.1 Motor no load current [A] 6.2 6.9 9.1 9.9 11.5 13.1 15.6 11.7 14.2 15.6 11.7 13.6 10.9 9.8 11.5 13.4 14.5 16.1 16.1 18.8 22.8 18.6 22.9 23.2 26.5 18.0 24.6 28.7 31.4 Rated speed [RPM] 1500 2000 1500 2000 1500 2000 3000 750 1500 2000 1500 2000 1500 525 1500 1500 2000 2000 1500 1500 2000 525 1500 2000 2000 750 1500 1500 2000 Maximum speed [RPM] Motor code No. P096 101 102 103 104 105 106 140 131 107 108 109 110 141 FW 2.00 132 111 112 136 113 114 115 116 133 117 137 118 143 FW 3.00 119 120 121
HS
9000
8000
HS/6-99
04.97 07.94
Table 3-2 MLFB 1PH6...3ph. motor 161VNF0 161VNF4 161VNG4 163VNB4 163VNF0 163VNF4 163VNG4 163VNZ0 167VNB4 167VNF0 167VNF4 167VNG0 167VNG4 168VNF0 186VNB4 186VNB9 186VNB4 186VNE4 186VNF4 206VNB4 206VNE4 206VNF4 226VNF4 MLFB1PH7... motor 101xNF4 103xNF4 105xNF4 107xNF4 131xNF4 133xND4 133xND4 137xND4 137xNG4 163xND4 163xNF4 167xNF4 1842NEV 1842NBV 184xNTx 1862NEV 1862NBV 186xNTx 2242NFV 2242NCV
Motor code number Rated motor output [kW] 22.0 22.0 28.0 11.5 30.0 30.0 38.0 19.0 14.5 37.0 37.0 45.0 45.0 40.0 26.8 30.8 22.0 42.0 50.0 32.0 63.0 76.0 100.0 Rated motor output [kW] 3.7 7 7 9 11 12 20 17 28 22 30 37 40.0 22.0 21.5 60.0 29.6 29.6 100.0 55.0 Rated motor current [A] 53.5 60.8 68.1 66.2 72.5 86.0 84.0 56.0 78.0 79.6 95.7 83.3 91.0 84.0 66.0 67.0 66.0 86.0 100.0 96.0 125.0 149.0 192.0 Rated motor current [A] 8.9 16.2 16.4 20.8 23.1 28 43 40.7 58.6 52.7 70.3 77.8 85.0 54.0 76 120.0 75.0 106 188.0 117.0 Motor no load current [A] 23.9 26.9 31.3 27.8 33.3 40.3 37.5 25.2 34.4 36.3 43.5 32.2 41.0 38.0 35.5 35.0 35.5 46.0 52.0 48.0 64.0 68.0 79.0 Motor no load current [A] 4.82 7.84 8.36 9.91 8.36 12.7 17.4 18.5 21.4 24.1 30.1 31.9 46.2 34.7 40 63.0 42.5 56 73.0 63.5 Rated speed [RPM] 1500 1500 2000 500 1500 1500 2000 950 500 1500 1500 2000 2000 1500 610 700 500 1250 1500 500 1250 1500 1500 Rated speed [RPM] 1500 2000 1500 1500 1500 1000 2000 1000 2000 1000 1500 1500 1250 500 500 1250 500 500 1500 700 Maximum speed [RPM] Motor code No. P096 122 123 124 134 125 126 127 139 135 128 129 138 130 142 FW 2.00 161 167 160 163 164 162 165 166 168 FW 2.00 Motor code No. P096 400 FW 3.00 402 FW 3.00 403 FW 3.00 404 FW 3.00 406 FW 3.00 408 FW 3.00 409 FW 3.00 411 FW 3.00 412 FW 3.00 414 FW 3.00 415 FW 3.00 417 FW 3.00 418 FW 2.40 419 FW 2.40 424 FW 3.00 420 FW 2.40 425 FW 3.00 421 FW 2.40 422 FW 2.40 423 FW 2.40
6500
6100
5000
HS
Maximum speed [RPM] 9000 9000 9000 9000 8000 8000 8000 8000 8000 6500 6500 6500 5000 5000 5000 5000 5000 5000 4500 4500
HS/6-100
07.94
Table 3-3 MLFB 1PH6... Y/ motors
Star/deltamotors Rated motor output [kW] 4.3 7.5 11.5 14.5 22.0 32.0 42.0 Rated motor current [A] Y/n 15.3/13.5 25.2/22.5 39.5/35.2 45.5/40.5 55.0/50.0 76.0/73.0 94.0/88.0 Motor no load current [A] Y/n 6.4/8.0 11.7/13.5 14.3/20.8 17.9/23.2 31.0/35.0 38.0/49.0 56.0/55.0 Rated speed [RPM] Maximum speed [RPM] 8000 6500 Motor code No. P096
1334NB8 1374NB8 1634NB8 1674NB8 1864NB8 2064NB8 2264NB8
525/1250 525/1250 500/1250 550/1250 500/1250 500/1250 500/1250
200 202 204 206 208 210 214 FW 2.00
5000
Table 3-4 MLFB 1PH4... motors 1034NG6 1054NG6 1074NG6 1334NF6 1354NF6 1374NF6 1384NF6 1634ND6 1674ND6 1684ND6 1034NF2 1054NF2 1074NF2 1334NF2 1354NF2 1374NF2 1384NF2 1634NF2 1674NF2 1684NF2
Watercooled motors Rated motor output [kW] 8.5 12.0 16.0 14.0 20.0 25.0 28.0 25.0 31.0 35.0 7.5 11.0 14.0 15.0 22.0 27.0 30.0 37.0 46.0 52.0 Rated motor current [A] 36.4 51.3 55.5 55.9 76.6 92.8 102.2 103.8 129.4 143.9 25.2 36.6 45.0 53.1 70.7 81.9 97.3 103.0 115.0 143.0 Motor no load current [A] 17.7 24.4 26.9 21.4 29.7 35.9 40.0 42.4 50.7 58.6 11.5 16.4 19.0 17.4 25.5 30.3 33.8 44.0 49.2 58.8 Rated speed [RPM] 2000 2000 2000 1500 1500 1500 1500 1000 1000 1000 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 Maximum speed [RPM] 18000 17000 16000 15000 14000 13000 12000 11000 10000 9000 Motor code No. P096 301 303 305 307 309 311 313 315 317 319 300 302 304 306 308 310 312 314 316 318
HS
8000
6500
HS/6-101
12.94 07.94
Table 3-5 MLFB 1PH2... motors 0924WG4 0964WG4 1234WF4 1274WF4 1284WF4 1434WF4 1474WF4 0936WF4 0956WF4 1136WF4 1156WF4 1176WF4 1186WF4 1826WC4 1846WP4 1866WB4 1886WB4 2546WB4
Builtin motors Rated motor output [kW] 4.7 10.0 11.5 21.0 25.0 30.0 38.0 7.5 10.0 15.0 16.5 18.0 23.0 11.8 14.5 18.3 23.6 28.8 39.3 Rated motor current [A] 20.6 41.6 54.5 80.8 97.1 96.5 111.3 23.1 28.4 53.3 52.7 58.9 78.9 37.0 56.0 62.5 78.0 118.0 119.0 Motor no load current [A] 10.6 21.5 21.1 33.4 37.4 41.8 43.7 10.9 13.6 21.8 21.9 24.7 32.8 17.0 25.7 31.0 38.0 42.0 54.0 Rated speed [RPM] 2000 2000 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 750 600 525 500 500 500 Maximum speed [RPM] 18000 Motor code No. P096 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 320 321 322 323 324 325 333 FW 2.00 334 FW 2.00 335 FW 2.00 336 FW 2.00 337 FW 2.00 338 FW 2.00
16000
12000
10000
8000
6000 4000
HS
2566WB4
Measuring system pulse No. 256 or 512 depending on the encoder used
HS/6-102
04.97 07.94
6.3
Connections
Overview
S Connecting diagram S connecting terminals S Relay terminals S star/delta changeover

Warning Cable shields and cores of power cables which are not used (e.g. cores for brakes) must be connected to PE potential in order to discharge charging currents caused by capacitive coupling. If this is not observed, hazardous voltages can occur which can result in death or severe bodily injury.
Note: If non-PELV circuits are used at terminals AS1 and AS2, connector coding must be used so that the connector cannot be interchanged (refer to EN 602041, Section 6.4) Order No. for the coding connector, refer to Catalog NC 60.1
HS
HS/6-103
04.97 07.94
Connection diagram SIMODRIVE 611 analog system NE module

External X111 74 Ready, signal
73.2 73.1
MSD module
Module internal X432 BERO input Spindle encoder input Motor encoder output X1 X2 M X421 56 14 24 8 X431 663 65 81 E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E7 E8 E9 9 X411 X451 A91 M A92 M X441 289 A11 A21 A31 A41 A51 A61 672 673 674 AS1 AS2 X433 Module internal DAU 1 DAU 2 Internal Relay 11) Relay 21) Relay 31) Relay 41) Relay 51) Relay 61) Ready Fault Signaling contact Start inhibit Bero input2) X412 Motor encoder
Group signal I2t, temperature monitoring Pulse enable Drive enable
X121
72 5.3 5.2 5.1 63 9 9 64 19 7 45 44 10 15 15 R 9 112 48 111 213 113

NS1 NS2 AS1 AS2
IR External nset1 FR + FR + FR P24 P15 N15 N24 M M RESET FR + nset2 External IF RF HSS T.11) T.21) T.31) T.41) T.51) T.61) T.71) T.81) T.91) FR + RS232C interface
X141
X161
HS
Setup Contactor control Signal. contact Line contactor X171 X172 SPP EXT

X181 M500 P500 2U1 1U1 2V1 1V1 2W1 1W1 U1 V1 W1 L1 L2 L3 FN LK
X351
X151
Signaling contact 5 V Start inhibit UNIT U DC link>>
Equipment bus
DC link
P 600 M 600
PE1
X131
U2 V2 W2 PE1 PE2
at
M 3 G SG
from the NC PE Warning! If a power contactor is used between the motor and main spindle drive module, then it must be ensured, that this contactor only switches in a nocurrent condition. (When shutting down, first cancel the pulses (terminal 663), then 40 ms later the contactor).
!
Fig. 6-1
Connecting diagram
1) freelyprogrammable inputs and outputs 2) from MLFB (Order No.) 6SN11210BA110AA1
HS/6-104
X351
04.97 07.94
Table 3-6 Term. No. U2 V2 W2 PE1 PE2 P600 M600 X151/351 56 14 24 8 X421 X421 X421 X421 connecting terminals Designation Function Type
1)
Typ. voltage/ limit values 3ph. 0...450 V AC 0V 0V +300 V 300 V Various "10V/0.5mA (max. "11 V) "10V/0.5mA (max. "11 V)
Max. crosssection
Motor connection
Acc. to the Configuring Guide
Protective conductor Protective conductor DC link DC link Equipment bus Speed setpoint 1 (differential input) Speed setpoint 2 (differential input) Caxis or supplementary speed setpoint Axisspecific pulse enable Controller enable RFG fast stop Freelyprogram. enable t. 12) Freelyprogram. enable t. 22) Freelyprogram. enable t. 32) Freelyprogram. enable t. 42) Freelyprogram. enable t. 52) Freelyprogram. enable t. 62) Freelyprogram. enable t. 72) Freelyprogram. enable t. 82) Freelyprogram. enable t. 92) Enable voltage Analog output, DAU1 Ref. potential for DAU1 Analog output, DAU2 Ref. potential for DAU2 Test socket Test socket Test socket Test socket
I O I/O I/O I/O E E E E
Bolt Bolt Busbar Busbar Ribbon cable 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2
663 65 81 E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E7 E8 E9 93) A91 M A92 M X1 X2 IR M
X431 X431 X431 X431 X431 X431 X431 X431 X431 X431 X431 X431 X431 X451 X451 X451 X451
I I I I I I I I I I I I O O O O O O O O O
+21V...+33V +13V...+30V +13V...+30V +13V...+30V +13V...+30V +13V...+30V +13V...+30V +13V...+30V +13V...+30V +13V...+30V +13V...+30V +13V...+30V +24V "10 V 3 mA 0V "10 V 3 mA 0V 0 V...5 V 3 mA 0 V...5 V 3 mA "10 V 3 mA 0V
1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 Test socket 2 mm diameter Test socket 2 mm diameter Test socket 2 mm diameter Test socket 2 mm diameter
HS
1) I = input, O = output 2) can be freelyprogrammed via operator control parameters 3) refer to Section 3.1...3.2
HS/6-105
10.94 07.94
Relay terminals
Table 3-7 Term. No. 289 A11 A21 A31 A41 A51) A61 672 673 674 AS 1 AS 2 Relay terminals Designation X441 X441 X441 X441 X441 X441 X441 X441 X441 X441 X441 X441 Function Center contact signals Freelyprogram. relay fct. 12) Freelyprogram. relay fct. 22) Freelyprogram. relay fct. 32) Freelyprogram. relay fct. 42) Freelyprogram. relay fct. 52) Freelyprogram. relay fct. 62) Ready/no axis specific fault Signaling contact Start inhibit Type
1)
Typ. voltage/ limit values 30 V/6.0 A max3) 30 V/1.0 A max 30 V/1.0 A max 30 V/1.0 A max 30 V/1.0 A max 30 V/1.0 A max 30 V/1.0 A max 30 V/1.0 A max 30 V/1.0 A max 30 V/1.0 A max 250 VAC/1 A, 30 VDC/2 A
Max. crosssection 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2
I NO NO NO NO NO NO NO I NC I NC
HS
1) I = input
NC = NC contact
NO = NO contact
2) can be freelyprogrammed via operator control parameters 3) when using several relays, the total current of 6 A may not be exceeded.
HS/6-106
07.94
Star/delta changeover
The motors with star/delta changeover permit a wide constant power range. At low speeds, the drive is operated in the star circuit configuration (high torque) and at high speeds, in the delta circuit configuration (high stall torque). Changeover is also possible during operation. The changeover command (star/delta) must be entered externally (similar to a gearbox stage changeover).
SIMODRIVE 611 analog system main spindle drive module
Selectable relay outputs2)
U2
V2 W2 PE
T. 663
T. En1)
T. An2)
T. An2)
T. 289
K2 Auxiliary contactor power supply K1h max. 30 V DC
Kx3)
K1 K2h
Kx3) K1 U1 V1 W1 U2 V2 W2 U2 V2 W2 K1
K1h
K2h
HS
K2 K2 K1
1PH Y/ Pulse enable Y/ changeover From the NC/PLC Fig. 6-2 Connecting diagram for Y/ changeover
K2
1) an input terminal, selectable from terminals E1 to E9. 2) two relay outputs, selectable from terminals A11 to A61. 3) safety hold is not guaranteed by just opening K1 and K2.Thus, for safetyrelated reasons, electrical isolation must be realized using contactor Kx. This contactor may only be switched in a nocurrent condition, i. e. the pulse enable must be removed 40 ms before the protective trip.
HS/6-107
6.4 Connector assignment Main spindle modules (HS)
07.94
6.4
Connector assignment
Overview
S connector assignment X412 and motor connector S connector assignment X432 for the spindle encoder S connector assignment X432 for BERO S connector assignment X432 for motor encoder signal output for NC
Connector assignment X412 and motor connector
X412: 15pin subD socket connector, shift locking motor connector: 17pin round connector
Note: The connector may only be inserted or withdrawn when the system is in a novoltage condition.
HS
Table 3-8
Connector assignment: Motor encoder signals X412/PIN No. 1 2 100 4 5 6 7 9 10 11 12 14 15

8 15 10 16 9 8 9 1 15 11 1 12 2 13 100 17 14 4 5
Signal name P encoder M encoder A A Inner shield B B 5 V sense R 0 V sense R + Temp Temp
Motor connector /PIN No. 10 7 1 2 17 11 12 16 100 15 13 8 9
7 6
External shield is connected to the connector housing.
HS/6-108
04.97 07.94
Connector assignment X432 for spindle encoder
15pin subD plug connector: shift catch Note: The connector may only be inserted or withdrawn when the system is in a novoltage condition.
Table 3-9 Connector assignment: Evaluation for incremental encoders with TTL squarewave signals PIN No. 1 2 100 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 0 V sense R R 5 V sense May not be used Sensor line, ground Signal R Signal R, inverted May not be used May not be used B B Signal name 5V 0V A A Explanation Encoder power supply Ground, encoder power supply Signal A Signal A, inverted May not be used Signal B Signal B, inverted May not be used Sensor line
HS
Connector assignment X432 for BERO
Table 3-10
Connector assignment: External reference mark evaluation PIN No. 10 14 15 Signal name FR + BERO FR Explanation 24V Signal Ground
Connector assignment X433 for BERO
Table 3-11
Connector assignment: External reference mark evaluation PIN No. 1 2 100 Signal name FR + BERO FR Explanation 24V Signal Ground
HS/6-109
07.94
Connector assignment X432 for motor encoder signal output for NC
Table 3-12
Connector assignment: Output of motor encoder signals with TTL square wave signals PIN No. 1 2 100 4 5 6 7 8 9 B B 0V A A Signal name May not be used Ground, encoder power supply Signal A Signal A, inverted May not be used Signal B Signal B, inverted May not be used May not be used May not be used May not be used R R Signal R Signal R, inverted May not be used May not be used Explanation
HS
10 11 12 13 14 15
HS/6-110
07.94
Connector X432
B a R1 td
td
R2
td
td
R3
td
td
Fig. 6-3
X432: Output signals for the numerical control
HS
R1: Multiplication factor 1 and 0.5 R2: Multiplication factor 2 R3: Multiplication factor 4 Incremental signals: TTL squarewave pulse trains A and B, and their inverted pulse trains A and B. When the shaft is rotating clockwise, B lags A. a 200 ns, if the maximum permissible encoder signal input frequency is notexceeded One squarewave pulse R per mechanical revolution and its inverted pulse R. |td| 50 ns Iahigh 20 mA Ialow 20 mA Cload 1000 pF Signal level: Open output (internal 270 ) 3.5 V, for minimum terminating resistance, of a total of 60 , 2.5 V. More detailed information can be taken from the description of the RS422A interface.
Edge distance: Reference signal: Delay time: Load capability:
HS/6-111
6.5 Addresses, RAM variables Main spindle modules (HS)
03.96 07.94
6.5
Addresses, RAM variables

The following is valid for all address information: Segment address = 0H
Table 3-13 Addresses, RAM variables Variable Speed setpoint Speed actual value Absolute speed actual value (1 ms) Speed setpointactual value difference Torque setpoint from the speed controller Torque setpoint for K/P converter Actual Mdset for Md operation Rampfunction generator input High address 0C02H 0C06H 0C0AH 0E00H 0E04H Low address 0C00H 0C04H 1402H 0C08H 0C66H 0C6CH 0C6EH 0E02H 0E06H 0F5CH 0F5EH 0F7CH 0FC2H 1B08H 1B0AH 906H 3064H 3050H Value Corresponds to
10 0000H nrated 10 0000H nrated 1 000H nrated 10 000H nrated Adr. 0F52H Mdrated Adr. 0F52H Adr. 0F52H Mdrated Mdrated
10 0000H nrated 10 0000H nrated 2 000H Irated 2 000H Irated 2 000H frated 64H 100 C Adr. 0F52H Adr. 0F52H Mdrated Mdrated
HS
Rampfunction generator output Magnetizing current setpoint Active current setpoint Slip frequency setpoint Stator temperature Digital filter input Digital filter output DC link voltage Output P/Prated Output |P/Prated|
3593 600 V 4000H Prated 4000H Prated 1)
1)
from FW2.00
HS/6-112
03.96 07.94
6.6 Setting and check data (parameter list) Main spindle modules (HS)
6.6
Setting and check data (parameter list)

Fields with grey background: Data entry is not possible
HS
HS/6-113
HS
P No. Setting range Setting 1 2 7 8 C 100.0 100.0 RPM maxmot RPM 0 2.00 2.00 5 0 12 hex RPM dec ms s s hex % % hex kW kVA A V % V RPM RPM Dim. 200.0...200.0 200.0...200.0 2.2.1 5.1.1 5.1.1 5.1.1 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 nmaxmot ... n maxmot 1.20 C000...4000 0.01...64.00 0.01...64.00 3...10000 0...30 0...n rated 1...n rated 0...n maxmot 5.0...15.0 0...15000 200.0...200.0 0...n rated/16 0...n maxmot 1.20 1.20 2.40 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 3.00 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 5.1.1 5.1.1 5.1.1 5.1.1 5.1.1 5.1.1 5.1.2 3.3.5 3.3.5 mot 1 3.1 3.1 4.1 4.1 4.1 4.1 5.1.3 mot 1 3.3.2 mot 1 2.2.3 mot 1 3.3.2 3.1 2.2.3 3.3.5 mot 1 3.3.2 5.1.3 2.2.3 1.20 1.20 1.20
Designation
Sec. Firmware status Setting, gearbox stagedependent 5 6 100 4
HS/6-114
RPM rated/256 RPM 6000 10.0 0 100.0 20 RPM V ms % RPM hex RPM maxmot RPM
(P000) Operating display
(P001) Speed setpoint
(P002) Speed actual value
(P003) Motor voltage
(P004) Utilization
(P006) DC link voltage
(P007) Motor current
(P008) Motor reactive power
(P009) Motor active power
(P010) Motor temperature
(P011) Status of the binary inputs
RPM P012 Normalization, DAU actdisplay
P013 Normalization,, utilization display
P014 Speed for max. motor useful speed
P015 Offset correction, speed setpoint
P016 Rampup time, RFG
P017 Rampdown time, RFG
P018 Smoothing time, speed setpoint smoothing
P019 Degree of roundingoff, speed setpoint
(P020) Diagnostics, speed actual value
P021 RPM min for n act < RPM min signal
P022 Shutdown speed, pulse cancellation
P023 RPM x for RPM act < RPM x signal
P024 Normalization, setpoint
P025 Timer stage, pulse cancellation
M/M rated P026 Normalization, DAU
P027 Toler. bandw. for n act = n set signal
04.97 03.96 07.94
(P028) Diagnostics
P029 Speed limiting
P No. 1 2 7 8 3.1 mot 1 4.1 4.1 3.3.4 0 100 ms ms dec RPM RPM % % % RPM RPM hex RPM RPM % % hex 100 0 32000 50 100 100 50 500 20 1 4000 50 90 100 0
Designation 2.00 1.20 3.0...120.0 5...6000 ms dec 0...7 0...10 3...1000 400...400 32000 0...500 5...300 5...100 5...100 1...n maxmot 0...n maxmot 0...1 1...n maxmot 0...n rated 0...100 250...250 C000...4000 0...n maxmot 0...7FFF 0...1 0...FFFF 0 0 11 RPM rated 0 RPM rated 0...n maxmot 0...n maxmot 0 20 32.0 dec 1.20 1.20 3.00 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 2.40 0...n maxmot 0 RPM
Firm Sec. ware status Setting range Setting Dim.
Setting, gearbox stagedependent 100 4 5 6
03.96 04.97 07.94
P030
Min. steadystate speed
P031 mot 1
P gain, speed controller
P032
Integral action time, speed controller
P033 4.1 4.1 2.2.3
Encoder resolution for NC
P034 mot 1
Smoothing time, speed actual value smoothing
P035
Smoothing time, torque setpoint
P036
Encoder phase error correction
P037 mot 1 2.2.3 mot 1 2.2.3 mot 1 2.2.3 mot 1 2.2.3 mot 1 2.2.3 mot 1 2.2.3 4.1 4.1 4.1
Changeover speed, motor encoder evalu. mot 1 2.2.3
P038
Hysteresis, P037
P039
1st torque limit
P040
Regenerative limiting
P041
2nd torque limit
P042
Changeover speed for P040
P043
Hysteresis, P042
P044
Selection, torque setpoint smoothing
mot 1 mot 1 3.3.2 2.3.4 2.3.4 mot 1 2.2.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 2.3.1 2.3.1 2.3.1 2.3.1 2.00 1.20 2.3.1 1.20 1.20 C000...4000 0...n maxmot 4 RPM rated RPM hex hex hex RPM hex RPM RPM RPM rated/128 RPM 1.20 nmaxmot ... n maxmot
P045
Switchin speed, torque setpoint smooth. mot 1
P046
Hysteresis, P045
P047
M dx for M d < M dx signal
P048
Normalization, torque setpoint
P049
Offset, torque setpoint
P050
Changeover speed from to M d2 d1M
P051
Write protection
P052
Transfer parameters into FEPROM
P053
Control word
P054
M19, speed setpoint normalization
P055
M19, speed setpoint offset correction
P056
M19, changeover speed
P058
Switchoff threshold, roundingoff M19
HS/6-115
P062
M19 changeover threshold, I comp., speed cont.
HS
HS
Setting, gearbox stagedependent 1 0...170
Mot.typdep.
P No. 2 100 4 5 6 7 8 mot 1 2.2.3 1.20 C 1.20 0...170 C 0...600 0...FFFF 0...15 0 3048 0 20 C04 0 0 3050 0 0 0 0 1 7 100 6 4 2 9 10 11 002D 45...750 0.50...10.00 300 1.00 dec dec dec dec dec dec dec hex 0...FFFF Hz dec dec dec hex hex hex dec hex hex dec hex ms dec hex 0...FFFF 0...15 0...32767 0...FFFF 0...15 7F...FF80 0...FFFF 0...15 7F...FF80 7F...FF80 7F...FF80 1...34 1...34 1...34 1...34 1...34 1...34 1...34 1...34 1...34 dec 3044 hex 240 s 0 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 2.40 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 2.00 2.00 2.2.3 2.2.3 3.3.5 3.3.5 3.3.5 3.3.5 3.3.5 5.1.4 5.1.4 5.1.4 5.1.4 5.1.4 3.3.5 3.3.5 5.1.4 3.2.2 3.2.2 3.2.2 3.2.2 3.2.2 3.2.2 3.2.2 3.2.2 3.2.2 1.3 2.3.6 2.3.6
Designation
FirmSec. ware status Setting range Setting Dim.
HS/6-116
P063
Max. motor temperature
P064
Fixed temperature
P065
Timer stage, motor temperature alarm
P066
Address, DAU 1
P067
Shift factor, DAU 1
P068
Address, DAU 2
P069
Shift factor, DAU 2
P071
DAU smoothing time, utilization display
P072
Address, DAU 4
P073
Shift factor, DAU 4
P074
Offset, DAU 4
P076
Address, DAU 3
P077
Shift factor, DAU 3
P078
Offset, DAU 1
P079
Offset, DAU 2
P080
Offset, DAU 3
P081
Terminal function assignment E1
P082
P083
P084
P085
P086
P087
P088
P089
P090
Control word
P091
Frequency filter 1, HPC
04.97 03.96 07.94
P092
Quality filter 1, HPC
03.96 04.97 07.94
P No. 1 6 C000...4000 RPM rated/8 RPM dec dec hex dec dec % RPM Hz dec ms Hz dec % % dec ms hex 1 RPM rated/8 0 0 0 0 5...100 500...10000 100
Mot.typdep.
Designation 2 100 4 5 7 8 2.3.6 2.3.6 2.1 mot 1 2.1 2.1 0...1 128...4096 0.00...99.00 50...450 0.10...10.00 3...10000 45...750 0.50...10.00 5...180 5...100 3.0...240.0 10.0 20 2...6000 0...3 100 100 1.00 300 100 1.00 300 2048 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 1.20 1.20 nrated 1...+nrated 1 1.20 C000...4000 255...255 0...FFFF 0...FFFF 1.20 1.20 1.20 2.00 1.20 1.20 0 1.20 101...425 101 1.20 6...13 7 2.00 nrated 1...+n rated1 2.00 0 hex
FirmSec. ware status Setting range Setting Dim. Setting, gearbox stagedependent
P093
Offset correction, speed setpoint HPC
P094
Normalization, speed setpoint HPC
P095
Power section code number
P096
Motor code number
P097
Initialization
P098 2.2.2 2.2.1 5.1.1 5.1.1 mot 1 4.1 mot 1 4.1 2.3.6 2.3.6 2.3.6 2.3.6 2.3.6 2.3.6 2.3.6 3.1 2.3.2 2.3.2 mot 1 4.2 mot 1 4.1 mot 1 4.1 2.3.6
Encoder pulse number, motor measuring system 2.1
(P099) Firmware release
(P101) Setpoint for openloop torque controlled oper.
P103 Frequency, torque setpoint filter
P104 Quality, torque setpoint filter
P106 Smoothing time, speed setpoint, HPC
P107 Frequency, filter 2 HPC
RPM hex dec hex hex % RPM
P108 Quality, filter 2 HPC
P109 Torque limit, HPC
P110 Regenerative limit, HPC
P111 P gain, speed controller HPC
P112 Integral action time, speed controller HPC
P113 Channel selection, speed setpoint
P114 Normalization, speed setpoint, C axis
P115 Offset correction, speed setpoint, C axis
P116 Correction, P gain, current controller
P117 Selection, torque setpoint filter
P118 Typical torque setpoint filter
P119 Flux adaptation HPC
HS/6-117
P120 Changeover speed, current contr. adapt. mot 1 4.2
HS
HS
Setting, gearbox stagedependent 1 6 0...64000 0...64000 32768...32767 0...64000 0...64000 0.0...180.0 0...1 0...64000 128...64000 0.0...180.0 0.0...180.0 0...FFFF 0...FFFF 0...FFFF 0...FFFF 0...FFFF 0 0 0 1.00 5.00 500 0...21 0...1 0.00...18.00 0.00...18.00 100 hex dec hex hex hex degr. degr. RPM 44 hex 220 hex 220 hex 2.0 degr. 10.0 degr. dec dec 2048 dec 0 dec 0 hex dec 10.0 dec 0 dec 0 dec 256 dec 0 dec 0 dec 2 100 4 5 7 8
P No. 2.3.3 2.3.3 2.3.3 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 2.3.3 2.3.3 2.3.3 2.3.3 2.3.3 2.3.3 2.3.3 1.20 1.20
Designation
HS/6-118
2.3.3 2.3.3 2.3.3 2.3.3 2.3.3 2.3.3 2.3.3 2.3.3 2.3.3 2.3.3 2.3.3 2.3.3 2.3.3 2.3.3 2.3.3 2.3.3
P121 Position reference value 1
P123 Position reference value, incremental
P126 Bandwidth, integrator enable speed controller
(P128) Actual position reference value
P129 Setting the internal zero mark
P130 Zero mark offset
P131 Max. pulse number between 2 zero marks
(P132) Absol. pos. act. value without zero mark offset 2.3.3
(P133) Difference between 2 external zero marks
P134 Initiation point for P136
P135 Initiation point for P137/P138
P136 P gain, gradient 1
P137 P gain, gradient 2
P138 P gain, gradient 2 (HMS)
P139 Multiplier for braking parabola
(P140) Absol. pos. actual value with zero mark offset
P141 Changeover parameter, positioning
P142 Flag for speed increase
P143 Transfer parameter P141
P144 Response bandwidth, relay 1
P145 Response bandwidth, relay 2
P146 Search speed for spindle positioning
0... 4 RPM rated 0.0...180.0
(P147) Position counter status regarding the BERO
1.0
dec
degr.
03.96 07.94
P148 Motion window, spindle positioning
04.97 07.94
P No. 1 6 40 hex hex hex RPM RPM ms ms mH kgm 2 kW A V RPM Hz V A m m m

Mot.typdep. Mot.typdep. Mot.typdep. Mot.typdep. Mot.typdep.
Designation Setting range 2 100 4 5 7 8 0...FFFF Dep. on module expansion 0...7FFF 0...1 0 0 1000 1000 0.000
Mot.typdep. Mot.typdep. Mot.typdep. Mot.typdep. Mot.typdep. Mot.typdep. Mot.typdep. Mot.typdep. Mot.typdep. Mot.typdep.
FirmSec. ware status Setting Dim. hex Setting, gearbox stagedependent 2.3 2.2.2 1.3 0 0 1.3 2.2.3 2.2.3 2.2.3 10...10000 0...10000 0.000...65.535 0.002...32.000 0.0...150.0 0.00...200.0 0.0...500.0 0...4096 0.0...409.6 0.0...500.0 0.00...200.00 0...32767 0...32767 0...32767 0...32767 0...65535 100...24000 100...6000 0...20000 50...300 50...150 1.20 1.20 0...1 2.2.3 mot 1 mot 1 mot 1 mot 1 mot 1 mot 1 mot 1 mot 1 mot 1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 1.20 1.20 mot 1 mot 1 mot 1 mot 1 mot 1 mot 1 mot 1 mot 1 1.20 2.1 1.20 2.1 1.20 2.1 1.20 2.1 1.20 2.1 1.20 2.1 1.20 2.1 1.20 2.1 3.00 1.20 1.20 1.20 nmaxmot ... n maxmot 1.20 nmaxmot ... n maxmot 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20
P149 Startup parameter C axis/position.
(P150) Board identification
P151 Write protection
P152 Transfer parameter into the EEPROM
P154 Oscillation setpoint 1
P156 Oscillation interval time 1
P158 Series reactor inductance
P159 Motor moment of inertia
P160 Rated motor output
P161 Rated motor current
P162 Rated motor voltage
P163 Rated motor speed
m m RPM RPM
Mot.typdep. Mot.typdep. Mot.typdep.
P164 Rated motor frequency
P165 Motor noload voltage
P166 Motor noload current
P167 Stator resistance, cold
P168 Rotor resistance, cold
P169 Stator leakage reactance
P170 Rotor leakage reactance
P171 Main field reactance
P172 Upper speed,
L h characteristic
P173 Speed at the start of field weakening
P174 Max. motor speed L h characteristic mot 1 mot 1
RPM % % 0 hex
P175 Gain factor
P176 Stall torque reduction factor
HS/6-119
P177 Start calculation, motor 1 (P096)
HS
HS
Setting, gearbox stagedependent 1 6 0...2 0...1 0...FFFF 0...FFFF 0...FFFF 0.00...10.00 0.00...10.00 0...FFFF 0...FFFF 0...FFFF 0.00...10.00 0.00...10.00 0...FFFF 0...n maxmot 0...n maxmot 0.0...120.0 1...200 5...6000 1...200 0...7 0...1 0...10 0...FFFF 0...FFFF 0...FFFF 80 100 0 0 1 0 0 0 100 24.0 dec % ms % dec hex hex hex hex 1200 RPM 1000 RPM 1 hex 0.00 s 0.00 s 0 hex C06 hex 1 hex 0.00 s 0.00 s 0 hex C06 hex hex hex 0 hex 0 hex 0 hex 2 100 4 5 7 8
P No. 5.1.5 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 2.1.3 5.1.5 5.1.5 5.1.5 3.3.3 3.3.3 3.3.3 3.3.3 3.3.3 3.3.3 3.3.3 3.3.3 3.3.3 3.3.3 mot 1 4.1 4.1 4.1 4.1 4.1 4.1 4.1 5.1.6 5.1.6 5.1.6 5.1.6 5.1.6 mot 1 mot 1 mot 1
Designation Setting range
FirmSec. ware status Setting Dim.
HS/6-120
mot 1 mot 1 hex
P179 Select, min/max memory
P180 Enable motor changeover (star/delta)
P181 Address for min/max memory
(P182) Min. value min/max memory
(P183) Max. value min/max memory
P185 Address for monitoring 1
P186 Threshold for monitoring 1
P187 Pullin delay, monitoring 1
P188 Dropout delay, monitoring 1
P189 Hysteresis, monitoring 1
P195 Lower adaptation speed
P196 Upper adaptation speed
P198 P gain, upper adaptation speed
P199 Reduction factor, P gain
P201 Integral action time, upper adapt. speed mot 1
P202 Reduction factor, integral action time
P203 Control word, speed controller adapt.
P206 Selection, transient recorder
P207 Set transient recorder
P208 Address for start condition
P209 Threshold for start condition
03.96 07.94
P210 Address for stop condition
04.97 07.94
P No. 1 6 0...FFFF 0...FFFF 0...FFFF 0...1 0...15 0...15 0...FFFF 0...FFFF 0.002...32.000
Mot.typdep. Mot.typdep. Mot.typdep. Mot.typdep. Mot.typdep. Mot.typdep. Mot.typdep. Mot.typdep. Mot.typdep.
Designation Setting range 2 100 4 5 7 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 kgm 2 kW A V RPM Hz V A m m m m m RPM

Mot.typdep. Mot.typdep. Mot.typdep. Mot.typdep. Mot.typdep.
FirmSec. ware status Setting Dim. hex hex hex hex dec dec hex hex Setting, gearbox stagedependent 5.1.6 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 0.00...200.00 0.0...500.0 0...4096 0.0...409.6 0.0...500.0 0.00...200.00 0...32767 0...32767 0...32767 0...32767
Mot.typdep. Mot.typdep. Mot.typdep. Mot.typdep.
P211 Threshold for the stop condition 5.1.6 5.1.6 5.1.6 5.1.6 5.1.6 5.1.6 5.1.6 mot 2 2.1.3 mot 2 2.1.3 mot 2 2.1.3 mot 2 2.1.3 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 50...300 50...150 0...1 101...425 0...20000 100...6000 100...24000 0...65535 mot 2 2.1.3 mot 2 2.1.3 mot 2 2.1.3 mot 2 2.1.3 mot 2 2.1.3 mot 2 2.1.3 mot 2 2.1.3 mot 2 2.1.3 mot 2 2.1.3 0.0...150
P212 Address, signal 1
P214 Start trace output
P215 Shift factor, signal 1
P217 Trigger signal 1
P219 Motor moment of inertia
RPM RPM % % 0 101 hex dec mot 2 2.1.3 mot 2 2.1.3 2.1.3 mot 2 2.1.3
P225 Motor noload voltage
P232 Upper speed,
L h characteristic mot 2 2.1.3
P233 Speed at the start of field weakening mot 2 2.1.3
P234 Max. motor speed
P235 Gain factor
L h characteristic mot 2 2.1.3
P236 Stall torque reduction factor
P237 Start calculation, other motor
HS/6-121
P238 Motor code number
HS
HS
Setting, gearbox stagedependent 1 6 0...1 1...20 1...20 1...20 1...20 1...20 1...20 0...FFFF 100...10000 0...FFFF 0...FFFF 0.00...0.50 s s RPM RPM RPM RPM RPM RPM 32.0 20 32000 50 0...500 5...300 5...100 100 100 dec ms RPM RPM % % 0.00...1.00 0.80
RPM maxmot
P No. 2 100 4 5 7 8 2.1.3 1.20 1.20 2 100 1 4 5 7 0 750 0 0 0.20 hex hex hex hex hex ms hex dec dec dec dec dec dec 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 2.00 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 3.00 3.00 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 0...n rated/16 0...n maxmot 3.0...120.0 5...6000 32000 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 20 RPM maxmot 0...n maxmot 6000 1...n rated RPM rated/256 0...n rated 12 nmaxmot ... n maxmot 3.3.2 3.3.2 3.3.2 3.3.2 3.3.2 3.3.2 3.3.2 5.2.2 2.3.5 2.3.5 2.3.5 5.1.2 5.1.2 3.3.2 3.3.2 mot 2 3.1 mot 2 3.3.2 mot 2 2.2.3 3.3.2 mot 2 3.3.2 mot 2 2.2.3 mot 2 4.1 4.1 mot 2 mot 2 2.2.3 mot 2 2.2.3 mot 2 2.2.3 mot 2 2.2.3 0 dec
Designation
HS/6-122
P239 Start calculation, motor 2 (P238)
P241 Programmable, signal 1
P247 Control word signal
P248 Delay time, fault message F11
P249 Memory loc. segment, monitor
P250 Memory loc. address, monitor
P251 Value display, monitor memory location
(P254) Display of active functions 1
P256
Delay time n
= n signal set act
P257
Delay time Md < Mdx signal
P260 RPM min for n act < RPM min signal
P262 RPM x for RPM x signal act < RPM
P263 Toler. bandw. for n act = n set signal
P264 Speed limiting
P265 P gain, speed controller
P266 Integral action time, speed controller
P267 Changeover speed, mot. encoder select.
P268 Hysteresis, P267
P269 1st torque limit
04.97 07.94
P270 Regenerative limiting
04.97 07.94
P No. 1 6 5...100 1...nmaxmot 500 20 4000 50 300 1.00 0 0 0 1000 1200 24.0 100 80 100 4 RPM rated RPM
Mot.typdep. Mot.typdep.
Designation 2 100 4 5 7 8 mot 2 2.2.3 1.20 1.20 RPM RPM RPM RPM Hz dec dec hex hex RPM RPM dec % ms % 1.20 0...nmaxmot 1...nmaxmot 0...nrated 50...450 0.10...10.00 255...255 0...1 0...1 0...nmaxmot 0...nmaxmot 0.0...120.0 1...200 5...6000 1...200 0...nmaxmot 0...170 500...10000 0...7 0.000...65.535 0.0...100.0 0.0...800.0 0...1 0 0.000 0.0 0.0 0 C 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 mot 2 2.2.3 mot 2 2.2.3 50 %
FirmSec. ware status Setting range Setting Dim. Setting, gearbox stagedependent
P271 2nd torque limit
P272 Changeover speed for P270
P274 Switchin speed, torque setpoint smooth.mot 2 4.1 mot 2 4.1 mot 2 4.1 mot 2 4.1 mot 2 4.2 mot 2 4.1 mot 2 4.1 mot 2 4.1 mot 2 4.1 mot 2 4.1 mot 2 4.1
P276 Frequency, torque setpoint filter
P277 Quality, torque setpoint filter
P278 Correction, P gain, current controller
P280 Selection, torque setpoint filter
P281 Typical torque setpoint filter
P285 P gain, upper adaptation speed
P286 Reduction factor, P gain
mot 2 4.1 mot 2 2.2.3 mot 2 2.2.3 RPM dec mH hex % Hz dec dec mot 2 4.1 mot 2 2.1.2 3.00 5.1.3 5.1.7 5.1.7 5.1.7 1.20 4.2 1.20 1.20 1.20 2.00
P288 Integral action time, upper adapt. speed mot 2 4.1
P289 Reduction factor, integral action time
P290 Changeover speed from M M d2 d1 to
P291 Max. motor temperature
P292 Changeover speed, current contr. adapt. mot 2 4.2
P293 Control word, speed controller adapt.
(P299) Checksum, parameters
P311 Current for I/f openloop control
P312 Frequency for I/f openloop control
P313 Selection, I/f openloop control
HS/6-123
(P316) Display, P gain, current controller
HS
HS
Setting, gearbox stagedependent 1 6 2 100 4 5 7 8
P No.
Designation Setting range
HS/6-124
FirmSec. ware status 5.1.3 3.00 Setting Dim. 5.1.3 3.00 5.1.1 3.00 4.2 3.00 3.00 0...7 2 6 10.0 % % ms %/ms %/ms % 50.0 200 0.50 0.10 0.00 hex 0...7 0.1...100.0 0.0...100.0 0...999 0.01...100.00 0.01...100.00 0.0...100.0 3.00 hex 0...7 hex 4.2 4.2 2.3.4 2.00 2.3.4 2.3.4 2.00 2.3.4 2.00 2.3.4 2.00 2.3.4 2.00 2.3.4 2.00 2.00 4 kHz
(P320) Diagnostics, motor encoder zero mark
(P321) Diagnostics, spindle encoder zero mark
(P330) Inverter clock frequency
P331 Inverter clock frequency 2
P340 Speed deviation, slip monitoring
P341 Torque reduction, slip monitoring
P343 Delay time, slip monitoring
P344 Torquereduction speed, slip monitoring
P345 Torque increase speed, slip monitoring
P346 Hysteresis to P340
(P347) Speed deviation, actual slip monitoring
04.97 07.94
Induction motor modules (AM)

1 First steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 2 StartUp Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Startup instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operator control and display elements, control parameters . . . . . . . . . Overview setting data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AM/1-3 AM/1-4 AM/1-7 AM/1-9 AM/1-13 AM/1-14 AM/2-15 AM/2-15 AM/2-22 AM/2-22 AM/2-23 AM/2-23 AM/2-27 AM/2-27 AM/2-32 AM/2-32 AM/2-34 AM/2-36 AM/3-37 AM/3-37 AM/3-40 AM/3-40 AM/3-41 AM/3-43 AM/3-43 AM/3-44 AM/3-47 AM/3-48 AM/4-51 AM/4-54 AM/4-57 AM/4-59 AM/4-60 AM/4-61 AM/4-62 AM/4-64
Determining and setting the system configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1 2.2 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.3 2.3.1 2.3.2 2.3.3 2.4 2.5 Motor and drive converter data sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standard applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Firmware version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting parameters for standard applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multimotor operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parallel operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameter set changeover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor changeover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating motors at maximum speeds > 32000 RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitor function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AM
Parameterization of the drive converter interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1 3.2 3.2.1 3.2.2 3.3 3.3.1 3.3.2 3.3.3 3.3.4 Speed setpoint interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Permanentlywired terminal functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Freelyprogrammable terminal functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Output terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Permanentlywired relay functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Freelyprogrammable relay functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Variable relay function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controller optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 Speed controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Current controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Field controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optimization openloop controlled range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special speeds and speed ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AMi
07.94
Diagnostics and fault analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1 5.1.1 5.1.2 5.1.3 5.1.4 5.1.5 5.1.6 5.1.7 5.2 5.2.1 5.2.2 Diagnostic aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Measured value displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Status displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test sockets X1, X2, IR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Minimum/maximum value memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transient recorder function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Openloop current/frequency control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fault analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fault display, fault acknowledgment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fault message list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AM/5-75 AM/5-75 AM/5-75 AM/5-76 AM/5-79 AM/5-80 AM/5-83 AM/5-84 AM/5-86 AM/5-87 AM/5-87 AM/5-88 AM/6-91 AM/6-92 AM/6-10 AM/6-10 AM/6-10 AM/6-10 AM/6-10 AM/6-10 AM/6-10 AM/6-10
Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.4.1 6.4.2 6.4.3 6.5 6.6 Flow diagram for new startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power module code numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 X432 connector assignment for BERO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 X412 connector assignment for the motor temperature sensor . . . . . . 6 X411 serial interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Addresses, RAM variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Setting and checking data (Parameter list) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
AMii
04.97 07.94
1 First steps Induction motor modules (AM)
First steps
1
Warning Professional transport, storage, installation and mounting as well as careful operator control and service are absolutely necessary to guarantee perfect and safe operation of this drive converter. Severe bodily injury or material damage can occur if this warning information is not observed. The boards contain components which can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge. Please observe the ESDS instructions in the foreword.
Note
The board, MLFB (Order No.) 6SN11210BA110AA1 can only be operated with firmware from 3.00. The boards, MLFB (Order Nos.): 6SN11210BA110AA0 6SN11210BA120AA0 can only be operated up to Firmware 2.xx.
AM
AM/1-3
1.1 StartUp Guidelines Induction motor modules (AM)
07.94
1.1
StartUp Guidelines
Structure of the StartUp Guide
The StartUp Guide is structured according to the sequence of the various startup steps. To startup standard applications, where the preset drive converter interfaces (Section 1.5) and controller optimization when shipped, are adequate, then only the startup steps which are highlighted are of significance.
1 First steps
2 System configuration
3 Converter interfaces
4 Contr. optimization
S S S
Startup guidelines Startup instructions Operator control and display elements, control parameters Overview, setting data Connections
S S S
Motor and converter data sets Standard applications Multimotor operation
S S
Speed setpoint interface Input terminals
S S S S S S S
Speed controller current controller Field Openloop controlled range Limits Special speeds and speed ranges Manual optimization
Permanentlywired
terminal function
Freelyprogram
mable terminal function
S S
Parallel operation Parameter set

changeover
Output terminals
Motor changeover
Monitor function
AM
5 Diagnostics, fault analysis
Diagnostic aids
Fault analysis
6 Appendix
S S
Flow diagram Connections
S S
Addresses, RAM variables Setting and monitoring data
Fig. 1-1
Startup steps
AM/1-4
04.97 07.94
Parameter listing
Warning Parameter settings, which are not listed in the parameter list (refer to Section 6.6) may not be changed.
The parameter descriptions are in the form of tables. The sequence in which they are listed is the actual parameterizing sequence.
Table 1-1 Example of the parameter display Parameter attributes Number Change effective online after initialization P051 Setting range Description
P024 P014.M P039.G P114.F (P001)
4 10
Value range dimensions
Parameter designation Brief description of the parameter FW x.xx
Parameter attributes
S Number
P024 generally valid parameter P014.M motordependent parameter subparameter P014.1...P014.4 P039.G gearbox stagedependent parameter subparameter P039.1...P039.8 P114.F fixed setpointdependent parameter subparameter P114.1...P014.7 (P001) display parameter; value cannot be changed.
AM
AM/1-5
04.97 12.94 07.94
S Change effective
online Change is immediately effective. After initialization Initialization is started by setting P097 to 1H.
S P051
Write protection parameters Remove the write protection by entering 04H and remove the special write protection by entering 0010H.
Setting range
For several control words, the functions are activated by setting the bits of a binary number and these are then entered in a hexadecimal form. Example:
BIT Bit 6: Bit 7:
15 0 0
14 0 0
13 0 0
12 0 0
11 0 0
10 0 0
9 0 0
8 0 0
7 0 1
6 1 0
5 0 0
4 0 0
3 0 0
0 0 0
1 0 0
0 0 0 Bin Bin 0040H 0080H
A combination of several functions is entered by adding binary or hexadecimal values. Example:

BIT 15 0 14 0 13 0 12 0 11 0 10 0 9 0 8 0 7 1 6 1 5 0 4 0 3 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 Bin 00C0H
AM
Bit 6+Bit 7
Description
S FW x.xx
Firmwarerelease dependent coding of the function and parameter extensions. The extension is available from the specified firmware release.
AM/1-6
04.97 12.94 07.94
1.2 Startup instructions Induction motor modules (AM)
1.2
Startup instructions
via
Startup possibilities
S operator control and display elements (refer to Section 1.3) S RS232C interface with an IBM ATcompatible computer and
startup software (refer to foreword).
Reinitialize drive converter (if necessary)
If an already initialized drive converter is to be reinitialized, then the following procedure must be observed:
S if required, save setting data (parameters) S remove write protection: Set P051 to 4H. S start initialization: Set P097 to 0H. S overwrite the parameters in the drivemachine data memory:
Set P052 to 1H, and wait until P052 resets itself to 0H.
S poweron reset:
Powerdown the unit and powerup approximately 2 s after the display has disappeared: P095 must then appear in the display.
S initialize (Section 2.1).

Firmware replacement (if required)
The firmware can be replaced using the userprompted startup software for main spindle and induction motor modules from version V2.00. Dependency, firmware release/board Firmware release before 3.00 from 3.00 Procedure: Board 6SN11220BA1V0AA0 6SN11220BA120AA1y
AM
S S S S S
backup setting data (parameters) replace the firmware using the startup program initialize with the pulses and controller inhibited (Section 2.1). reload the backedup settings. adjust the power offset (refer to Table 41, from FW 3.00, this is not necessary)
S backup the settings in the drivemachine data memory (Section 1.3)
AM/1-7
1.2 Startup instructions Induction motor modules (AM)
07.94
Startup of series machines, module replacement, component replacement
The drive converter setting data (parameters) can be saved on floppy disk using the startup software. Proceed as follows for series startup of additional drive converters:
1. Initialize with the pulses and controller inhibited:
Enter P095 power module code acc. to Table 61 . 1) motor code numbers are saved on floppy disk and therefore do not have to be entered. start initialization. 2. Load setting data from the floppy disk. 3. Adjust the power offset according to Table 41. This is not necessary from FW 3.00. 4. Save.
AM
1)
Power modules with MLFB (Order No.=) 6SN112V1AV0VVVA1 from FW 3.00, are automatically identified. Then, it is no longer possible/necessary to enter P095.
AM/1-8
07.94
1.3 Operator control and display elements, control parameters Induction motor modules (AM)
1.3
Operator control and display elements, control parameters
Operator control and display elements
The following operator control and display elements are available on the front panel to startup and parameterize the SIMODRIVE 611A induction motor module:
3 op. control keys ( +
and
key)
S 6digit LCD display

Gearbox stagedependent parameters and the fixed setpointdependent P114 are represented using 8 subparameter numbers (e. g. P039.1 to P039.8). Motordependent parameters are represented with 4 subparameter numbers (e. g. P014.1 to P014.4). The operator control element functions are represented using, as an example, parameter P039.
<<
>>
Parameter number
<
>
AM
Subparameter number + P +
P Parameter value
<
>
<<
>>
AM/1-9
07.94
Control parameters
Note If data storage (P052) is interrupted due to power failure or the power being disconnected, then the modified/changed values are lost, and when the power returns, the converter displays fault message F07 (refer to Section 5.2.2). The parameter values can be reset after fault message F07 is acknowledged (refer to Section 5.2.2).
Table 1-2
openloop control parameter Parameter attributes
Number
P051
Setting data
Description
P051 P151 P052 P152
0...FFFF hex
Write protection Remove write protection by entering 4H. Remove special write protection by entering 10H. Parameter transfer into the FEPROM Transfer into the nonvolatile drivemachine data memory is started by setting to 1. The parameter is reset automatically after parameter transfer. Control word Bit Value 0000H The ready relay pullsin if there is no fault and the pulses and controller are enabled. The ready relay pullsin if there is no fault. Motor parameter set is changedover after selecting another motor with subsequent pulse cancellation (motor changeover). The motor parameter set is immediately changedover after another motor is selected (parameter set changeover) For a rampfunction generator fast stop (T. 81), the pulses are not canceled when the absolute speed nmin (P022) is fallen below. For a rampfct. generator fast stop (term. 81), the pulses are canceled when the absolute speed nmin (P022) is fallen below. The rampfunction generator is not tracked. The rampfunction generator is trakked. Rampfunction generator tracking means that there is an immediate response to an opposing setpoint change if the rampfunction generator is set too fast.
online
0...1 dec
P053
online
0...FFFF hex
AM
0001H
0000H
0002H
0000H
0004H
0000H 3 0008H
AM/1-10
04.97 07.94
Table 1-2
Number
P051
Setting data
Description
P053
0...FFFF hex
Control word Bit Value 0000H 5 0020H 0000H Faults are not influenced by a controller inhibit at terminal 65. Faults can be acknowledged by a controller inhibit at terminal 65. The speed actual value is searched for from the speed setpoint. If the pulses are enabled with a stationary motor or a motor rotating in the opposite direction of rotation, then optimal acceleration is not guaranteed. The speed actual value is searched for from 0. If the pulses are enabled with the motor rotating, the motor is first braked and accelerated from the openloop controlled speed range to the speed setpoint. The field controller integral component is deleted for voltage limiting. The voltage limiting might be able to exited again. The field controller integral component is not influenced for voltage limiting. However, voltage limiting cannot be automatically exited, as the field generating current is continuously increased. Type KTY84 motor temperature sensor acc. to IEC 134 PTC type motor temperature sensor acc. to IEC 134; from FW 3.00 Parameter numbers are cyclically displayed on the LCD Parameter numbers are not cyclically displayed on the LCD; from FW 3.00
0080H
0000H
0100H
AM
0000H 13 2000H 0000H 15 P090 online 4 0...FFFF hex 8000H
Control word Bit Value 0000H Parameter display, hex format Caution! Parameter setting limits in the hex format are ineffective! Parameter display, decimal or hexadecimal format
0001H
AM/1-11
04.97 12.94 07.94
Table 1-2
Number
Change effective
P051
Setting data
Description
0000H
Field weakening speed and stall torque to the DC link voltage, specified by P061, is inhibited. Field weakening speed and stall torque adaptation to the DC link voltage specified by P061 are enabled (from FW 2.00). Speed controller clock, Standard Speed controller clock, fast When bit 3 is changed, this only becomes effective after saving in the FEPROM and powering the supply down/up; from FW 3.00
0004H
0000H 3 0008H
P153
online
10
1...1 dec
Calculate motor/controller data Parameters are changed during the calculation +1 equivalent circuit diagram data calculation 1 controller data calculation The parameters are automatically reset after calculation.
AM
AM/1-12
1.4
Fig. 1-2
Multimotor operation Parallel operation
M P160, P161, P163, P178 P053, P056 P053, P056 M M M
12.94 07.94
X412
Parameter set changeover Motor changeover
Motor temperature sensing 270
P063, P064, P065, P053 bit 13, from FW 3.00
Setting data
Initial roundingoff Torque limiting
P039, P041, P050 P018
X432
Maximum speed monitoring with BERO
P131, P132 from FW 3.00
Speed setpoint, channel 1 Speed controller P gain, integral action time

P031, P032
X421 56 14
Field P gain, integral action time
P034, P035
P014, P015, P024
current controller P gain

P115, P116
24 8
Rampfct. generator
P016, P017 P029, P174 P195, P196, P197, P198, P199, P203
Analog Speed setpoint, channel 2 Setpoint P014, P019, P025 Fixed setpoint Channel P114, P119 selection Motor. pot. function Max. speed Adaptation
P113
X431
Oscillation
P154, P155, P156, P157, P113 Version 1 P095, P097 Initialization parameters P022
P114
P081
P082
Shutdown without overshoot
Initialization
Overview setting data
P083
Version 2 P095, P097 Initialization parameters
P084
P085 P051, P052, P053, P090, P151, P152 Transfer
P086
Freely enable relay General control parameters
P087
?
P249, P250, P251
E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E7 E8 E9
! Monitor function Relay control thresholds
P021, P023, P027, P047 P018, P036, P158, P159, P160, P161, P162, P163, P164, P174, P175, P178 P219 P153
P088
Transfer
P089
X441 A11 A21

prog. functions Variable relay function
P185, P186, P187, P188, P189, P190, P191, P192, P193, P194 P204, P205 P052
P241
P242
P243
Freely prog. relay
P018, P036, P158, P159, P160, P161, P162, P163, P164, P174, P175, P178 P219
Equivalent circuit diagram Calculation Equivalent circuit diagram data Controller data P166, P167, P168, P169, P170, P171 P153 Optimization P204, P205 Backup data set P052 Optimization Backup data set
P244
P245
A31 A41 A51 A61

P247 ?
P179, P181
P246
X451 A91
! Diagnostic functions Min/max Transient recorder function
P206 to P218
Invert relay function
Calculation Controller data
A92
Analog outputs D P012, P013,
P066, P067, P068 P069, P078, P079
1.4 Overview setting data Induction motor modules (AM)
AM/1-13
X1 X2
Test sockets D P072, P073, P074,
I/f openloop control

P057, P058, P172
P076, P077, P080
AM
1.5 Connections Induction motor modules (AM)
04.97 07.94
1.5
Connections
X432 Input BERO from FW 3.003) Test sockets DAU 3 X1 IR X421 56 14 24 8 663 65 81 E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E7 E8 E9 9 X2 DAU 4 X412 Input, motor temperature sensor from FW 3.00
3)
M
X451 A91 DAU 12) DAU 22)
n1 n22)
M
A92
M
Outputs X441 289 A11 A21 A31 A41 A51 A61 672 673 674 AS1 AS2
Inputs X431 IF RF HSS

2nd Md limit1)
Signals, center contact
AM
X411
TH = 01) Reset1) Fixed set., bit 01) Fixed set., bit 11) Fixed set., bit 21) G. box stage, bit 01) G. box stage, bit 11) G. box stage, bit 21) Enable voltage RS232C Interface
nact = nset1) Md < Mdx1) nact < nmin1) nact < nx1) I2t alarm1)
Rampup ended1)
Ready/fault
Signal. contact Start inhibit
LCD display + X151 P Equipment bus X351
P 600 DC link M 600 Type plate Version Motor terminals U2 V2 W2 PE1 PE2 only for the analog setpoint interface option up to FW 2.x Fig. 1-3
1) 2) 3)
Connections
Freelyprogrammable terminals and relay functions when supplied Function not possible for MLFB (Order No.) 6SN11220BA110AA0 Only for MLFB (Order No.) 6SN11220BA110AA1; for boards with MLFB (Order No.) 6SN11210BA1V0AA0 it is not permissible that this input is assigned
AM/1-14
07.94
2.1 Motor and drive converter data sets Induction motor modules (AM)
Determining and setting the system configuration
Warning The motor could accelerate to inadmissibly high speeds and terminal 64 (NE: Central drive inhibit) and Terminal 65 (controller inhibit) are not effective. Only terminal 63 open (NE: Central pulse inhibit) and terminal 663 open (axisspecific pulse inhibit) are then effective.
2.1
Motor and drive converter data sets
Overview
AM
S initialization S DC link voltage sensing S motor data set S Speed ranges
AM/2-15
12.94 07.94
Initialization
Table 2-1 Initialization Parameter attributes Number Change effective after initialization P051 Setting range Description
P095
1...13 dec
Power module code number Presetting: 7 from FW 3.0 presetting: 31) Enter the power module code number (refer to Section 6.2) Motor code number Presetting: 0 (do not change) Initialization
P096.M P097
after initialization online
0...7 dec 0...1 hex
S S
SEtUP is displayed The selected power section data set is loaded in the drivemachine data memory P000 operating display appears after successful initialization
Sensing the DC link voltage
AM
Table 2-2
DC link voltage sensing Parameter attributes
Number
P051
Setting range
Description
P061
10
0...700 V
Fixed DC link voltage 0 The DC link voltage is sensed via NE and the equipment bus Can be identified at: P061 = 0 Parameter (P006) indicates the DC link voltage value. 1...700 The actual DC link voltage is entered when a monitoring module is used without voltage sensing.
1) Power module with MLFB (Order No.) 6SN112V1AV0VVVA1 is automatically identified with/from FW 3.00. It is then no longer possible to change P095.
AM/2-16
07.94
Motor data set
For special motors, the motor data must be entered. The controllers can then be subsequently optimized using the selfsetting routing according to Section 4.
Table 2-3
Number
P051
Setting range
Description
P158.M P159.M
10 10
0.000...65.000 mH 0.0...6535.5 gm2
Inductance of the series reactor Used for motors with fmax > 150 Hz Moment of inertia, motor and external applicationspecific Total moment of inertia referred to the motor shaft The motor moment of inertia is calculated using P153 = +1 The total moment of inertia is set using P204 =5 and P205 = +1 Additional moment of inertia The parameterized value is internally added to P159.M. It is only necessary to enter into P219.M when the setting range, P159.M, is exceeded. (from FW 2.00) Rated motor output 1) Rated output for S1 duty For forcevent. motors, refer to the following information Rated motor current 1) Rated current for S1 duty Y or configuration Rated motor voltage Rating plate data 1) Y or configuration Rated motor speed 1) Asynchronous speed at rated frequency and rated load nrated < (frated 60 s/min)/p Rated motor frequency 1) frated > nrated p/(60 s/min) Noload motor current equiv. cct. dia val Calculated using P153 = +1 Adjusted using P204 = 3 and P205 = +1 Motor stator resistance, cold Calculated using P153 = +1 equivalent circuit diagram value
P219.M
online
10
0...15 kgm2
P160.M
online
10
0.00...650.00 kW
P161.M
online
10
0.00...650.00 A
P162.M
online
10
0.00...650.00 V
AM
P163.M
online
10
0...65000 RPM
P164.M P166.M
online online
10 10
0...1200.0 Hz 0...Irated pwr. section
P167.M
online
10
0.000...65.000
P168.M
online
10
0.000...65.000
Motor rotor resistance, cold Equivalent circuit diagram value Calculated using P153 = +1 Adjusted using P204 = 6 and P205 = +1 Stator leakage reactance Calculated using P153 = +1 equivalent circuit diagram value
P169.M
online
10
0.000...65.000
P170.M
online
10
0.000...65.000
Rotor leakage reactance equivalent circuit diagram value Calculated using P153 = +1
AM/2-17
03.96 07.94
Table 2-3
Number
P051
Setting range 0.00...650.00
Description
P171.M
10
Main field reactanceEquivalent circuit diagram value Calculated using P153 = +1 Adjusted using P204 = 4 and P205 = +1 Changeover speed, closedloop/openloop control Calculated using P153 = +1 Speed at the start of field weakening Calculated using P153 = +1 For operation from an uncontrolled infeed and FW<2.00, the calculated value must be multiplied by the factor (Vsupply/500V) (corresponds to 0.8 for Vsupply=400V). From FW 2.00 onwards, the closedloop control algorithm is automatically adapted to the DC link voltage (P006). Automatic adaptation can be disabled by resetting bit 2 in P090. Maximum motor speed 1) To optimize the noload current Input nmax(frated60 s/min)/p, otherwise F60 (p=pole pair number) Motor thermal time constant 1) 2) Stall torque speed Calculated using P153 = +1 For operation from an uncontrolled infeed and FW<2.00, the calculated value must be multiplied by the factor (Vsupply/500V)2 (corresponds to 0.64 for Vsupply=400V). From FW 2.00 onwards, the closedloop control algorithm is automatically adapted to the DC link voltage (P006). Automatic adaptation can be disabled by resetting bit 2 in P090. Power factor cos 1) Initial roundingoff For motors with deepbar squirrelcage rotors: Increase parameter to approx. 30 ms Inverter clock frequency The current controller dynamic performance is improved by increasing the clock frequency, however, it reduces the permissible continuous current load capability. The clock frequency, especially for highspeed motors, should be selected as high as possible but the power reduction should be maintained. If the clock frequency is changed, then the current controller must be reoptimized.
P172.M
online
10
0...32000 RPM
P173.M
online
10
0...32000 RPM
P174.M
online
10
0...32000 RPM
P175.M P176.M
online online
10 10
0.0...500.0 min 0...32000 RPM
AM
P178.M P018.M
online online
10 10
0.000...1.000 4.00...100.00 ms
P036.M
online
10
0...7 hex
1) Manufacturers data according to VDE 0530, Part 1 2) Only when the motor temperature simulation function for relay function 5 is used (I2t alarm)
AM/2-18
07.94
Parameter attributes Number Change effective online P051 Setting range Description
P153
10
1...1 dec
Calculation, equivalent circuit diagram data of the actual motor +1 entered for pulse inhibit, term. 63 or term. 663. The calculations for the entered special motor are started. Calculation, controller data of the actual motor 1 entry for pulse inhibit, term. 63 or term. 663. The calculations for the entered special motor are started.
P153
online
10
1...1 dec
For highspeed motors, increase the speed limiting P029 = 6000 RPM to maximum speed.
Note The motor configuration should be selected, so that neither the required terminal voltage exceeds the maximum converter output voltage, nor that the induction motor module is operated with Irated motor < 0.1 Icont. module (refer to examples 1 and 2).
Example 1 If a motor, with Vrated 230 V D/400 V Y is operated from an uncontrolled infeed module in a Y circuit configuration, then the motor does not have the same output as when operated from an uncontrolled I/R module with VDC link = 600V / 625 V from a 400 V supply due to the reduced speed at the start of field weakening (P173) and the lower stall torque speed (P176). If the motor is changedover to the delta configuration, then this can achieve the full rated output when connected to a converter dimensioned for Iratedn motor . Example 2 If a motor is to be operated at rated current in a Y circuit configuration IratedY motor < 0.1 Icont. module , this can be adapted to the induction motor module using the n circuit, if the following is valid: Iratedn motor w 0.1 Icont. module
AM
AM/2-19
07.94
Note If only S6duty values are specified in the rating plate data, then these should be converted to S1duty for parameterization, and the limits increased after optimization. For forcecooled motors, the rating plate data for parameterization should be converted to data for S1duty of a motor with natural air cooling having the same size, and the limits increased after optimization.
Conversion, rating plate data
S determine the noload current I0 , refer to Section 4 S determine the rated current for S1 duty: Irated S1 = (2...2.5) I0 S determine the rated output for S1 duty: Prated S1 = Prated S6 S startup using S1 values and optimize with
limits 100 % Irated
S1 I rated
S increase the limits for S6 duty and for forceventilated operation.
AM
AM/2-20
07.94
Speed ranges
Table 2-4 Speed ranges Parameter attributes Number Change effective online P051 Setting range Description
P172.M
10
0...32000 RPM
Changeover speed, closedloop/openloop control Start of the closedloop controlled speed range Above this speed and hysteresis, the speed is controlled according to the calculated speed actual value. Speed at the start of field weakening Start of the field weakening range The converter output voltage and frequency are no longer changed in proportion to one another above this speed. Stall torque speed Start of derating The output in fieldweakening operation is reduced above this speed in order to prevent the motor stalling. output characteristic voltage characteristic flux characteristic torque characteristic changeover speed, open/ closedloop control nrated rated speed nstall stall torque speed nFS speed at the start of field weakening nmax max.motor speed P U Y M nch
P173.M
online
10
0...32000 RPM
P176.M
online
10
0...65535 RPM
P FP P rated U
rated
FM Mrated
AM
0 nch
F nrated FP M
nFS
nstall
nmax
Motor speed n
The torque and output limits can be modified with factor FM (parameters P039, P041 ) or FP (P060). The following speed ranges are obtained:
S S S S S
0 |n| nch nch |n| nrated FP/FM nrated FP/FM < |n| nstall |n| > nFS nstall < |n| < nmax
openloop controlled speed range constant torque range constant output range fieldweakening range stall power range, maximum output voltage range
AM/2-21
2.2 Standard applications Induction motor modules (AM)
12.94 07.94
2.2
2.2.1
Table 2-5
Standard applications
Operating display
The actual drive converter operating status is displayed in P000 and P100.
Operating display Display
Function group Motor number

motor 1 is selected
Relay function
freelyprog. relay function 1 terminal A11 P241 nact = nset1) freelyprog. relay function 2 terminal A21 P242 |Md| < Mdx1) freelyprog. relay function 3 terminal A31 P243 |nact| < nmin1)
Operating mode
drive not enabled: Progress condition, refer to the converter status column all enable signals present: Openloop or closedloop controlled operation
Equipment status
pulse enable at the NE module missing (T.63/T.48) axisspecific pulse enable missing (T.663)
Setpoint source
analog setp. ch. 1 P113=1 ch. 2 P113=2 ch. 1+2 P113=3 analog setp.+ fixed setpoint ch. 1 + freely prog. terminal function 17, 18, 19, 24 P113=9 zero setp. P113=0 P113=7 P113=8
Gearbox stage
gearbox stage 1 is selected gearbox stage 2 is selected
motor 2 is selected
motor 3 is selected
motor 4 is selected
controller enable missing at the NE module (T.64) and/or controller enable missing at the IM module (T.65) RFG enable missing (t.81)
gearbox stage 3 is selected
...
fixed setp. 1...7
AM
Motor selection 1...4 Selected via freelyprogrammable terminal functions P081...P089 =20, 21
freelyprog. relay function 4 terminal A41 P244 |nist| < nx1)
...
fixed setp. 8...15
freelyprog. relay function 5 terminal A51 P245 I2t alarm1) freelyprog. relay function 6 terminal A61 P246 rampup ended1) ready/ fault terminals 672 to 674 P053 ready1) The segment is lit, if the appropriate relay has pulledin.
setpoint enable missing (select terminal, fct. No. 16)
Selec. via freely progr. term. fct. P081...P089 =17, 18, 19, 24 speed setting with P114.1...7,f P119.1...8 setpoint from the mot.. pot. fct. P113=6 P114.8 speed or P081.P089=14, 15 setp. from oscillation gen. P113=4 or P081...P089=2 P154, P155 speeds P156, P157 times
Operating mode display for enabled motor: motor operation
generator operation
Speed controller clock, fast Clock is active
setp. from self opt. SW P204=1...6 P205=1
Gearbox stages 1...8 selected via freelyprogrammable terminal function P081...P089 =9, 10, 11
1) As supplied
AM/2-22
07.94
2.2.2 Firmware version Induction motor modules (AM)
2.2.2
Table 2-6
Firmware version
Firmware version
Parameter attributes Number Change effective P051 Setting range Description
(P099)
0.00...99.99
Firmware release Indicates the release of the firmware which has been loaded.
2.2.3
Setting parameters for standard applications
Overview
S speed settings S maximum speed monitoring via BERO S torque limits S motor temperature monitoring S motor temperature simulation S reciprocation
Speed setting value
Table 2-7 speed settings Parameter attributes Number Change effective online P051 Setting range Description
AM
P022.M
10
2...16000 RPM
Shutdown speed, pulse cancellation The drive is switched into a nocurrent state when the controller is inhibited and the shutdown speed is fallen below (the drive is shutdown without overshoot). Speed limiting The actual motor speed is limited to the limit of the current gearbox stage. Selected using freelyprogrammable terminal function 9, 10, 11.
P029.G
online
10
0...32000 RPM
Maximum speed monitoring via BERO
A BERO switch can be connected via X432 to monitor the maximum speed. When the threshold is exceeded, the pulses are canceled and fault message F90 is output. FW 3
AM/2-23
2.2.3 Setting parameters for standard application Induction motor modules (AM)
04.97 07.94
Cable interruption monitoring
If BERO pulses are not received for a calculated speed greater than 1200 RPM/ pulse number, then it can be assumed that the cable is interrupted. F90 is also output.
Table 2-8 Parameter attributes Number Change effective online online P051 Setting range Description
P131.M P132.M
10 10
0...10 1 RPM 0...65535 RPM
Pulse number, BERO speed monitoring The speed monitoring is active for a value of zero. Shutdown threshold, BERO speed monitoring
Torque limits
Table 2-9
Torque limits Parameter attributes
Number
P051
Setting range
Description
P039.G
10
0...399 %
1st torque limit The torque is limited to the set percentage of the rated torque of the actual motor. 2nd torque limit The torque is limited to the set percentage of the rated torque of the actual motor. The 2nd torque limit is selected using a freelyprogrammable terminal with terminal function 1 and speed greater than P050, changeover speed Md1 to Md2
P041.G
online
10
0...399 %
AM
Motor temperature monitoring
A motor temperature sensor can be connected at X412. (from FW 3.00)
Temperature sensor types

Can be selected between S KTY84: The measured resistance is converted into a temperature. The maximum permissible temperature can be parameterized. S PTC: Resistance values which are measured to be less than 1330 Ohms are considered to be permissible, resistance values greater than 1330 Ohms should be interpreted as an overtemperature condition.
Alarm and shutdown characteristics
S After approx. 1s: Relay alarm, motor overtemperature

after a time in P065: Pulse cancellation and error message F14
AM/2-24
07.94
Sensor cable interrupted and shortcircuit
S KTY84: Temperatures which are measured below approx. 0 degrees C or S

Table 2-10 Parameter attributes Number Change effective online P051 Setting range Description
above approx. 200 degrees C cause pulses to be canceled and a fault message, F19 PTC: Interrupted sensor cable and shortcircuit are not identified.
P053.M
10
0...FFFFhex
Control word Bit value 13 0000H KTY84 motor temperature sensor 2000H PTC motor temperature sensor Max. motor temperature only effective for KTY84. The shutdown threshold cannot be parameterized for PTC. Fixed temperature The motor temperature monitoring is activated by entering the value zero. Timer stage, motor temperature alarm
P063.M
online
10
0...170 degrees C
P064.M
online
10
0...170 degrees C
P065.M
online
10
0...600 s
Motor temperature simulation

Table 2-11 Motor temperature simulation Parameter attributes Number Change effective online P051 Setting range Description
AM
P175.M
10
0.0...500 min
Thermal motor time constant For freelyprogrammable relay function 5 I2t monitoring
Note A temperature model is calculated for every motor parameter set. However, quantities such as fan effect and air intake temperature cannot be taken into account. Thus, it is preferable if the temperature is monitored using a motor temperature sensor.
AM/2-25
07.94
Oscillation mode
Table 2-12 Reciprocation Parameter attributes Number Change effective online online online online P051 Setting range Description
P154 P155 P156 P157
10 10 10 10
32000...32000 RPM 32000...32000 RPM 0.002...60 s 0.002...60 s
Oscillation setpoint 1 Oscillation setpoint 2 Oscillation interval time 1 Oscillation interval time 2 Selected using a freelyprogrammable terminal function 2 or P113=4
Speed [RPM] P154
P155 P156 P157 Time [s]
AM
AM/2-26
07.94
2.3 Multimotor operation Induction motor modules (AM)
2.3
Multimotor operation
The following applications can be combined with one another:
S parallel operation S parameter set changeover S motor changeover

Motor selection
Table 2-13 Motor selection Parameter attributes Number Change effective online P051 Setting range Description
P056
10
0...4
Motor selection The actual motor is selected 0 selected via freelyprogrammable terminal function 20, 21. 1...4 motor 1...4 active
Note If P053, bit 1 = 0, then changeover is only realized after the pulses have been canceled.
AM
2.3.1
Parallel operation
Several motors can be operated simultaneously from one induction motor module. The motors are supplied with the same voltage and frequency as they are fed in parallel. Thus, the motors must have the same voltagefrequency characteristic, i. e., the ratios of rated voltage to rated frequency of the individual motors must be the same. If different motor types are used, an output ratio of 1 : 10 should not be exceeded. If the motors, connected in parallel, have the same pole pair number, then they rotate at approximately the same speed.
Warning With different loads, the speeds differ by the slip speed differences, i. e., an individual motor can have a different speed than the calculated speed of the complete system, and can exceed a set speed limit.
AM/2-27
2.3.1 Parallel operation Induction motor modules (AM)
07.94
The tendency to stall is higher in parallel operation than in singlemotor operation. In order to be able to correct load surges, it is recommended that the current limit P059 is set to 150 % of the total current. If a steadystate rated torque is required in the lower speed range, P057 should also be increased (current in the openloop controlled range). The induction motor module should be dimensioned for this current rating and it should be ensured that the motors are adequately cooled. In parallel operation, the total current can only be sensed, which is subdivided between the individual motors, depending on the load. Thus, these should be externally and individually thermally monitored. If a monitoring function responds, it is not permissible that the power cables are interrupted before pulse cancellation. For highspeed special motors (fmax > 150 Hz), it is recommended that a reactor is switched between the induction motor module and the motor group.
Pulse enable
>
T. 663
SIMODRIVE 611A analog system, induction motor module
U2 V2 W2
1)
AM
M1 3~ Motor 1 M2 3~ Motor 2 M3 3~ Motor 3 M8 3 Motor 8
1) Only required for special highspeed motors Fig. 2-1 Parallel operation from the SIMODRIVE 611A analog system, induction motor module
AM/2-28
03.96 07.94
The motor data must be entered as follows for parallel operation:

Table 2-14 Parallel operation Parameter attributes Number Change effective online online P051 Setting range Description
P158.M P160.M
10 10
0.000...65.000 mH 0.00...650.00 kW
Series reactor inductance Used for motors with fmax > 150 Hz. Rated motor output 1) Sum of the rated outputs for S1 duty Prated i = Prated total Rated motor current 1) Sum of the rated currents for S1 duty Irated i Circuit configuration, Y or Rated motor voltage 1) Rated voltage of the common V/f characteristic Circuit configuration, Y or Rated motor speed 1) Outputweighted average value of the rated speed Prated i Prated total
P161.M
online
10
0.00...650.00 A
P162.M
online
10
0.00...650.00 V
P163.M
online
10
0...65000 RPM
. nrated i
Asynchronous speed at rated frequency and rated load nrated < (frated 60 s/min)/p P164.M online 10 0...1200.0 Hz Rated motor frequency 1) Rated frequency of the common V/f characteristic frated > nrated p/(60 s/min) Max. motor speed manufacturers data Lowest max. speed of the motor group reduced by the maximum slip difference. To optimize the noload current, enter nmax(frated60 s/min)/p, otherwise F60 (p=pole pair number) Power factor cos 1) Currentweighted average power factor value Irated i Irated total P018.M online 10 4.0...100.00 ms
P174.M
online
10
0...32000 RPM
AM
P178.M
online
10
0.000...1.000
cos i
Initial roundingoff applicationspecific For motors with deepbar squirrelcage rotors: Increase parameter to approx. 30 ms Inverter clock frequency The current controller dynamic performance is improved when the switching frequency is increased, however the permissible continuous current load capability is reduced. The switching frequency should be selected as high as possible, especially for highspeed motors, but still maintaining the specified derating. The current controller must be reoptimized if the switching frequency is changed.
P036.M
online
10
0...7 hex
1) Manufacturers data according to VDE 0530, Part 1
AM/2-29
07.94
P159.M
10
0.0...6535.5 gm2
Motor and external moment of inertia applicationspecific Total moment of inertia referred to the motor shaft Calculation, motor moment of inertia using P153 = +1 Adjustment, total moment of inertia using P204 = 5 and P205 = +1 Additional moment of inertia The parameterized value is internally added to P159.M. It is only necessary to enter P219.M if the setting range of P159.M is exceeded. Motor noload current equivalent circuit diagram value Calculated using P153 = +1 Adjusted using P204 = 3 and P205 = +1 Motor stator resistance, cold equivalent circuit diagram value Calculated using P153 = +1 Motor rotor resistance, cold equivalent circuit diagram value Calculated using P153 = +1 Adjusted using P204 = 6 and P205 = +1 Stator leakage reactance equivalent circuit diagram value Calculated using P153 = +1 Rotor leakage reactance equivalent circuit diagram value Calculated using P153 = +1 Main field reactance equivalent circuit diagram value Calculated using P153 = +1 Adjusted using P204 = 4 and P 205 = +1 Thermal motor time constant manufacturers data Lowest time constant of the motor group External individual monitoring is recommended. refer to Section 2.2.3
P219.M
online
10
0...15 kgm2
P166.M
online
10
0...Irated pwr. section
P167.M
online
10
0.000...65.000
P168.M
online
10
0.000...65.000
P169.M
online
10
0.000...65.000
P170.M
online
10
0.000...65.000
AM
P171.M online 10 0.00...650.00
P175.M
online
10
0.0...500.0 min
P172.M
online
10
0...32000 RPM
Changeover speed, open/closedloop control Calculated using P153 = +1
AM/2-30
12.94 07.94
P173.M
10
0...32000 RPM
Speed at the start of field weakening Calculated using P153 = +1 For operation from an uncontrolled infeed and FW<2.00, the calculated value must be multiplied by the factor (Vsupply/500V) (corresponds to 0.8 for Vsupply=400V). From FW 2.00 onwards, the closedloop control algorithm is automatically adapted to the DC link voltage (P006). The automatic adaptation can be disabled by resetting bit 2 in P090. Stall torque speed Calculated using P153 = +1 For operation from an uncontrolled infeed and FW<2.00, the calculated value must be multiplied by the factor (Vsupply/500V)2 (corresponds to 0.64 for Vsupply=400V). From FW 2.00 onwards, the closedloop control algorithm is automatically adapted to the DC link voltage (P006). Automatic adaptation can be disabled by resetting bit 2 in P090.
P176.M
online
10
0...32000 RPM
AM
AM/2-31
2.3.2 Parameter set changeover Induction motor modules (AM)
07.94
2.3.2
Parameter set changeover

The induction motor module allows four complete motor data sets to be simultaneously setup. The actual data set can be selected via freelyprogrammable terminals (refer to Section 3.3.2) or via parameter P056. If various parameter sets have to be loaded in the induction motor module, this function can be used for parameter set changeover. The currently valid motor data set is displayed in the first position at the left in the operating display (P000, P100). If bit 1 = 1 in parameter P053, the motor data sets are changedover, even when the pulses are enabled. This can be used to adapt motor and controller data.
2.3.3
Motor changeover
The induction motor module allows four complete motor data sets to be simultaneously setup. The current data set can be selected via freelyprogrammable terminals (refer to Section 3.2.2) or via parameter P056. There are freelyprogrammable relay functions for the four motor data sets (refer to Section 3.3.1), which indicate which data set is active. If various motors are to be operated from the induction motor module, one after another, then this function can be used for motor changeover. In this case, bit 1 should be set to 0 in parameter P053. Thus, after a motor changeover request, the motor data are first changedover, when the induction motor module pulses are inhibited (refer to Section 1.3). The user can decide which of the enable terminals is used for pulse inhibit. The pulse inhibit is latchedin for approx. 20 ms during the changeover operation. This latch is then canceled and the relay motor ... active of the newly loaded motor, pullsin. This relay signal can be used to control a contactor for motor changeover. The currently valid motor data set is displayed in the first position at the left in the operating display (P000, P100). A recommended circuit for the contactor control to changeover a motor is shown in the following diagram. In this case, the freelyprogrammable terminal Em is assigned terminal function 20 motor selection bit 0 and En with terminal function 21 motor selection bit 1 and the freelyprogrammable relay outputs Aw, Ax, Ay, Az, with relay functions 11, 12, 13, 14 motor 1, 2, 3, 4 active. The mutual relay interlocking is implemented using the induction motor module software, but the recommended contactor interlocking guarantees, that not more than one motor is connected to the converter even if parameterization errors have been made.
AM
AM/2-32
07.94
2.3.3 Motor changeover Induction motor modules (AM)
Pulse enable
K1 K2 K3 K4
SIMODRIVE 611 analog system IM module T. 663 P053 bit 1 = 0 Relay outputs Aw Ax Ay Az U2 V2 W2
1)
Motor selection 1 0 Bit 0 Bit 1 0
2 1 0
Select terminal input 3 4 Em 0 1 1 1 En
K1H
K2H
K3H
K4H
K1
K2
K3
K4
K1H M1 3 K2 K3 K4 Motor 1
K2H M2 3 K1 K3 K4 Motor 2
K3H M3 3
K4H M4 3
K1 K2 K4
K1 K2 K3
Motor 3
Motor 4
AM
1)
Only required for special highspeed motors
Fig. 2-2
Motor changeover
AM/2-33
2.4 Operating motors at maximum speeds > 32000 RPM Induction motor modules (AM)
12.94 07.94
2.4
Operating motors at maximum speeds > 32000 RPM

Warning
All parameters which physically represent a speed with the units RPM, as well Pulse number P131 as the BERO pulse number P131, are entered or displayed decreased by a factor as follows:
Motor speed 32000...64000 RPM > 64000 RPM Factor 1/2 1/3
Parameter settings
In order to be able to operate motors with a maximum motor speed > 32000 RPM, settings must be made according to Table 213.
AM
AM/2-34
03.96 07.94
2.4 Operating motors at maximum speeds > 32000 RPM Induction motor modules (AM)
P163.M
10
0...64000 RPM
Rated motor speed 1) Asynchronous speed at rated frequency and rated load nrated < (frated 60 s/min)/p motor speed 32000...64000 RPM > 64000 RPM Input Rated motor speed / 2 Rated motor speed / 3
P174.M
online
10
0...64000 RPM
Max. motor speed 1) motor speed 32000...64000 RPM > 64000 RPM Input Max. motor speed / 2 Max. motor speed / 3
P153
online
10
1 ... 1 dec
Calculating the equivalent circuit diagram data of the current motor +1 input for pulse inhibit, terminal 63 or terminal 663 The calculations for the entered special motor are started. The following equivalent circuit diagram data are calculated: motor speed 32000...64000 RPM > 64000 RPM Equivalent circuit diagram data P159: Motor and external moment of inertia D 4 P159: Motor and external moment of inertia D 9
P153
online
10
1 ... 1 dec
Calculating the controller data of the current motor 1 input for pulse inhibit, terminal 63 or terminal 663 The calculations for the entered special motor are started. The following controller data are calculated: motor speed 32000...64000 RPM Controller data P114: Speed for the max. useful motor speed D 1/2 P029: Speed limiting D 1/2 P172: Changeover speed, open/closedloop control D 1/2 P173:Speed at start of field weakening D 1/2 P176: Stall torque speed D 1/2 P114: Speed for max. motor useful speed D 1/3 P029: Speed limiting D 1/3 P172: Changeover speed, open/closedloop control D 1/3 P173: Speed at start of field weakening D 1/3 P176: Stall torque speed D 1/3
AM
> 64000 RPM
If speed setting values with units of RPM are manually entered, all values must be multiplied by factors 1/2 or 1/3.
1)
Manufacturers data according to VDE 0530, Part 1
AM/2-35
2.5 Monitor function Induction motor modules (AM)
07.94
2.5
Monitor function
Address contents (data in the RAM area) of the induction motor module can be read via parameters P249 to P251.
Note A list of important measurement quantities (RAM variables) and their addresses are provided in the Appendix (Section 6.5).
Table 2-16
Monitor function Parameter attributes
Number
P051
Setting range
Description
P249 P250 (P251)
10 10
0...FFFF hex 0...FFFF hex 0...FFFF hex
Segment, memory location monitor Segment address of a RAM location Address, memory location monitor Offset address of a RAM location Value display memory location, monitor Contents of a RAM location
AM
AM/2-36
12.94 07.94
3.1 Speed setpoint interfaces Induction motor modules (AM)
Parameterization of the drive converter interfaces

3.1 Speed setpoint interfaces
Overview
S speed setpoint channel selection S normalization, analog speed setpoint S fixed setpoints/motorized potentiometer setpoint S setpoint priority
Speed setpoint channel selection
Table 3-1 Speed setpoint channel selection Parameter attributes Number Change effective online P051 Setting range Description
AM
P113
0...9 hex
Channel selection, speed setpoint 0H: 1H: 2H: 3H: 4H: digital setpoint 0 analog setpoint, channel 1, terminal 56/14 analog setpoint, channel 2, terminal 24/8 analog setpoint, sum of channel 1 + channel 2, terminal 56/14 + terminal 24/8 digital setpoint from the oscillation generator
6H: digital setpoint from the electronic motorized potentiometer 9H: sum of the analog setpoint + fixed setpoint, channel 1 + fixed setpoint from the freely programmable terminal function 17, 18, 19, 24
(10)H: digital setpoint; is internally input from the firmware during selfoptimization
AM/3-37
12.94 07.94
Normalization, analog speed setpoint

P014.M
32000...32000 RPM
Speed for maximum motor useful speed Speed, which should be reached, at the analog input voltage in P024 (channel 1 active) and in P025 (channel 2 active). P114 >0 = clockwise phase sequence for a positive speed setpoint P114 < 0 = counter clockwise phase sequence for a positive speed setpoint
P024 P015
online online
4 4
2...10 V E000...2000 hex
Normalization, setpoint channel 1 Analog speed setpoint voltage for P014 Offset correction, setpoint channel 1 E. g. positive correction value:002FH negative correction value: FF00H Normalization, setpoint channel 2 Analog speed setpoint voltage for P014 Offset correction, setpoint channel 2 E. g. positive correction value:002FH negative correction value: FF00H
P025 P019
online online
4 4
2...10 V E000...2000 hex
AM
Fixed setpoints, motorized potentiometer setpoint

P114.F
32000...32000 RPM
Fixed setpoint 1 to 7 Adjustable speed setpoint Selected via freelyprogrammable terminal function 17, 18, 19 (refer to Section 3.2.2). Fixed setpoint 8 to 15 Selectable speed setpoint Selected via freelyprogrammable terminal function 17, 18, 19, 24 (refer to Section 3.2.2) from FW 2.00 Motorized potentiometer setpoint Adjustable speed setpoint Set via freelyprogrammable terminal function 14, 15 (refer to Section 3.2.2).
P119.F
online
32000...32000 RPM
P114.8
online
32000...32000 RPM
AM/3-38
04.97 12.94 07.94
Setpoint priority
Table 3-4 Priority Setpoint Setpoint source Selectable using High Imot = 0 n=0 n=0 n=0 n nmin n Dn n = +n/n n = P114.8 n1 = P154 n2 = P155 n1 = P114.1 to n7 = P114.7 n8 = P119.1 to n15 = P119.8 Low Standard setpoint source T63 or T663 T81 T64 or T65 T.fct. 16 P030 P054 P055 T.fct. 12 P113 = 6 T.fct. 2 T.fct. 17 T.fct. 18 T.fct. 19 T.fct. 24 Open Open Open Open Value entry Value entry Act ivated Value entry Con trolled Con trolled Desig. Pulse enable inhibited Rampfunction generator fast stop Controller enable inhibited Setpoint enable inhibited Min. steadystate speed Range suppression Cw/ccw phase sequence Mot. pot. function oscillation Fixed setpoint Effect Motor coasts down in a nocurrent condition Braking without rampdown time, pulse enable or pulse inhibit Braking with rampdown time, pulse inhibit Braking with rampdown time, pulse enable Minimum speed, also for lower setpoint, lower priority No steadystate operation in the suppressed speed range Only one direction of rotation possible Increase/decrease setpoint reciprocation Selected fixed speed
AM
P113 Value entry Standard setpoint Parameterized standard setpoint
AM/3-39
3.2.1 Permanentlywired terminal functions Induction motor modules (AM)
07.94
3.2
3.2.1
Input terminals
Permanentlywired terminal functions
Warning When the motor pulses are canceled, there is no information on the motor speed. The calculated speed actual value is then set to 0. Thus, all of the speed actual value signals, and relay signals, which monitor the speed (|nact| < nmin, rampup ended, nact < nx, |nact| = nset) no longer provide any information if the motor pulses have been canceled. The motor pulses can be canceled by removing the enable signals or with fault signals.
Warning If a drive is shutdown using a rampfunction generator fast stop (terminal 81 open), and is kept at zero speed for a longer time with the inverter enabled, then adequate motor cooling must be ensured, as a current is impressed in the motor which is approximately the rated current (percentage in P057). Caution for selfventilated motors.
Table 3-5 Terminal function Description The inverter enable (motor gating) is realized, if terminal 663 (axisspecific pulse enable) and terminal 65 (controller enable) are at the enable voltage potential. If terminal 663 (axisspecific pulse enable) is disconnected/disabled while the motor is still rotating, the inverter is inhibited after 20 ms, and the motor coasts down in a nocurrent condition. If terminal 65 (controller enable) is disconnected/disabled while the motor is still rotating, the drive brakes along the braking ramp. When the absolute value of the nmin threshold (P022) is fallen below, the inverter is inhibited and the motor is shutdown without any overshoot. If terminal 81 (rampfunction generator fast stop) is energized, the speed setpoint is enabled. If the input is opencircuit, a digital setpoint of zero is entered. If terminal 81 is disconnected/disabled while the motor is still rotating, the motor brakes without the rampfunction generator along the effective limiting characteristic (current limiting P057...P059, torque limiting P039, P041, power limiting P060). Once zero speed has been reached, the current from P057 is still impressed. If bit 2 is set in P053, after the speed in P022 has been fallen below, the pulses are inhibited, and the motor is switched to a nocurrent condition. Terminal number
AM
Axisspecific pulse enable
663
Controller enable
65
Ramp function generator fast stop
81
Note To start a motor, the enable signals must be provided step by step in the sequence of their priority (refer to Table 3-5).
AM/3-40
12.94 07.94
3.2.2 Freelyprogrammable terminal functions Induction motor modules (AM)
3.2.2
Freelyprogrammable terminal functions
Warning It is only permissible to program terminal function parameters P081 to P089 when the pulses are canceled (terminal 63 or terminal 663 open).
Overview
S terminal function assignment S Terminal functions

Terminal function assignment
Table 3-6 Terminal function assignment Parameter attributes Number Change effective online P051 Setting range Description
P081 to P089
1...24 dec
Terminal function assignment E1 to E9 The assignment of functions 1 to 24 to terminals E1 to E9 is realized by entering the function number. The factory setting can be taken from the following table.
AM
AM/3-41
3.2.2 Freelyprogrammable terminal functions Induction motor modules (AM)
04.97 03.96 07.94
Terminal functions
Table 3-7 Terminal function 2nd torque limit Oscillation Reset fault memory (R) fault acknowledgment Rampup time = 0 Gearbox stage Terminal functions
Description
Fct . No.
1 2 3
Input terminals, as supplied

E1 (P081)
If this function is selected, the 2nd torque limit in P041 becomes active, if the changeover speed from P050 is exceeded. If this function is selected, the oscillation generator speed setpoint from P154 to P157 becomes active. If this function is selected, a fault message is acknowledged when the controller is inhibited (terminal 65 or terminal 663 opencircuit).
E1 (P081)
If this function is selected, the internal rampfunction generator is bypassed.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
E1 (P081)
Bit 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Bit 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 Bit 2 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 Clockwise/ counter clockwise Rampfunction generator 2 Increase setpoint
Using this terminal, a total of 8 binarycoded parameter t sets t can be b selected l t d for f setpoint set oint normalization, normalization s speed eed monitoring, monitoring controller setting, g, torque limiting and torquemonitoring.
9 10 11 12
E1 (P081) E1 (P081) E1 (P081)
If this function is activated, only positive setpoints are permitted, negative setpoints result in speed n=0. If the appropriate terminal is energized, only a counterclockwise rotating field, otherwise a clockwise rotating field is output. If this function is selected, the 2nd parameter set P042 and P043 of the internal rampfunction generator is activated. Motorized potentiometer function P113=6 If one of these terminals is energized, the digital speed setpoint P114.8 of the t i d potentiometer t ti t f ti i d or d d corresponding di t motorized function is i increased decreased to the rampup and rampdown times of rampfunction g generator 2 ( (exception, , TH = 0). If both are energized simultaneously, the setpoint is changed towards 0. If this function is activated, then the appropriate terminal must also be energized in order to move the drive. If the terminal is opened (deenergized), the drive brakes with the appropriate deceleration time, and remains at standstill, but with current flowing through it.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
13 14
AM
Decrease setpoint Setpoint enable
15 16
Fixed setpoint selection
Bit 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Bit 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 Bit 2 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 Bit 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 Motor selection

1 2 3 4
0 1 0 1
1 1 0 1
0 0 1 1
1 0 1 1
0 1 1 1
1 1 1 1
A total of 15 binary coded fixed values P114.1 to P114.7 and dP P119.1 to P119.8 can be selected using these terminals. If all of these terminals remain opencircuit, the , defined in setpoint, P113, remains valid.
17 18 19 24
E1 (P081) E1 (P081) E1 (P081)
Bit 0 0 1 0 1 Bit 1 0 0 1 1
A total t t l of f 4 binarycoded bi d d motor t data d t sets, t motor t 1 to t motor 4 can be selected using these terminals.
20 21
AM/3-42
07.94
3.3 Output terminals Induction motor modules (AM)
3.3
Output terminals
Warning When the motor pulses are canceled, there is no information on the motor speed. The calculated speed actual value is then set to 0. Thus, all of the speed actual value signals, and relay signals, which monitor the speed (|nact| < nmin, rampup ended, nact < nx, |nact| = nset) no longer provide any information if the motor pulses have been canceled. The motor pulses can be canceled by removing the enable signals or with fault signals.
Caution All relays dropout when the electronics power supply fails or is shutdown.
3.3.1
Permanentlywired relay functions

Table 3-8 Terminal function Permanentlywired relay functions Description The relay function can be toggled using P053: Bit Ready/no axisspecific fault Value 0000H 0 0001H Checkback signal, start inhibit The relay pullsin, if no fault is present, and the pulses and controller are enabled. The relay pullsin, if there is no fault present. 672 673 674 Terminal number
AM
The relay (NC contact) pullsin, if the enable voltage is connected to terminal 663, axisspecific pulse enable.
AS1 AS2
AM/3-43
3.3.2 Freelyprogrammable relay functions Induction motor modules (AM)
04.97 07.94
3.3.2
Freelyprogrammable relay functions
Warning It is only permissible to program the relays (P241 to 247) when the pulses are inhibited (terminal 63 or 663 open).
Overview
S Assignment of the signals/messages S Relay functions S Signals which can be parameterized S Control word, signals
Note The relay signals are updated with 20ms for the standard speed controller clock. For a fast speed controller clock with 10ms (refer to P090, bit 3, FW 3.00).
AM
Assignment of the signals/messages

Table 3-9 Assignment of the signals/messages Parameter attributes Number Change effective online P051 Setting range Description
P241 to P246
1...20 dec
Programmable messages 1 to 6 Functions 1 to 20 are assigned to relay outputs A11 to A61 by entering the function number. The factory setting can be taken from the following table.
AM/3-44
04.97 07.94
Relay functions
Table 3-10 Relay functions Description The relay pullsin, if the calculated speed falls below the current value set in P021.1 to P021.8. The relay pullsin if, after the setpoint jump, the calculated speed actual value enters the actual tolerance bandwidth around the new setpoint, and has remained within this tolerance bandwidth for at least 200 ms. If the tolerance bandwidth is exited before the 200ms has expired, the acceleration ended relay remains inactive. The tolerance bandwidth is set via P027.1 to P027.8. The signal is interlocked (latched) in the activated setting, until the speed setpoint changes. If the tolerance bandwidth is exited after 200 ms, the signal remains active, unless, the setpoint has, in the meantime, changed. The relay does not dropout as a result of speed fluctuations due to load changes. The relay pullsin, if the torque falls below the actual limit value. The limit value is set via P047.1 to P047.8. If the relay nact=nset dropsout during speed setpoint changes, the |Md|< Mdx relay can dropout only 800ms after the relay nact =nset has pulledin again. The relay pullsin if the speed falls below the nx threshold. The setting nx is realized via P023.1 to P023.8. The relay dropsout, if the actual thermal motor model is overloaded. The thermal time constant setting for each motor is separately realized in P175.1 to P175.4. The user is responsible in responding to this alarm. The function of the fan and air intake temperature are not taken into account. Thus, it is preferable if a temperature sensor is evaluated. The relay dropsout, if the main heatsink temperature monitoring responds. If the overtemperature condition remains, the drive converter shuts down after approx. 20 s with the fault message F15. Refer to the description of the variable relay functions. Setting via P185 to P189 and via P190 to P194. Reserved Reserved Motor 1 active Motor 2 active Motor 3 active Motor 4 active One of these relays pullsin if the appropriate motor data set is active. Using this rela relay function, f nction the e external ternal contactor can be controlled for motor changechange over. It is recommended that the contactor pulse enable are mutually interlocked interlocked. 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 16 Funct. No. 1 2 Relay output, as supplied A31 (P243) A61 (P246)
Relay function |nact|< nmin Rampup completed
|Md|< Mdx
A21 (P242)
|nact|< nx I2talarm
4 5
A41 (P244) A51 (P245)
AM
6
Drive converter overtemperature alarm Variable relay function 1 Variable relay function 2
Motor The relay dropsout when the motor temperature is too high. If the fault condiovertemperature, tion remains, the drive converter shuts down after the time, set in P065, with alarm the fault message F14. From FW 3.00 nact =nset The relay pullsin, if the calculated speed actual value enters the tolerance bandwidth around the setpoint before the rampfunction generator and has remained in this tolerance bandwidth for at least 200 ms. The tolerance bandwidth is set using P027.1 to P027.8 . If the tolerance bandwidth is exited, the relay nact =nset immediately drops out. The relay dropsout as a result of speed fluctuations due to load changes.
20
A11 (P241)
AM/3-45
07.94
Messages which can be parameterized

Table 3-11 Signals which can be parameterized Parameter attributes Number Change effective online P051 Setting range Description
P021.G
2...16000 RPM
nmin for nact < nmin signal Response value for a freelyprogrammable relay signal 1 |nact| < nmin nx for nact < nx signal Response value for a freelyprogrammable relay signal 4 |nact| < nx Tolerance bandwidth for nset = nact signal Tolerance for freelyprogrammable relay signal 1 rampup completed and for freelyprogrammable relay signal 20 nset = nact Mdx for Md < Mdx signal Response value for freelyprogrammable relay signal 3 Md < Mdx The setting refers to the actual torque limit.
P023.G
online
0...32000 RPM
P027.G
online
0...29000 RPM
P047.G
online
0...100 %
Control word messages
AM
Table 3-12
Control word, signals Parameter attributes
Number
P051
Setting range
Description
P247
0...FFFF hex
Control word, signals Every relay signal can be individually and independently inverted by setting the appropriate bit. Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 Value 0001H 0002H 0004H 0008H 0010H 0020H Relay function, terminal A11 is inverted Relay function, terminal A21 is inverted Relay function, terminal A31 is inverted Relay function, terminal A41 is inverted Relay function, terminal A51 is inverted Relay function, terminal A61 is inverted
AM/3-46
12.94 07.94
3.3.3 Variable relay function Induction motor modules (AM)
3.3.3
Table 3-13
Variable relay function

Variable relay function Parameter attributes
Number
Change effective
P051
Setting range
Description
P185 to P189 P185 P186 P187 P188 P189 P190 to P194 P190 P191 P192 P193 P194 P247
Variable relay function 1
online online online online online
4 4 4 4 4
0...FFFF hex 0...FFFF hex 0.00...10.00 s 0.00...10.00 s 0...7FFF hex
Address for monitoring 1 Threshold for monitoring 1 Pullin delay, monitoring 1 Dropout delay, monitoring 1 Hysteresis, monitoring 1 Hysteresis for threshold P186 Variable relay function 2
online online online online online online
4 4 4 4 4 4
0...FFFF hex 0...FFFF hex 0.00...10.00 s 0.00...10.00 s 0...7FFF hex 0...FFFF hex
Address for monitoring 2 Threshold for monitoring 2 Pullin delay, monitoring 2 Dropout delay, monitoring 2 Hysteresis, monitoring 2 Hysteresis for threshold P191 Control word, signals Bit Value 0000H 8 0100H 0000H 9 0200H 0000H 1000H 12 Variable relay function 1 with sign interrogation Variable relay function 1 with absolute value interrogation Variable relay function 2 with sign interrogation Variable relay function 2 with absolute value interrogation Variable relay function 1 with P186 as threshold Variable relay function 1 as bit test. The threshold (P186) is ANDed with the RAM variables to be monitored (P185). Variable relay function 2 with P191 as threshold Variable relay function 2 as bit test
AM
0000H 13 2000H
AM/3-47
3.3.4 Analog outputs Induction motor modules (AM)
04.97 07.94
Note A list of important measured quantities (RAM variables) and their addresses are listed in the Appendix (Section 6.5).
3.3.4
Analog outputs
Note Analog outputs are not possible for MLFB (Order No.) 6SN11220BA110AA0.
Overview
S Function S technical data S Parameterization, DAU 1, DAU 2 S connection for analog displays
Function
AM
Analog output of RAM variables for measurement purposes via two 8bit D/A converters.
Note A list of important measured quantities (RAM variables) and their addresses are listed in the Appendix (Section 6.5).
Technical data
S 2 output channels at terminal A91 (DAU 1) and terminal A92 (DAU 2) S 10 V voltage range S rough and fine normalization, offset compensation S output voltage polarity can be set via the fine normalization ( 1000 %)
AM/3-48
07.94
Parameterization DAU 1, DAU 2

Table 3-14 Parameterization, DAU 1, DAU 2 Parameter attributes Number Change effective online P051 Setting range Description
P066
0...FFFF hex
Address, DAU 1 Address of the RAM variables which are to be output at DAU 1. Presetting: 11B6H absolute calculated speed actual value Shift factor, DAU 1 Rough normalization of the selected data value by shifting the binary number to the left. Shift to the left by 1 = multiplication by 2 Max. gain: 32768 Normalization, DAU 1 Fine normalization of the selected data value Offset, DAU 1 Compensation of a possible offset for DAU 1 Address, DAU 2 Presetting: 11B8H utilization Shift factor, DAU 2 Normalization, DAU 2 Offset, DAU 2
P067
online
0...F hex
P012 P078 P068 P069 P013 P079
online online online online online online
4 4 4 4 4 4
1000.0...1000.0 % 127...127 dec 0...FFFF hex 0...F hex 1000.0...1000.0 % 127...127 dec
AM
10.0 0000H 2000H 4000H 6000H 8000H A000H C000H E000H FFFFH Hex numerical value Shift factor = 0 Shift factor = 2 Offset = 0 V Fine normalization = 100 %
AM/3-49
07.94
Connection for analog displays
Application: The following DAU assignment is used to connect unipolar display instruments and the operating range is therefore limited to 0...+10 V without overflow.
Table 3-15
Connection for analog displays Parameter attributes
Number
P051
Setting range
Description
P012
1000.0...1000.0
Normalization, DAU 1 P066 = 11B6H |nact| display For P012 = 100 % and P067 = 0H, the following is valid: Standstill = 0 V Max. speed (minimum from P029, P174) = +10 V 1 V corresponds to 10 % Normalization, DAU 2 P068 = 11B8H utilization Displays the utilization in the following ranges Constant torque: Md/Mdmax Constant power: P/Pmax (taking into account the actual torque limits P039, P041 and the current and power limits P059 and P060) For P013 = 100 % and P069 = 0H, the following is valid: Noload = 0 V Max. torque or power = + 10 V 1 V corresponds to 10 %
P013
online
1000.0...1000.0
AM
Output voltage [V] No overflow +10.0
10.0 0000H 2000H 4000H 6000H 8000H A000H C000H E000H FFFFH Hex numerical value Shift factor = 0 Shift factor = 2 Offset = 0 V Fine normalization = 100 %
AM/3-50
04.97 12.94 07.94
4 Controller optimization Induction motor modules (AM)
Automatic functions can be selected to set important motor parameters. The drive must be enabled.
Warning During the automatic optimization runs, the motor is under voltage and can reach its maximum speed. The optimization runs involved are identified with the following symbol:
Note When using an UE module, to reduce the regenerative power, the rampdown time P017 or P043 must be increased, until braking can be achieved from maximum motor speed down to 0 without a fault message being issued (DC link overvoltage).
AM
Table 4-1 Control optimization Parameter attributes Number Change effective P051 Setting range Description
Optimization: Controller data of the actual motor with the drive enabled
S
P204 P205 online online 10 0...8 dec 0...1 dec
Optimization, current controller, refer to Section 4.2 Input 1 selection: current controller optimization Input 1, start optimization
S
Adjust power offset1) Input 2 selection: Power offset adjustment Input 1 start adjustment
S
P031 P032 online online 4 4 0.0...255.9 10.0...6000.0 ms
Optimization, speed contr., ref. to Sec. 4.1 and Sec. 4.7 P gain, speed controller Integral action time, speed controller
1)
From FW 3.0 no longer necessary
AM/4-51
12.94 07.94
Table 4-1
Control optimization
Parameter attributes Number Change effective P051 Setting range Description
S
P034 P035 online online 4 4 0.0...600.0 A/V s 5.0...600.0 ms
Optimization, field controller, refer to Section 4.3 P gain, field controller Integral action time, field controller
S
Adjustment, noload current Input 3 selection: Noload current adjustment Input 1 start adjustment
S
Adjustment, main field reactance Input 4 selection: Adjustment, main field reactance Input 1 start adjustment
S
Adjustment, field weakening speed (from FW 2.00) Input 8 selection: Adjustment, field weakening speed Input 1 start adjustment
S
Adjustment, total moment of inertia Input 5 selection: Adjustment, total moment of inertia Input 1 start adjustment
AM
Adjustment, rotor resistance (not required for motors with deepbar squirrelcage rotors) Input 6 selection: Adjustment, rotor resistance Input 1 start adjustment
Calculate speed controller setting (from FW 2.00) Not required, if speed controller optimization was executed (refer above) Input 7 selection: Speed controller setting calculation Input 1 start calculation
P204 P205 P052
10
0...8 dec 0...1 dec
0...1 hex
Transfer parameters into FEPROM
AM/4-52
04.97 12.94 07.94
Note If the noload current adjustment with F60 is aborted, a possibly effective speed limiting via the noload speed should be increased. If the adjustment with F60 is aborted due to voltage limiting, the sequence can be repeated with a lower value in P166, or the DC link voltage can be increased to 625 V (refer to the NE module).
Note To adjust the total moment of inertia, the rampup time (accelerating time) P016 and P042 should be set to the lowest possible value (preferably to zero). If the speed controller requires an integral action time P032 > 250 ms, then the total moment of inertia adjustment must be manually executed according to Section 4.7. To reduce the regenerative power in conjunction with a UE module, the ramp down time P017 and P043 can be increased.
Note If the motor shaft rotates when optimizing the current controller, then the optimization point must be repeated by entering speed setpoint zero (e.g. using terminal 81 HSS).
AM
AM/4-53
4.1 Speed controller Induction motor modules (AM)
12.94 07.94
4.1
Speed controller
Overview
S Rampfunction generator S Gain, integral action time S Speed contr. adaptation S Speed controller clock S Total moment of inertia
Rampfunction generator
Table 4-2 Rampfunction generator Parameter attributes Number Change effective online online online online online online P051 Setting range Description
P016.M P017.M P042.M
4 4 4 4 4 4
0.00...320.00 s 0.00...320.00 s 0.00...320.00 s 0.00...320.00 s 4.00...100.00 ms 0...FFFF hex
Rampup time, rampfunction generator 1 (From n = 0 to nmax P174) Rampdown time, rampfunction generator 1 (From nmax P174 to n = 0) Rampup time, rampfunction generator 2 (From n = 0 to nmax P174) Rampdown time, rampfunction generator 2 (From nmax P174 to n = 0) Initial roundingoff Torque setpoint smoothing Control word Bit Value 0000H 0008H 3 Rampfunction generator is not tracked Rampfunction generator is trakked Speed setpoint
AM
P043.M P018.M P053
Speed
Speed
Speed setpoint
Speed actual value Time [s] Without rampfunction generator tracking
Speed actual value Time [s] With rampfunction generator tracking
AM/4-54
12.94 07.94

Table 4-3 Gain, integral action time Parameter attributes Number Change effective online online P051 Setting range Description
P031.M P032.M
4 4
0.0...255.9 10...6000 ms
P gain, speed controller Speed controller integral action time
When calculating the controller data P153 = 1, the speed controller parameters are, among other parameters, defined. In several cases, the control characteristics can still be improved (refer to Section 4.7)
Speed controller adaptation
The speed controller adaptation can be activated if another speed controller P gain is required in the upper speed range.
Table 4-4
Speed contr. adaptation Parameter attributes
Number
Change effective online online online online online
P051
Setting range
Description
P195.M P196.M P197.M P198.M P199.M
4 4 4 4 4
0...32000 RPM 0...32000 RPM 0.0...255.9 dec 0.0...255.9 dec 1...150 %
Lower adaptation speed Upper adaptation speed P gain, lower adaptation speed P gain, upper adaptation speed P gain, reduction factor (The P gain characteristic is multiplied over the complete speed range) Select, speed controller adaptation 0: No adaptation P031 effective 1: Speed controller adaptation active P031 ineffective
AM
P203.M
online
0...1 hex
P gain [dec] P197 P199
P198 P199
P195
Speed [RPM] P196
AM/4-55
04.97 07.94
Speed controller clock

Table 4-5 Speed controller clock Parameter attributes Number Change effective P051 Setting range Description
P090
0...FFFFHex
Control word Bit 3 Word 0000H 0008H Speed controller clock, Standard Speed controller clock, fast If bit 3 is changed, it only becomes effective after saving in the FEPROM and poweringon and off.
Total moment of inertia

Table 4-6 Total moment of inertia Parameter attributes Number Change effective online P051 Setting range Description
AM
P159.M
0.0...6535.5 gm2
Motor and external moment of inertia Sum of the motor moment of inertia + external moment of inertia referred to the motor shaft Additional moment of inertia The parameterized value is internally added to P159.M. Entry into P219.M is only required if the setting range of P159.M is exceeded (From FW 2.00)
P219.M
online
0...15 kgm2
AM/4-56
04.97 03.96 07.94
4.2 Current controller Induction motor modules (AM)
4.2
Overview
Current controller
S Current controller optimization S Noload motor current
Current controller
Warning The module could be destroyed if the current controller P gain, P115 or P116 is set too high. If the inverter clock frequency is increased, then the power derating, specified in Table 48 must be maintained.
Current controller optimization
Table 4-7
P036.M
0...3 hex
Inverter clock frequency If the clock frequency is increased, the current controller dynamic performance is improved, however, the permissible continuous current load capability is reduced as a result of the switching losses. If the clock frequency is changed, the current controller must reoptimized. reo timized. Inverter clock frequency 0 3.2 kHz 4 2.8 kHz 1 2 3 4.7 kHz 6.3 kHz 7.8 kHz 5 6 7 3.9 kHz 5.0 kHz 5.9 kHz
AM
(P037)
2.8...7.8 kHz
Displays the actual inverter clock frequency
AM/4-57
04.97 07.94
Table 4-8 Power module type
Currents are dependent on the inverter clock frequency IM analog fT Order Nos. 6SN11231AA0V 6SN11231AA0V 6SN11231AA0V In / Is6 / Imax in A In / Is6 / Imax in A In / Is6 / Imax in A In / Is6 / Imax in A
Code No.
fT:3.2kHz
fT:4.7kHz
fT:6.3kHz
fT:7.8kHz
8A 15 A 25 A 50 A 80 A 108 A 120 A 160 A 200 A 300 A 400 A
0HAV 0AAV 0BAV 0CAV 0DAV 0LAV 0GAV 0EAV 0FAV 0JAV 0KAV
1 2 4 6 7 13 8 9 10 11 12
3/3/3 5/5/8 8 / 10 / 16 24 / 32 / 32 30 / 40 / 51 45 / 60 / 76 45 / 60 / 76 60 / 80 / 102 85 / 110 / 127 120 / 150 / 193 200 / 250 / 257
2.5 / 2.5 / 2.5 4.2 / 4.2 / 6.8 6.9 / 8.6 / 13.8 20 / 26 / 26 26 / 34 / 44 39 / 52 / 65 39 / 52 / 65 51 / 68 / 86 73 / 95 / 109 101 / 127 / 163 169 / 211 / 217
2/2/2 3.4 / 3.4 / 5.4 5.7 / 7.1 / 11.4 15 / 20 / 20 21 / 28 / 36 32 / 43 / 54 32 / 43 / 54 41 / 54 / 69 60 / 78 / 90 81 / 102 / 131 135 / 169 / 174
1.6 / 1.6 / 1.6 2.6 / 2.6 / 4.2 4.6 / 5.7 / 9.1 10 / 14 / 14 17 / 23 / 29 26 / 34 / 43 26 / 34 / 43 31 / 42 / 53 48 / 63 / 72 62 / 78 / 101 104 / 130 / 134
Power module type
Order Nos. 6SN11231AA0V 6SN11231AA0V 6SN11231AA0V
In / Is6 / Imax in A
AM
8A 15 A 25 A 50 A 80 A 108 A 120 A 160 A 200 A 300 A 400 A
Code No.
fT: 2.8 kHz
fT: 3.9 kHz
fT: 5.0 kHz
fT: 5.9 kHz
from FW3.00 0HAV 0AAV 0BAV 0CAV 0DAV 0LAV 0GAV 0EAV 0FAV 0JAV 0KAV 1 2 4 6 7 13 8 9 10 11 12 3/3/3 5/5/8 8 / 10 / 16 24 / 32 / 32 30 / 40 / 51 45 / 60 / 76 45 / 60 / 76 60 / 80 / 102 85 / 110 / 127 120 / 150 / 193 200 / 250 / 257 2.8 / 2.8 / 2.8 4.6 / 4.6 / 7.4 7.5 / 9.3 / 15 22 / 29 / 29 28 / 37 / 48 42 / 56 / 71 42 / 56 / 71 56 / 74 / 95 79 / 103 / 119 111 / 139 / 179 185 / 232 / 238 2.4 / 2.4 / 2.4 4.1 / 4.1 / 6.5 6.7 / 8.3 / 13.3 19 / 25 / 25 25 / 33 / 42 37 / 50 / 63 37 / 50 / 63 49 / 65 / 83 71 / 91 / 106 98 / 122 / 157 163 / 203 / 209 2.2 / 2.2 / 2.2 3.6 / 3.6 / 5.8 6 / 7.5 / 12 16 / 21 / 21 22 / 30 / 38 34 / 45 / 57 34 / 45 / 57 43 / 58 / 73 63 / 82 / 95 86 / 108 / 139 144 / 180 / 185
P115.M P116.M
online online
4 4
0...255 dec 0...300 dec
P gain, current controller, base speed range P gain, current controller, fieldweakening range
P116.M + 255(255P115.M) @ P173.M P174.M
AM/4-58
07.94
Noload motor current

Table 4-9 Noload motor current Parameter attributes Number Change effective online P051 Setting range Description
P166.M
0.00...Irated LT
Noload motor current Freely rotating motor without load
4.3
Field controller

Table 4-10 Gain, integral action time Parameter attributes Number Change effective online online P051 Setting range Description
P034.M P035.M
4 4
0.0...600.0 100 A/Vs 5.0...600.0 ms
Field controller P gain Field controller integral action time
AM
When calculating the controller data P153 = 1, the field controller parameters are, among other parameters, defined. In several cases, the control behavior can be improved (refer to Section 4.7)
AM/4-59
4.4 Optimization openloop controlled range Induction motor modules (AM)
07.94
4.4
Optimization openloop controlled range

Warning If a drive is operated for a longer period of time in the openloop controlled speed range, adequate motor cooling should be ensured, as a current is impressed in the motor which is approximately the rated current (percentage in P057). Caution for selfventilated motors.
Table 4-11
Optimization, openloop controlled range Parameter attributes
Number
P051
Setting range
Description
P057.M
0...150 %
Current setpoint for the openloop controlled range Percentage of the rated motor current Current setpoint for the currentfrequency control (openloop) Accelerating torque in the controlled range Percentage of the rated motor torque Changeover speed, closed/openloop control The changeover is realized with a 200 RPM hysteresis.
P058.M P172.M
online online
4 4
0...399 % 0...32000 RPM
AM
Note If the current is limited by the maximum available converter current when accelerating, then the torquegenerating components are reduced. A reduction of the current in P057 in this case shortens the rampup time.
AM/4-60
07.94
4.5 Limits Induction motor modules (AM)
4.5
Table 4-12
Limits
Limits Parameter attributes Number Change effective online online online online online online P051 Setting range Description
P174.M P059.M P060.M P029.G P039.G P041.G
4 4 4 4 4 4
0...32000 RPM 0...399 % 0...399 % 0...32000 RPM 0...399 % 0...399 %
Max. motor speed Highest permissible motor speed Current limiting Percentage of the rated motor current Output limiting Percentage of the rated motor output Speed limiting Highest required motor speed 1st torque limit Percentage of the rated motor torque 2nd torque limit Percentage of the rated motor torque Selected via freelyprogrammable terminal function 1. Changeover, if the actual changeover speed from Md1 to Md2, P050, is exceeded. Changeover speed from Md1 to Md2 Changeover condition for the limit value changeover
P050.G
online
0...32000 RPM
Note If a drive is to be operated in the overload range, the limits must first be increased after the controller has been optimized. The various limits are always simultaneously taken into account. If an overload is permitted, then generally more than one limit has to be increased. If the rampup time is to be shortened, it is also practical to make a change in the openloop controlled range.
AM
AM/4-61
4.6 Special speeds and speed ranges Induction motor modules (AM)
07.94
4.6
Special speeds and speed ranges
Overview
S Min. steadystate speed S Speed range suppression S Shutdown without overshoot

Table 4-13 Min. steadystate speed Parameter attributes Number Change effective online P051 Setting range Description
P030.M
0...32000 RPM
Steadystate minimum speed No steadystate operation in the speed range around zero. The range is runthrough with the actual rampup or rampdown times if the speed setpoint exceeds the steadystate minimum speed in the opposite direction of rotation. Zero speed can only be forced by inhibiting the permanentlywired enable signals or the freelyprogrammable terminal function 16, setpoint enable.
AM
Steadystate minimum speed (P030 < 200 RPM)
effective setpoint [RPM]
200
200 input setpoint [RPM]
effective setpoint [RPM]
Steadystate minimum speed (P030 > 200 RPM) 200
input setpoint [RPM] 200
AM/4-62
07.94
4.6 Special speeds and speed ranges Induction motor modules (AM)
Speed range suppression

Table 4-14 Speed range suppression Parameter attributes Number Change effective online online P051 Setting range Description
P054.M P055.M
4 4
0...32000 RPM 0...32000 RPM
Suppressed range, lower speed Suppressed range, upper speed No steadystate operation in the suppressed speed range. The range is runthrough with the actual rampup or rampdown times, if the speed setpoint either exceeds or falls below the other corner speed.
effective setpoint [RPM] P055 upper speed Suppressed range P054 lower speed
input setpoint [RPM] Suppressed range
AM
Shutdown without overshoot
Table 4-15 Shutdown without overshoot Parameter attributes Number Change effective online P051 Setting range Description
P022.M
2...32000 RPM
Shutdown speed, pulse cancellation Shutdown without overshoot When the controller is inhibited, and the shutdown speed is fallen below, the motor is switched into a nocurrent condition, in order to prevent overshoot when zero speed is approached.
AM/4-63
4.7 Manual optimization Induction motor modules (AM)
12.94 07.94
4.7
Manual optimization
Overview
S current controller S speed controller S field controller S Noload motor current S main field reactance S motor and external moment of inertia S motor rotor resistance
If manual optimization is required, the specified signals at the appropriate measuring points should be traced using a storage oscilloscope, and the parameters set, so that the required signal characteristics are obtained. The sequence can be triggered by the first of the specified signals. For several adjustments, the settling characteristics of setpoint jumps have to be evaluated (if possible, rampup time P016 or P042 = 0) (step response). These can be entered using the oscillation generator (refer to Section 2.2.3). In this case, braking energy can be fed back into the supply when I/R modules are used. When UE modules are used, this energy is converted into heat. Rampdown time P017 or P043 can be increased to reduce the braking power.
AM
Current controller
P115 P gain, current controller, base speed range P116 P gain, current controller, fieldweakening range
Table 4-16 Signal name Test point Parameterization Address Phase current IR test socket Shift factor, e. g.
AM/4-64
07.94
Setting, with the drive enabled and speed n = 0 Parameter P115 is increased from the preset value until the characteristic remains stable. If oscillations occur, reduce the value until the characteristic again becomes stable.
Phase current
Phase current
Phase current
P115 too low
t [ms]
P115 correct
t [ms]
P115 too high
t [ms]
Fig. 4-1
Optimization, current controller, base speed range
P gain
300 255 200 Max. value P116 = 300
AM
P116 = 200 P115 = 75 Base speed range P173 Field weakening range Speed [RPM] P174
75
Fig. 4-2
Optimization, current controller, fieldweakening range
From the field weakening speed P173, the current controller gain is linearly increased, and, at maximum speed P174, reaches the value of P116, but, a maximum of 255. If a value > 255 is entered in P116, the current controller gain reaches the maximum value already at speeds < P174. P116.M + 255(255P115.M) @ P173.M P174.M
AM/4-65
07.94
In some cases, the behavior can be further improved using a somewhat higher value.
Table 4-17 P gain, current controller, base speed range P115 P gain, current controller, base speed range Increase value for No. F11 Fault profile Low current controller dynamic performance No. F11 Decrease value for Fault profile Increased current ripple, whistling noises, etc.
Table 4-18
P gain, current controller, fieldweakening range P116 P gain, current controller, fieldweakening range Increase value for Decrease value for No. F11 Fault profile Spontaneous stall
No.
Fault profile Erratic noload operation in the upper speed range, torque surges
AM
AM/4-66
07.94
Speed controller
P031 P gain, speed controller P032 integral action time, speed controller
Table 4-19 Signal name Test point Parameterization Address Torquegenerating current Speed actual value X1 test socket X2 test socket P076 = 10D2H P072 = 1110H Shift factor, e. g. P077 = 0H P073 = 4H
Setting, when the drive is enabled in the oscillation mode: Enter small setpoint steps in the upper speed range using the oscillation generator. Using P031 and P032 set the required settling characteristic of the speed actual value after the actual limit has been left. If different controller settings are required at various speeds, the speed controller adaptation can be activated (refer to Section 4.1).
Torquegenerating current
AM
t [ms] Speed actual value Speed actual value
t [ms] Speed actual value
t [ms]
t [ms] P031 too low Fig. 4-3 Optimization, speed controller P031 correct
t [ms] P031 too high
t [ms]
AM/4-67
07.94
Table 4-20
P gain, speed controller P031 P gain, speed controller Increase value for Decrease value for No . Fault profile Speed oscillations with a low period interval for speed steps
No .
Fault profile High rise time Overshoot with a large period interval for speed steps
Table 4-21
Speed controller integral action time P032 Speed controller integral action time Increase value for Decrease value for No . Fault profile Long settling characteristics when speed changes occur
No .
Fault profile Tendency to oscillate when there is an elastic coupling and a high external moment of inertia
AM
AM/4-68
07.94
Field controller
P034 P gain, field controller P035 integral action time, field controller
Table 4-22 Signal name Test point Parameterization Address Speed actual value Fieldgenerating current X1 test socket X2 test socket P076 = 1110H P072 = 10CAH Shift factor, e. g. P077 = 0H P073 = 2H
Setting with the drive enabled in oscillation mode. Using the oscillation generator and rampfunction generator, brake the drive from the maximum speed to changeover speed P172 via a ramp. Increase parameter P034 from the calculated value until the fieldgenerating current remains stable. If oscillations occur, reduce the value or increase P035 until the characteristic restabilizes. Check:
S setpoint steps in the field weakening range

if there is a tendency to stall (F11), increase P034.
S noload characteristics over the complete speed range

for erratic noload operation with torque surges, down to stalling (F11), reduce P034.
Speed actual value
Speed actual value
Speed actual value
AM
t [ms] Fieldgenerating current Fieldgenerating current
t [ms] Fieldgenerating current
t [ms]
t [ms] P034 too low P034 correct
t [ms]
Fig. 4-4
AM/4-69
07.94
Table 4-23
Field controller P gain P034 P gain, field controller Increase value for Decrease value for No. F11 Fault profile The fieldgenerating current has a tendency to oscillate Speed ripple Torque surges Stalling under noload conditions
No. F11
Fault profile Stalling, especially in the field weakening range during speed steps
P166 Noload motor current
Note If the value of parameter P166 is changed, the main field reactance P171 should be readjusted.
Table 4-24 Signal name Test point Parameterization Address Phase current Motor current Voltage actual value Table 4-25 IR test socket (P007) display (P010) display Shift factor, e. g.
AM
parameter P172 P057 Speed setpoint
Setting with the drive enabled and load decoupled Procedure Changeover speed,closedloop/openloop control Set P172 > P164 60/p s/min Note the original value Current setpoint for the openloop controlled range Set P057 = 50 % Note the original value Adjust so that (P005) = UA (P162/P164) + 2
3 P158 P161
with UA output voltage, induction motor module UA v 400 V at UDClink = 600 V UA v 420 V at UDClink = 625 V UA v 0.8 Usupply at UDClink uncontrolled P057 P166 P172 P057 Current setpoint for the openloop controlled range Adjust so that (P010) = UA Motor noload current Set P166 = P161 P057/100 % Changeover speed, open/closedloop control Enter the original value Current setpoint for the openloop controlled range Enter the original value
AM/4-70
07.94
P171 Magnetizing reactance
Note If the value of parameter P171 is changed, the motor noload current P166 must be readjusted.
Table 4-26 Signal name Test point Parameterization Address Integral component, field controller X1 test socket P076 = 116A Shift factor, e. g. P077 = 2
Set with the drive enabled at the field weakening speed P173. Adjust the field controller integral component with parameter P171 to zero.
Integral component, field controller
t [ms]
t [ms]
t [ms]
AM
P171 too low
P171 correct
P171 too high
Fig. 4-5
AM/4-71
12.94 07.94
P159 motor and external moment of inertia P219 additional moment of inertia
Table 4-27 Parameterization Signal name Speed actual value Integral component, speed controller Test point X1 test socket X2 test socket Address P076 = 1110H P072 = 117CH Shift factor, e. g. P077 = 0H P073 = 2H
Setting with load coupled and the drive enabled in the oscillation mode. Enter setpoint steps from n = 2 P172 to nmax with the oscillation generator. Set the speed controller integral component with parameter P159 or P219 so that this remains at approximately zero during acceleration.
Speed actual value
Speed actual value
Speed actual value
AM
t [ms] t [ms] t [ms]
Integral component, speed controller
Friction torque 0 t [ms] 0 t [ms] 0 t [ms]
P159 + P219 too low
P159 + P219 correct
P159 + P219 too high
Fig. 4-6
AM/4-72
07.94
P168 motor rotor resistance

Note Motor rotor resistance setting is not required for motors with deepbar squirrel cage rotors.
Table 4-28 Signal name Test point Parameterization Address Speed actual value Integral component, speed controller X1 test socket X2 test socket P076 = 1110H P072 = 117CH Shift factor, e. g. P077 = 0H P073 = 2H
Setting with the drive enabled in oscillation mode. Using the oscillation generator, enter setpoint steps in the speed range from n = 2 P172 to n = nmax. Adjust the speed controller integral component using parameter P168 so that an overshoot at the end of acceleration is compensated.
Speed actual value
Speed actual value
Speed actual value
AM
t [ms]
t [ms]
t [ms]
Friction torque
t [ms] P168 too low Fig. 4-7 P168 correct
t [ms]
AM/4-73
07.94 Induction motor modules (AM)
AM
AM/4-74
04.97 12.94 07.94
5.1.1 Measured value displays Induction motor modules (AM)
Diagnostics and fault analysis
5.1
5.1.1
Diagnostic aids
Measured value displays
Warning When the motor pulses are canceled, there is no information regarding the motor speed. The calculated speed actual value is then set to zero. Thus, all speed actual value displays no longer provide any information. In addition to P133, BERO speed actual value if the speed is monitored.
Table 5-1
Measured value displays ParameterAttribute
Number
Change effective
P051
Setting range
Description
AM
(P001) (P101) (P002) (P102) (P003) (P004) (P005) (P006)
32000...32000 RPM 32000...32000 RPM 399.0...399.0 % 0.0...100.0 % 1250...1250 Hz 0...700 V
Speed setpoint Speed actual value Torquegenerating current Referred to the rated motor current Utilization Referred to the effective limiting Motor frequency DC link voltage Realized via NE or the monitoring module or using P061 Motor current Referred to the rated motor current Field current components Referred to the rated motor current Active power Referred to the rated motor output Voltage actual value Motor temperature Speed actual value BERO Inverter clock frequency
(P007) (P008) (P009) (P010) (P110) (P133) (P037)
399.0...399.0 % 0.0...399.0 % 0.0...399.0 % 0...450 Veff 0...170C 0...65535 RPM 2.8 kHz...7.8 kHz
AM/5-75
5.1.2 Status displays Induction motor modules (AM)
07.94
5.1.2
Status displays
P000, P100 operating display P011 Status of the binary inputs

Table 5-2
Refer to Section 2.2.1
P011 status of the binary inputs
Display
Display value Term. 63 central pulse enable Term. 64 central drive enable axisspecific pulse enable Term. 65 axisspecific controller enable Term. 81 open rampfunction generator fast stop Term. E9 freelyprogramm. via P089 Term. 663 Term. E5 freelyprogramm. via P085 Term. E6 freelyprogramm. via P086 Term. E7 freelyprogramm. via P087 Term. E8 freelyprogramm. via P088 Term. E1 freelyprogramm. via P081 Term. E2 freelyprogramm. via P082 Term. E3 freelyprogramm. via P083 Term. E4 freelyprogramm. via P084
AM
Term. 112 open settingup operation
Term. R central fault acknowledgment
It is possible to display several messages. The hexadecimal addition is displayed. Example: 4H + 8H = CH
AM/5-76
07.94

Table 5-3 P254 display, active functions 1
Display
Display value Fct. No. 13 rampfunction generator 2 Fct. No. 14 increase setpoint Fct. No. 15 decrease setpoint Fct. No. 9 gearbox stage bit 0 Fct. No. 10 gearbox stage bit 1 Fct. No. 11 gearbox stage bit 2 Fct. No. 1 2nd torque limit Fct. No. 2 oscillation
Fct. No. 7 rampup time TH = 0
Fct. No. 3 reset fault memory (fault acknowledgment)
Fct. No. 16 setpoint enable
Fct. No. 12 clockwise/ counterclockwise phase sequence
AM
AM/5-77
12.94 07.94

Table 5-4 P255 display, active functions 2
Display
Display value Fct. No. 21 motor selection bit 1 Fct. No. 24 Fct. No. 17 fixed setpoint bit 0 Fct. No. 18
fixed setpoint bit fixed setpoint bit 3 1 Fct. No. 19
fixed setpoint bit 2 Fct. No. 20
AM
motor selection bit 0
AM/5-78
12.94 07.94
5.1.3 Diagnostic parameters Induction motor modules (AM)
5.1.3
P020 Executed selfsetting

Table 5-5 P255 executed selfsetting
Display
Display value self optimization 5 setting, moment of inertia self optimization 6 setting, rotor resistance self optimization 7 optimization, phase current controller self optimization 2 setting, power offset self optimization 3 self optimization 1
AM
calculation, setting, noload speed controller current self optimization 8 setting, field weakening speed It is possible to display several messages. The hexadecimal addition is displayed. Example: 4H + 8H = CH setting, main field reactance self optimization 4
AM/5-79
5.1.3 Diagnostic parameters Induction motor modules (AM)
12.94 07.94
Table 5-6 ParameterAttribute Number Change effective P051 Setting range Description
(P028)
0...FFFFH
Diagnostics Bit 13 Value 2000H Division interrupt Error in the calculation routine by incorrect data entry
(P200)
0...FFFFH
Checksum, parameter At every backup (P052=1H), the checksum is formed over the parameter contents. Thus, a change in the drivemotor data is identified.
5.1.4
Test sockets X1, X2, IR
Overview
S Function S technical data S assignment S Normalization, IR S Parameterization, X1 (DAU 3), X2 (DAU 4)
AM
Function
Analog output of the phase current actual value and RAM variables for measurement and diagnostic purposes.
Technical data
S phase current actual value at test socket IR S 2 output channels at X1 (DAU 3) and X2 (DAU 4) S voltage range 0...+ 5 V (value 0 corresponds to +2.5 V) S rough normalization, offset compensation for X1 and X2 via parameter
AM/5-80
03.96 07.94
5.1.4 Test sockets X1, X2, IR Induction motor modules (AM)
Assignment
X1: X1 IR X2 M X2: IR: M:
Test socket DAU 3 Test socket DAU 4 Current actual value, phase R Reference ground
Fig. 5-1
Assignment, test sockets
Normalization IR
Table 5-7 Normalization, IR Normalization, IR 8 A corresponds to 8.25 V 15 A corresponds to 8.25 V 25 A corresponds to 8.25 V 50 A corresponds to 8.25 V 80 A corresponds to 8.25 V 160 A corresponds to 8.25 V 160 A corresponds to 8.25 V 200 A corresponds to 8.25 V 300 A corresponds to 8.25 V 400 A corresponds to 8.25 V 120 A corresponds to 8.25 V
Power module code number (P095) 1 2 4 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
AM
AM/5-81
5.1.4 Test sockets X1, X2, IR Induction motor modules (AM)
07.94
Parameterization X1 (DAU 3), X2 (DAU 4)

Table 5-8 Parameterization, X1 (DAU 3), X2 (DAU 4) ParameterAttribute Number Change effective online P051 Setting range Description
P076
0...FFFF hex
Address, DAU 3 Address of the RAM variables which are to be output at DAU 1. Presetting: 1110H calculated speed actual value 1 V corresponds to 15000 RPM Shift factor, DAU 3 Rough normalization of the selected data value by shifting the binary number to the left. Shifting to the left by 1 = multiplication by 2 Max. gain: 32768 Offset, DAU 3 Compensation of a possible offset for DAU 3 Address, DAU 4 Presetting: 10D2H Torquegenerating current 1 V corresponds to 1.6 Irated motor Shift factor, DAU 4 Offset, DAU 4
P077
online
0...F hex
P080 P072
online online
4 4
127...127 dec 0...FFFF hex
P073 P074
online online
4 4
0...F hex 127...127 dec
AM
+2.5
0.0 0000H 2000H 4000H 6000H 8000H A000H C000H E000H FFFFH Hex numerical value
Offset = 0 V Fine normalization = 100 %
Note A listing of important measured quantities (RAM variables) and their addresses is listed in the Appendix (Section 6.5).
AM/5-82
07.94
5.1.5 Minimum/maximum value memory Induction motor modules (AM)
5.1.5
Function
Table 5-9
Monitoring RAM variables for minimum and maximum values.

ParameterAttribute Number Change effective online P051 Setting range Description
P181
0...FFFF hex
Address for min/max memory (addresses of the monitored RAM variable) Value can be backedup in the drivemachine data memory. Selection, min/max memory 0H: Stop memory function 1H: Start memory function with absolute value evaluation 2H: Start memory function with bipolar evaluation 3H: Stop memory function Min. value min/max memory Max. value min/max memory
P179
online
0...3 hex
(P182) (P183)
AM
AM/5-83
5.1.6 Transient recorder function Induction motor modules (AM)
04.97 07.94
5.1.6
Transient recorder function
Function
Simultaneous tracing of two RAM variables and output via test sockets X1 and X2.
Technical data
S two 16bit signals are traced in parallel S 640 words trace depth S 1 ms sampling time (P090, bit3=0 ) or 0.6ms (P090, bit3=1, from FW 3.00) S start and stop condition (trigger conditions) S cyclic output via D/A converters S trigger edge for the output
Parameterization
Table 5-10 Parameterization ParameterAttribute Number Change effective online P051 Setting range Description
AM
P207
0...C hex
Setting the transient recorder

Two RAM variables are recorded over 640 ms with 1 ms sampling time. 1H: Start via P206 without start and stop condition Start via P206 = + 1. stop 640 ms after input 2H: Start condition P208 and P209, no stop condition. Start via P206 = +1. stop 640 ms after start condition. 5H: Stop condition via P210 and P211, no start condition. Start via P205 = +1. tracing the last 640 ms before the stop condition 6H: Record with start and stop condition, max. 640 ms 4H: Trace memory preassigned a value via P217 Parameter is reset to 0 after successful trace.
P212
online
0...FFFF hex
Address signal 1 A list of all of the important measured quantities (RAM variables) and their addresses are provided in the Appendix (Section 6.5). Address, signal 2
P213
online
0...FFFF hex
AM/5-84
07.94
5.1.6 Transient recorder function Induction motor modules (AM)
Table 5-10
Parameterization ParameterAttribute
Number
P051
Setting range
Description
P208 P209
4 4
Address for the start condition Address of the RAM variables which start the trace. Threshold for the start condition Start condition mask, is compared with the RAM variable in P208. Address for stop condition Threshold for the stop condition Select transient recorder The transient recorder function is started by setting P206 to +1. The parameter is reset to 0 after a successful trace. Shift factor, signal 1 Refer to the description, test socket X1, X2 Shift factor, signal 2 Trigger signal 1 Trigger signal amplitude low for D/A converter output with 1 ms duration. An edge is output, which follows the traced signal when entering various signal levels in P217 and P218. Trigger signal 2 Trigger signal amplitude high for 1 ms D/A converter output. Start trace output Cyclic outputs of the traced values on D/A converter. The output is repeated until the parameter is reset to 0. Trace signal 1 DAU 3 (X1) Trace signal 2 DAU 4 (X2) The previous assignment of the D/A converters is buffered and is set again after the output function has been terminated.
P210 P211 P206
4 4 4
0...FFFF hex 0...FFFF hex 0...1 hex
P215 P216 P217
4 4 4
0...15 dec 0...15 dec 0...FFFF hex
P218
online
0...FFFF hex
P214
online
0...1 hex
AM
AM/5-85
5.1.7 Openloop current/frequency control Induction motor modules (AM)
07.94
5.1.7
Openloop current/frequency control
Warning If a drive is operated for a longer period of time in the openloop controlled speed range, it should be ensured that the motor is adequately cooled, as a current is impressed in the motor which is approximately the same as the rated current (percentage in P057). Caution for selfventilated motors.
Function
Diagnostics for incorrect parameterization in the closedloop controlled range. The motor can be operated in the openloop current/frequency controlled range for test purposes. In this case, the closedloop speed and current control are ineffective.
Function information
The changeover speed, closedloop/openloop control P172 should be set so high, that this is not exceeded in test operation. Above the field weakening speed (P173), the absolute current value should be selected lower than the noload current, as otherwise the voltage limiting will intervene. This will result in erratic running and torque surges.
Table 5-11
Openloop current/frequency control ParameterAttribute
AM
Number
P051
Setting range
Description
P057.M
0...150 %
Current setpoint in the openloop controlled range Percentage of the rated motor current Current setpoint for openloop current/frequency control Accelerating torque in the openloop controlled range Percentage of the rated motor torque Changeover speed, closedloop/openloop control Changeover is realized with a 200 RPM hysteresis.
P058.M
online
0...399 %
P172.M
online
0...32000 RPM
AM/5-86
07.94
5.2 Fault analysis Induction motor modules (AM)
5.2
5.2.1
Fault analysis
Fault display, fault acknowledgment
Fault display
Display
Inactive
1 fault Several faults, changeover using key
Fault message number (refer to table 512) = Fault
Fault acknowledgment
using the P key P key with the controller inhibited.
Depress the
If the fault can be acknowledged, the system returns to the operator control program. If the fault cannot be acknowledged, for example, there is a defect, then this can be temporarily suppressed in the display.
AM
S remote acknowledgment
One of the following terminals is energized, with the controller inhibited: terminal R reset at the NE or monitoring module terminal reset fault memory (freelyprogrammable terminal function) at the induction motor module terminal 65 interrupt controller enable (only if P053, bit 5 =1)
S powerdown
Powerdown the converter and after the display has disappeared after approx. 2 s, powerup again.
Fault suppression
using the key
The system returns to the operator control program for approx. one minute after depressing the key, without the fault being acknowledged.
AM/5-87
5.2.2 Fault message list Induction motor modules (AM)
03.96 07.94
5.2.2
Fault message list
Warning When the motor pulses are canceled, there is no information regarding the motor speed. The calculated speed actual value is then set to 0.The motor impulses can be canceled by fault messages.
Table 5-12
Fault message list Fault D/A conversion error Cause
Fault message F04
S S S S S S S
if the control board repeatedly manifests defects all enable signals have been issued, but no motor is connected or a motor contactor has not pulledin. all enable signals have been issued, but at least one of the parameters P160, P166, P057, P059 is zero. DC link fuse ruptured DC link busbar interrupted if the error message repeatedly occurs during data save, then the FEPROM is defective. if the error message occurs directly after the converter is poweredup, then the converter was previously powereddown during a data save operation. The last parameter changes have therefore not been saved. The data save must be repeated. defective FEPROM replace module ribbon cable between the control and gating board is defective or is not connected motor is not connected or a phase is missing defective power supply of the gating board DC link fuse ruptured DC link busbar interrupted motor stalled, as the motor or controller parameters completely wrong induction motor module is connected to a monitoring module without DC link voltage sensing, and no value for the DC link voltage was entered in P061 for the gearbox stage changeover, the speed limiting P029 was lowered, although the motor rotated above this limit. motor data or controller data completely incorrect entered motor data and motor circuit configuration Y/n do not coincide motor stalled, as the motor or controller data are completely wrong
F05
Motor current = 0
F07
Data save unsuccessful on FEPROM
AM
F08 Irretrievable data loss
S S S S S S S S S S S S
F11
Frequency setpoint > maximum frequency
F13
Field controller is at its limit
AM/5-88
04.97 07.94
Table 5-12
Fault message list Fault Cause
Fault message
F14
Overtemperature, motor
S S S S S S
motor overloaded motor current too high, e.g. due to incorrect motor data defective temperature sensor (motor) motor fan defective winding short circuit, motor converter overloaded (incorrect motor/converter assignment, incorrect duty cycle) ambient temperature too high induction motor module fan failed defective temperature sensor in the induction motor module acknowledge after cooling below 50 C "15 K only by switching the supply voltage off and on incorrect code number 3 selected in P095 (for power modules without automatic identification) incorrect code number in P095 selected (for power modules with automatic identification). from FW 3.00 incorrect motor/converter assignment temperature sensor defective connection to the sensor interrupted or shortcircuited
F15
Overtemperature, converter
S S S S S
F16
Illegal power module code number
S S S S
F17
I0 motor > Irated

power section
Temperature sensor, motor F19
S S
interrupted short circuit
AM
S S
rated torque (calculated) from P160.M and P163.M greater than 650 Nm from FW 2.00 illegal ratio of P160.M P164.M P161.M P163.M P171.M from FW 2.00 Ratio of the rated motor current to rated power module current too low
only KTY 84 F51 Parameterizing error: Rated torque too high
F52
Parameterizing error: Torque constant inadmissible Parameterizing error: Rated motor current too low
F53
F60
Error for selfsetting
S S S S S
selfsetting was interrupted selfsetting did not provide any useful values speed limiting (P029, P174) effective nmax < (frated60 s/min)/p circuit configuration Y/D and nominal data interchanged additional causes, refer to Section 4 pulse number P131.M incorrectly parameterized cable interrupted
F90
Maximum speed BERO exceeded
S S
AM/5-89
07.94
Faults
after
S supply ON
Operating control display inactive at least two phases missing (NE module) at least two input fuses have ruptured (NE module) defective electronics power supply in the NE module converter bus connection (ribbon cable) induction motor module NE module not inserted or defective defective induction motor module defective EPROM/FEPROM firmware not loaded
S controller enable
Motor rotates counterclockwise, although the induction motor module outputs a clockwise rotating field, or vice versa motor phase sequence incorrect, as the feeder cables are interchanged (interchange 2 phase connections) J
AM
AM/5-90
07.94
6 Appendix Induction motor modules (AM)
Appendix
AM
AM/6-91
6.1 Flow diagram for new startup Induction motor modules (AM)
07.94
6.1
Flow diagram for new startup

Warning The drive accelerates up to nset if a fault on the NE module is acknowledged with the induction motor module enabled.
Note If data save is interrupted due to a power failure or the power being disconnected, then the values which were changed since the last data save are lost, and the drive converter displays fault message F07 after the power returns. The parameter values can be reset after acknowledging fault message F07 (refer to Section 5.2.2).
START
Before the unit is poweredup:
S S S
check the connections according to the system circuit diagram. withdraw the pulse and controller enable signals at the NE module (terminal 63, terminal 64) and the induction motor module (terminals 663, 65, 81). determine the power section code number from the module MLFB.
AM
Powerup the unit (supply ON)
Does the display remain dark? No Does a flashing F... appear? No Does the operating display P000 appear (refer to Sect. 1.3) yes 1
yes
yes
No
AM/6-92
07.94
1
Set P051 to 4H (remove write protection) Set P097 to 0H (start initialization) Set P052 to 1H (write into FEPROM) Wait until P052 is again set to 0H, then switch the converter off and 1 s after the operating display has been canceled, powerup again.
The module was already commissioned once. In order to adapt it to a new motor, it must be reset into the initial status.
Display P095 or P097 Enter and check P095 power module code number Set P097 to 1H SEtUP is displayed
Wait until the operating display P000 appears (refer to Section 2.2.1) Set P051 to 4H (remove write protection)
AM
No
Is the induction motor module connected yes to the converter bus of a monitoring module without DC link voltage sensing? Yes Enter P061 fixed DC link voltage (V)
Function not in combination with uncontrolled DC link voltage (refer to Section 2.1)
AM/6-93
12.94 07.94
3
Enter the following parameters1) P158 P160 P161 P162 P163 P164 P174 series reactor inductance (mH) rated motor output (kW) for S1 duty2) rated motor current (A) for S1 duty2) rated motor voltage (V) rated motor speed (RPM) rated motor frequency (Hz) max. motor speed (RPM) A 0 must be entered into P158 if there is no reactor between the induction motor module and motor.
This setting data can be taken from the rating plate of the motor used, acc. to VDE 0530, Part 1 (HA10).
Set P056 motor selection to the motor data set to be processed
No
Motor equivalent circuit diagram data known?
Yes
Enter the P178 power factor 1) cos 2)
Enter the following parameters1) P166 P167 P168 P169 P170 P171 mot. noload current (A) stator resistance () rotor resistance () stat. leakage react. () rotor leakage react. () main field reactance ()
Calculate the equivalent circuit diagram data
AM
Set P153 to +1H
No
Total moment of inertia1) roughly known?
Yes
Enter P1591) motor and external moment of inertia (gm2). If the set value is too low, enter P2191) additional moment of inertia (kgm2).
Calculate the controller data Set P153 to 1H Repeat the procedure for all changed motor data sets
1) Setting data for up to four different motors can be entered (subparameters 1 to 4) 2) For forceventilated motors, refer to the information, Section 2.1
AM/6-94
07.94
Set P052 to 1H Wait until P052 is again set to 0H. The entered values are transferred into the FEPROM.
No
Motor with deepbar squirrelcage rotor?
Yes or unknown
Increase P0181) initial roundingoff (ms) to approx. 30.00 ms
No
Is a > 3.3 kHz converter switching frequency configured?
Yes Observe derating (refer to Section 4.2)
Increase the converter switching frequency P0361) (refer to Section 4.2.)
AM
Set P056 motor selection to the motor data set to be processed
Enter 0 V speed setpoint at terminals 56 and 14 (display in P001)
10
1) Setting data for up to four different motors can be entered (subparameters 1 to 4)
AM/6-95
07.94
Status of the two center digits of the operating display P000 after switching (refer to Section 2.2.1)
All enable signals at the NE and IM module are switchedout (disabled).
Connect the enable voltage to all enable signals at the NE module.
Connect the enable voltage to the axisspecific pulse enable, terminal 663 at the IM module.
Controller enable Connect the enable voltage to terminal 65 at the IM module.
No
Is terminal fct. 16 (setpoint enable) activated?
Yes
AM
Remove rampfunction generator fast stop. Connect the enabled voltage to terminal 81.
Remove rampfunction generator fast stop. Connect the enable voltage to terminal 81.
Connect the enable voltage to the select terminal, setpoint enable.
Slightly increase the speed setpoint.
Yes
Motor rotates and responds to the speed setpoint
No
F05 F11
Refer to Section 5.2.2
Enter speed setpoint 0.
AM/6-96
03.96 07.94
No Max. motor speed > 6000 RPM
Yes
Increase P029 speed limiting to the maximum motor setpoint speed.
Set P051 to 10H. (remove special write protection)
1)
Set P204 to 1 (set the current controller) Set P205 to 1 (start selfsetting) Wait until P205 is set to 0
Set P204 to 2 (adjust power offset) Set P205 to 1 (start selfsetting) Wait until P205 is set to 0
Check, and if required change P031, P032 speed controller setting
AM
Check, and if required change P034, P035 field controller setting
Set P204 to 3 (set the noload current) Set P205 to 1 (start selfsetting) Wait until P205 is set to 0
Caution! The motor rotates at the no load speed, with a clockwise phase sequence. Note: Set P174 and P029 to at least the rated synchronous speed to optimize the noload current. Yes
No Does F60 or F17 fault message appear in the display?
1) no longer required from FW 3.00
AM/6-97
12.94 07.94
8 Caution! The motor runs with the field weakening speed, clockwise phase sequence.
Set P204 to 4 (set the main field reactance) Set P205 to 1 (start selfsetting) Wait until P205 is set to 0
No Is fault message F60 displayed?
Yes Fault (refer to Section 5.2.2)
Set P204 to 8 (set the field weakening speed) Set P205 to 1 (start selfsetting) Wait until P205 is set to 0
Caution! Oscillation up to the maximum speed with clockwise phase sequence (if required, limit with P029).
No Speed controller integral action time P032 > 250 ms
Yes
Manually adjust moment of inertia (refer to Section 4.7)
Set P204 to 5 (set the moment of inertia) Set P205 to 1 (start selfsetting) Wait until P205 is set to 0
AM
Caution! Oscillation up to the maximum speed with clockwise phase sequence (if required, limit with P029).
No Deepbar squirrelcage rotor?
Yes or unknown
Set P204 to 6 (set the rotor resistance) Set P205 to 1 (start selfsetting) Wait until P205 is set to 0
Caution! Oscillation up to the maximum speed with clockwise phase sequence. Yes
No Is fault message F60 displayed?
8a
AM/6-98
07.94
8a
10
P031, P032 speed controller settings manually optimized (refer to Section 4.7)
Yes
No
Set P204 to 7 (set P031, P032, P205, speed controller setting calculation to 1)(start selfsetting) Wait until P205 is set to 0
Inhibit all enable signals
Set P051 to 4H (remove write protection)
Repeat the procedure for all changed motor data sets
AM
9
AM/6-99
07.94
Set P056 again to 0 H
Check, and if required, change the following parameters: P014 P015 P024 P016 P017 P029 P021 to P023, P027 P039 to P043 P047 P057 to P058 P059 to P060 P081 to P089 P113 to P114 normalization nset offset correction nset normalization nset rampup time, rampfct. generator 1 rampdown time, rampfct. generator 1 maximum motor speed nmaxmot relay response values of the speed monitoring torque limits opencontrolled range limits freelyprogrammable terminal functions speed setpoints freelyprogrammable Relay functions
AM
P185 to P194, P241 to P246
11
AM/6-100
07.94
11
Set P052 to 1H. Wait until P052 is again set to 0H. The changed values are then transferred into the FEPROM
Check all parameterized functions and if required change
Values changed?
No
Yes
Set P052 to 1H. Wait until P052 is again set to 0H. The changed values are then transferred into the FEPROM
AM
Set P051 to 0H. Set write protection
After startup, save the parameter values in a file or document them in list form
End
AM/6-101
6.2 Power module code numbers Induction motor modules (AM)
04.97 03.96 07.94
6.2
Table 6-1 Power mod. type
Power module code numbers

Power module code numbers Order No. 6SN11231AA0V 6SN11241AA0V 6SN11401BA1V 0HAV 0AAV 0BAV 0CAV 0DAV 0LAV 0GAV 0EAV 0FAV 0JAV 0KAV Rated output current [A] Peak output current, briefly S60% 10min [A] 3 5 10 32 40 60 60 80 110 150 250 Peak output current, briefly S60% 10s [A] 3 8 16 32 51 76 76 102 127 193 257 Power module code number P095 1 2 4 6 7 13 8 9 10 11 12 FW 2.00 FW 2.00 FW 2.10 FW 2.10 FW 2.10
8A 15 A 25 A 50 A 80 A 108 A 120 A 160 A 200 A 300 A 400 A
3 5 8 24 30 45 45 60 85 120 200
AM
Enter the Order No. (MLFB No.)
Fig. 6-1
Position of the Order No. (MLFB No.)
AM/6-102
03.96 07.94
6.3
Connections
Overview
S Connecting diagram SIMODRIVE 611 analog system S Terminals S relay terminals

Warning The shields and unused cores of power cables (e.g. unused brake conductors in the cable) must be connected to PE potential in order to discharge charging currents cause by capacitive coupling effects. Hazardous voltages could be present, resulting in death or serious injury, if this is not observed.
Note: When non-PELV circuits are used at terminals AS1, AS2, connector coding must be used so that the connector cannot be interchanged (refer to EN602041, Section 6.4) Order No. of the coding connector, refer to Catalog NC60.1
AM
AM/6-103
04.97 03.96 07.94
Connection diagram SIMODRIVE 611 analog system

NE module X111 74 Ready signal Group signal I2t temperature monitoring Pulse enable Drive enable X141 X121 73.2 73.1 X1 72 5.3 5.2 5.1 63 9 9 64 19 7 45 44 10 15 15 R 9 112 48 111 213 113 NS1 NS2 AS1 AS2 Signal. contact 5 V Start inhibit UNIT VDC link>> X351 IR X2 X432 BERO input3) IM module X412 Motor temperature sensor3)
M
X421 X451 A91 56 14 24 8 X431 663 65 81 E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E7 E8 E9 9 X411
nset1 EN+ EN+ FR P24 P15 N15 N24 M M RESET EN+ nset22) External IF RF HSS T. 11) T. 21) T. 31) T. 41) T. 51) T. 61) T. 71) T. 81) T. 91) EN+ RS232C interface
M
A92
DAU 12) DAU 22) Internal Relay 11) Relay 21) Relay 31) Relay 41) Relay 51) Relay 61) Ready Fault Signal. contact Start inhibit
M
X441 289 A11 A21 A31 A41 A51 A61 672 673 674 AS1 AS2 X442
X161 Settingup contactor control Signal. contact Line contactor X171
AM
X172 SPP EXT X181

M500 P500 2U1 1U1 2V1 1V1 2W1 1W1
X151
Equipment bus
DC link
P 600 M 600
U1 V1 W1 L1 L2 L3 FN LK
PE1
X131
U2 V2 W2 PE1 PE2
at
M 3
from the NC
PE
!
Fig. 6-2
Warning!
If a power contactor is used between the motor and the induction motor module, then it must be ensured that this contactor is only switched in a nocurrent condition. (When shutting down, first cancel the pulses (terminal 663), then 40 ms later, the contactor).
connecting diagram
1) freelyprogrammable inputs and outputs 2) Function not possible with Order No. 6SN11220BA110AA0 3) From Order No. 6SN112V1AV0VVVA1
AM/6-104
X351
04.97 03.96 07.94
Table 6-2 T. No. U2 V2 W2 PE1 PE2 P600 M600 X151/351 56 14 24 8 663 65 81 E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E7 E8 E9 94) A91 M A92 M X1 X2 IR M X421 X421 X421 X421 X431 X431 X431 X431 X431 X431 X431 X431 X431 X431 X431 X431 X431 X451 X451 X451 X451 Terminals Location Function Type
1)
Typ. voltage/ limit values 3ph. 0...450 V AC 0V 0V +300 V 300 V Various "10 V (max. "11 V) "10 V (max. "11 V) +21 V...+33 V +13 V...+30 V +13 V...+30 V +13 V...+30 V +13 V...+30 V +13 V...+30 V +13 V...+30 V +13 V...+30 V +13 V...+30 V +13 V...+30 V +13 V...+30 V +13 V...+30 V +24 V "10 V 3 mA 0V "10 V 3 mA 0V 0 V...5 V 3 mA 0 V...5 V 3 mA "10 V 3 mA 0V
Max. crosssection
Motor connection
Acc. to configuring guide
Protective conductor Protective conductor DC link DC link Equipment bus Speed setpoint 1 (differential input) Speed setpoint 2 (differential input) Axisspecific pulse enable Controller enable RFG fast stop Freelyprogramm. enable t. 12) Freelyprogramm. enable t. 22) Freelyprogramm. enable t. 32) Freelyprogramm. enable t. 42) Freelyprogramm. enable t. 52) Freelyprogramm. enable t. 62) Freelyprogramm. enable t. 72) Freelyprogramm. enable t. 82) Freelyprogramm. enable t. 92) Enable voltage Analog output, DAU 13) Ref. potential for DAU 13) Analog output, DAU 23) Ref. potential for DAU 23) Test socket Test socket Test socket Test socket
I O I/O I/O I/O I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I O O O O O O O O O
Bolt Bolt Busbar Busbar Ribbon cable 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 Test socket, 2 mm diameter Test socket, 2 mm diameter Test socket, 2 mm diameter Test socket, 2 mm diameter
AM
1) 2) 3) 4)
I = input O = output can be freelyprogrammed via operator control parameters Function not possible with Order No. 6SN11220BA110AA0 Refer to Section NE 3.1... 3.2
AM/6-105
07.94
Relay terminals
Table 6-3 T. No. 289 A11 A21 A31 A41 A51 A61 672 673 674 AS 1 AS 2 relay terminals Location X441 X441 X441 X441 X441 X441 X441 X441 X441 X441 X441 X441 Function Center contact signals Freelyprogramm. relay fct. 12) Freelyprogramm. relay fct. 22) Freelyprogramm. relay fct. 32) Freelyprogramm. relay fct. 42) Freelyprogramm. relay fct. 52) Freelyprogramm. relay fct. 62) Ready/ no axisspecific fault Signal. contact Start inhibit Type
1)
Typ. voltage/ limit values 30 V/6.0 A max 30 V/1.0 A max 30 V/1.0 A max 30 V/1.0 A max 30 V/1.0 A max 30 V/1.0 A max 30 V/1.0 A max 30 V/1.0 A max 30 V/1.0 A max 30 V/1.0 A max 250 VAC/2.9 A max 250 VAC/2.9 A max
Max. crosssection 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2
I NO NO NO NO NO NO NO I NC I NC
6.4
6.4.1
Interfaces
X432 connector assignment for BERO
PIN NO. Signal name EN+ BERO FR Explanation +24V Signal Ground 10 14 15
AM
The other pins may not be assigned.
6.4.2
X412 connector assignment for the motor temperature sensor

PIN NO. 14 15 Signal name + Temp Temp
The other pins may not be assigned.
6.4.3
X411 serial interfaces

PIN NO. 2 3 5 Signal name TxD RxD M5
1) I = input
NC = NC contact
NO = NO contact
2) can be freelyprogrammed via operator control parameters
AM/6-106
07.94
6.5 Addresses, RAM variables Induction motor modules (AM)
6.5
Addresses, RAM variables

The following is valid for all address information: Segment address P249 = 0H
Table 6-4 Addresses, RAM variables Variable Calculated speed actual value (absolute value) Utilization Calculated speed actual value Torque setpoint Absolute current value (actual value) Absolute current value (setpoint) Torquegenerating current (setpoint) Fieldgenerating current (setpoint) Speed setpoint (after the rampfunction generator) Field angle (setpoint) Field angle (actual value) Active power (actual value) Reactive power (actual value) Integral component, speed controller Integral component, field controller Magnetization current (calculated) Address 11B6H 11B8H 1110H 10ECH 10C6H 10C4H 10D2H 10CAH 0E02H 1140H 1142H 1148H 114AH 117CH 116AH 10E6H Value 7FFFH 7FFFH 7FFFH 2000H 2000H 2000H 2000H 2000H 7FFFH 10000H 10000H 2000H 2000H 2000H 2000H 2000H Corresponds to nmax (P174/P029) Act. torque limit 37499 RPM Mdrated Imot. n Imot. n Imot. n Imot. n 37499 RPM 2 2 PS rated PS rated Mdrated Imot. n Imot. n
AM
AM/6-107
6.6 Setting and checking data (Parameter list) Induction motor modules (AM)
04.97 07.94
6.6
Setting and checking data (Parameter list)

Fields with grey background: Data entry not possible Dependent parameters/subparameters No data M G F generallyvalid parameters motordependent parameters gearbox stagedependent parameters fixed setpointdependent parameters
AM
AM/6-108
04.97 07.94
PNo. 1 special characters 32000...32000 32000...32000 399.0...399.0 0.0...100.0 % Hz V % % % V hex % % maxmot hex s s dec hex hex 10 8 3000 10.0 10.0 0...32000 0...FFFF 100 maxmot maxmot maxmot V V maxmot hex 1250...1250 0...700 0.0...399.0 0.0...399.0 399.0...399.0 0.0...450.0 0...FFFF 1000.0...1000.0 1000.0...1000.0 32000...32000 E000...2000 0.00...320.00 0.00...320.00 0.00 0.00 0 4.00...100.00 E000...2000 0...00FF 2...16000 2...16000 0...32000 2.0...10.0 2.0...10.0 0.00 0 n RPM 100.0 100.0 % maxmot maxmot 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 2.2.1 5.1.1 5.1.1 5.1.1 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 5.1.1 5.1.1 5.1.1 5.1.1 5.1.1 5.1.1 5.1.1 5.1.2 3.3.4 3.3.4 M 3.1 3.1 M 4.1 4.1 4.1 3.1 M 5.1.3 3.3.2 2.2.3 3.3.2 3.1 3.1 G 3.3.2 5.1.3 G M G M M 1.10 1.10 1.10
Desig.
FirmSec. ware status Setting range Setting Dim. Settings
(P003) Torquegenerating current
(P004) Utilization
(P005) Motor frequency
(P006) DC link voltage
(P007) Motor current
(P008) Field current component
(P009) Active power
(P010) Voltage actual value
(P011) Status of the binary inputs
P012 Normalization, DAU, channel 1
P013 Normalization, DAU, channel 2
P015 Offset correction, setpoint channel 1
P016 Rampup time, RFG 1
P017 Rampdown time, RFG 1
P018 Initial roundingoff
P019 Offset correction, setpoint channel 2
(P020) Executed selfsetting
P021 n min for n act < n min signal
P023 n x for n act < n x signal
P024 Normalization, setpoint channel 1
P025 Normalization, setpoint channel 2
P027 Toler. bandwidth for n set = nact signal
AM/6-109
(P028) Diagnostics
AM
AM
Setting range Setting Dim. 1 0...32000 0...32000 0.0...255.9 10.0...6000.0 0.0...600.0 40.0
100 A/Vs
PNo. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 G M M M M M M 4.2 5.1.1 G 2.2.3 1.10 2.2.3 1.10 4.1 4.1 1.10 0.0...100.0 0...32000 6000 0 hex dec hex maxmot maxmot dec % 100 100 100 0 150 0...170 0...600 30 240 % % % V deg. C 0...170 deg. C s 0 1 0 0 0 90 0...7FFF 0...1 0...FFFF 0...32000 0...32000 0...4 0...150 0...399 0...399 0...399 0...700 maxmot 90.0 % 3.3.2 1.10 4.5 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.3 1.3 1.3 M 4.6 4.6 2.3 M 4.4 4.4 4.5 4.5 2.1 M 2.2.3nd 3.00 2.2.3nd 3.00 2.2.3nd3.00 M M M M 0.00...320.00 5.00 s 1.10 0.00...320.00 5.00 s 0...399 50 % G M M G G 0...399 % 100 3.0 2.8 ... 7.8 kHz 1.10 0...7 hex 0 4.3 1.10 30.0 5.0...600.0 dec 4.3 1.10 4.1 1.10 140.0 dec 4.1 1.10 50.0 dec 4.6 0 maxmot 1.10 2.2.3 1.10 6000 maxmot
Desig.
Firm Sec. ware status Settings
AM/6-110
P029
Speed limiting
P030
Min. steadystate speed
P031
P gain, speed controller
P032
Integral action time, speed controller
P034
P gain, field controller
P035
Integral action time, field controller
P036
Inverter clock frequency
P037
Actual inverter clock frequency
P039
1st torque limit value
P041
2nd torque limit value
P042
Rampup time, RFG 2
P043
Rampdown time, RFG 2
P047
M dx for M d < M dx signal
P050
Changeover speed from to M d2 d1M
P051
Write protection
P052
Transfer parameter into FEPROM
P053
Control word
P054
Suppress range, lower speed
P055
Suppress range, upper speed
P056
Motor selection
P057
Current setp. for openloop controlled op.
P058
Accel. torque in the openl. contr. range
P059
Current limiting
P060
Output limiting
P061
Fixed DC link voltage
P063
Maximum motor temperature (KTY84)
P064
Fixed temperature
04.97 07.94
P065
Timer stage, motor temperature alarm
04.97 07.94
PNo. 1 0...FFFF hex hex hex hex hex hex incr. hex hex incr. incr. incr. dec dec dec dec dec dec dec dec dec hex 000D 3 0 0 32000...32000 dec dec hex dec maxmot 0...F 0 11B8 0 10D2 0 0 1110 0 0 0 0 1 7 3 17 18 19 9 10 11 0...FFFF 0...F 0...FFFF 0...F 127...127 0...FFFF 0...F 127...127 127...127 127...127 1...21 1...21 1...21 1...21 1...21 1...21 1...21 1...21 1...21 0...FFFF 4...10 0...7 0...1 0.00...99.99 special characters 11B6 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 3.3.4 1.10 3.3.4 1.10 3.3.4 1.10 3.3.4 1.10 5.1.4 5.1.4 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 5.1.4 5.1.4 5.1.4 3.3.4 3.3.4 5.1.4 3.2.2 3.2.2 3.2.2 3.2.2 3.2.2 3.2.2 3.2.2 3.2.2 3.2.2 1.3 2.1 M 2.1 2.1 2.2.2 2.2.1 5.1.1 1.10
Desig.
FirmSec. ware status Setting range Setting Dim. Settings
P066
Address, DAU 1
P067
Shift factor, DAU 1
P068
Address, DAU 2
P069
Shift factor DAU 2
P072
Address, DAU 4
P073
Shift factor, DAU 4
P074
Offset, DAU 4
P076
Address, DAU 3
P077
Shift factor, DAU 3
P078
Offset, DAU 1
P079
Offset, DAU 2
P080
Offset, DAU 3
P081
P082
P083
P084
P085
P086
P087
P088
P089
P090
Control word
P095
Power section code number
P096
Motor code number
P097
Initialization
(P099) Firmware release
AM/6-111
AM
AM
Setting range Setting Dim. 1 6 32000...32000 0...170 0...9 32000...32000 maxmot maxmot dec dec maxmot 32000...32000 0 2 2 0 0 65535 maxmot 0 0 0 0 0 1.000 1.000 0.000 0.0 0.00 0.00 379.00 1500 50.0 gm 2 kW A V maxmot Hz A 0.000 0.000 0.000...65.000 0.000...65.000 0.000 mH s s maxmot maxmot dec dec hex maxmot 0...255 0...300 32000 ... 32000 0...10 0...65535 0...65535 0...7FFF 0...1 1...1 32000...32000 32000...32000 0.002...60.000 0.002...60.000 0.000...65.000 0.0...6535.5 0.00...650.00 0.00...650.00 0.00...650.00 0...65000 0.0...1200.0 0 1 dec deg. C maxmot 2 3 4 7 8
PNo. 5.1.1 5.1.1 3.00 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 2.00 3.1 F 3.1 M 4.2 3.1 1.10
Desig.
FirmSec. ware status Settings 5
AM/6-112
F 3.1 M 2.2.3 3.00 5.1.1 3.00 1.3 1.3 1.3 2.2.3 1.10 2.2.3 1.10 2.2.3 1.10 2.2.3 1.10 M 2.1 4.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 4.2 2.1 2.1 2.1 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 M M M M M M M M M M 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 0.00...I rated pow.sec. 0.00 0.000...65.000
(P110) Motor temperature
P113 Channel selection, speed setpoint
P114 Fixed setpoints, 1 to 7
P114 Motorized potentiometer setpoint
P115 P gain current controller base speed range
P116 P gain current controller field weaken. range M 4.2
P119 Fixed setpoints 8 to 15
P131
Pulse number, speed monitoring BERO
P132 Shutdown threshold, speed monitoring BERO M 2.2.3 3.00
(P133) Speed actual value amount BERO
P151 Write protection
P152 Transfer parameter into FEPROM
P153 Calculate motor/controller data
P159 Motor and external moment of inertia
04.97 07.94
04.97 07.94
PNo. 1 6 2 3 4 7 8 M M M M 1.10 1.10 0.0...500.0 0...65535 0.000...1.000 0...3 0...FFFF 0...FFFF 1110 0 0.00 0.00 1 1110 0 0 0 1 0 0 50.0 10.0 100 0...1 0 s hex maxmot maxmot dec dec % hex 0 ... FFFF dec s hex hex hex s s hex hex hex hex 0...FFFF 0...FFFF 0...FFFF 0.00...10.00 0.00...10.00 0...7FFF 0...FFFF 0...FFFF 0.00...10.00 0.00...10.00 0...7FFF 0...32000 0...32000 0.0...255.9 0.0...255.9 1...150 1110 hex 0 hex 0.800 32767 maxmot 1.0 min 0...32000 1500 maxmot M M 2.2.3 1.10 2.1 2.1 5.1.5 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 2.00 1.10 5.1.5 5.1.5 5.1.5 3.3.3 3.3.3 3.3.3 3.3.3 3.3.3 3.3.3 3.3.3 3.3.3 3.3.3 3.3.3 M 4.1 4.1 4.1 4.1 4.1 5.13 M 4.1 M M M M 1.10 1.10 M M 2.1 2.1 0...32000 1500 maxmot 2.1 1.10 0...32000 300 maxmot 2.1 1.10 0.00...650.00 0.00 2.1 1.10 0.000...65.000 0.000
Desig. Setting Dim.
FirmSec. ware status Setting range Settings 5
P172 Changeover speed, open/closed l. control
P173 Speed at start of field weakening
P174 Max. motor speed
P175 Thermal motor time constant
P176 Stall torque speed
P178 Power factor cos
P179 Selection, min/max memory
P181 Address for min/max memory
(P182) Min. value, min/max memory
(P183) Max. value, min/max memory
P197 P gain lower adaptation speed
P198 P gain upper adaptation speed
P199 P gain reduction factor
(P200) Checksum parameter
AM/6-113
P203 Select, speed controller adaptation
AM
AM
Setting range Setting Dim. 1 2 6 3 4 5 0...7 0...1 0...1 0...C 0...FFFF 0...FFFF 0...FFFF 0...FFFF 0...FFFF 0...FFFF 0...1 0...15 0...15 0...FFFF 0...FFFF 0 ... 15 kgm dec dec dec dec dec 2 0 0 0 dec hex hex hex 1...20 1...20 1...20 1...20 1...20 1...20 0...FFFF 0...FFFF 0...FFFF 0...FFFF 0...FFFF 0...FFFF hex hex 5 4 1 3 20 0 2 7FFF hex 0 hex 0 dec 0 dec 0 hex 10D2 hex 1110 hex 0 hex 0 hex 0 hex 0 hex 0 hex 0 hex 0 dec 0 dec 7 8 Settings
PNo. 4 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 4 5.1.6 5.1.6 5.1.6 5.1.6 5.1.6 5.1.6 5.1.6 5.1.6 5.1.6 1.10 5.1.6 1.10 5.1.6 1.10 5.1.6 1.10 5.1.6 1.10 M 4.1 3.3.2 3.3.2 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 3.3.2 3.3.2 3.3.2 3.3.2 3.3.2 2.4 2.4 2.4 5.1.2 1.10 5.1.2 1.10 1.10 2.00
Desig.
FirmSec. ware status
AM/6-114
P204 Selfoptimization, function selection
P205 Start selfoptimization
P206 Select transient recorder
P207 Set transient recorder
P208 Address for the start condition
P209 Threshold for the start condition
P210 Address for stop condition
P211 Threshold for the stop condition
P214 Start trace output
P219 Additional moment of inertia
P241 Programmable signal 1
P247 Control word signal
P249 Segment, memory location monitor
P250 Address, memory location monitor
(P251) Value display, memory location monitor
04.97 07.94
04.97 07.94
Customer: Machine: Value / / 0 IM module: Motor type: Motor parameter set A 2p = Comments Deepbar squirrelcage rotor yes/no Changeover, with/without pulse cancel. No. P095 P096 P056 P099 No. P160 P161 P162 P163 P164 P174 P178 Units kW A V maxmot Hz maxmot dec Rating plate data Comments Date:
Jumpers in the terminal box Calculated value P153 = +1 Units Selfoptimized value Postoptimized value P204 = A 3 6 Comments
4 maxmot maxmot maxmot Postoptimized value Comments Units dec dec 100 A/Vs dec dec dec gm 2 kgm 2 hex hex Units dec hex mH Comments No. P166 P167 P168 P169 P170 P171 P172 P173 P176 Calculated value P153 = 1 140 No. P031 P032 P034 P035 P115 P116 P159 P219 (P251) (P251) 1 1 5 5 2 2 Value No. P018 P036 P158 8 8 Selfoptimized value P204 = 7 7
Initialization values and motor type Parameter Power section code number Motor code number Motor selection Firmware release Motor data Parameter Rated motor output Rated motor current Rated motor voltage Rated motor speed Rated motor frequency Max. motor speed Power factor cos Circuit configuration / Equivalent circuit diagram data Parameter Motor noload current Stator resistance, cold Rotor resistance, cold Stator leakage reactance Rotor leakage reactance Main field reactance Changeover speed, open/closed l. control Speed at start of field weakening Stall torque speed Controller data Parameter P gain, speed controller Integral action time, speed controller P gain, field controller Integral action time, field controller P gain current controller, base speed range P gain current controller, fieldweakening range Motor and external moment of inertia Additional moment of inertia Offset, active power P250 = Offset, reactive power P250 =
Special settings Parameter Initial roundingoff Converter switching frequency Series reactor inductance
AM/6-115
AM
04.97 07.94
AM
AM/6-116
Spare parts (Sp)
1 2
Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting clamps for cable shields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ES/1-3 ES/2-5 ES/2-5 ES/2-6 ES/2-6 ES/2-6
ES
ESi
03.96 07.94
1 Components Spare parts (Sp)
Components
1
J
All of the components listed in Catalogs NC 60.1 and NC Z (motors, modules, control boards, cables, connectors, etc.) are available as spare part.
ES
ES/1-3
1 Components Spare parts (Sp)
07.94
ES
ES/1-4
03.96 07.94
2.1 Connectors Spare parts (Sp)
Accessories
2
When required, the connectors listed in Table 2-1 (customer interfaces) can be ordered as spare parts.
Table 2-1 Connectors Grid dimension 5.08 5.08 5.08 5.08 5.08 5.08 7.60 5.08 5.08 5.08 3 pin 3 pin Order No. MLFB 6SY9433 6SY9906 6SY9432 6SY9896 6SY9898 6SY9897 6SY9900 6SY9901 6SY9903 6SY9902 6SY9904 6SY9905
2.1
Connectors
Pin No./connector type 2 3 4 6 7 8 8

1)
12 13 15 Power connector motor connection Power connector pulsed resistor connection
ES
Connector, BERO, temperature sensor The external radial blower is connected via a connector, which is comprised of the following components from the AMP company: Connector housing MateNLok Crimp contacts 3507661 9268841
1) only for connector X181 at the supply infeed modules
ES/2-5
2.2 Cable Spare parts (Sp)
03.96 07.94
2.2
Cable
50 mm equipment bus cable, Item No. 462 0080126.00
2.3
Fuses
Refer to the Planning Guide for recommended line fuses.
2.4
Connecting clamps for cable shields

Refer to the Planning Guide (dimension drawings).
ES
ES/2-6
04.97 07.94
Index
A
Adaptation tables, VS/1-5, VR/1-5 Address, RAM variables, HS/6-112 Addresses, RAM variable, AM/6-107 Analog output, HS/3-65 Fine normalization, HS/3-67 M/Mrated display, HS/3-67 nact display, HS/3-67 P/Pmax display, HS/3-67 Parameterization DAU 1, DAU 2, HS/3-66 Analog outputs, AM/3-48 Connection for analog displays, AM/3-50 Parameterization DAU, AM/3-49
Current controller setting, VS/1-3, VR/1-5 Current derating for inverter clock frequencies > 3.2 kHz, HS/1-11 Current reduction at inverter clock frequencies > 3.2 kHz, AM/4-58 Current setpoint limiting, VR/3-17
D
DAU, HS/3-66, AM/3-48 DC link voltage, AM/2-16 Diagnostic parameters, HS/5-81, AM/5-79 Diagnostics, VS/8-45, VR/8-29, HS/5-77, AM/5-75 Display, HS/2-24, HS/5-87, AM/2-22, AM/5-87 Display elements, of the monitoring and NE modules, NE/2-7 Display elements of the feed modules, VS/8-45 Display parameters, HS/2-24, HS/5-77, AM/2-22 Drift offset, VS/2-23, VR/2-16
B
Bit, HS/1-6 Block diagram, component side, VR/9-32 Block diagram, MSD option board, VS/9-52 Block diagram, parameter board, VS/9-53 Block diagram, solder side, VR/9-33 Board code, HS/2-25 Builtin motors, HS/6-102
E
Electronic weight equalization, VS/3-30, VS/3-32, VR/3-19 Encoder phase error correction, HS/2-26 Equipment status, HS/2-24, AM/2-22
C
C axis, HS/2-30 Caxis, HS/2-24, HS/3-57 Caxis operation, VS/5-39 Cable, ES/2-6 Changeover speed, AM/2-18, AM/2-21 Code numbers for the power module and standard motors, HS/6-99 Component replacement, HS/1-7, AM/1-8 Component side, VR/3-18, VR/9-32 Connection overview Connecting diagram, HS/6-104 Connecting terminals, HS/6-105, AM/6-105 Connection diagram, AM/6-104 Relay terminals, HS/6-106, AM/6-106 Star/delta changeover, HS/6-107 Connections, HS/1-13, AM/1-14 Connector assignment, VR/9-35 for Bero, HS/6-109 Motor encoder signal output, HS/6-110 Spindle encoder cable, HS/6-109 Connectors, ES/2-5 Control parameters, AM/1-10 Current actual value normalization, VS/1-4, VR/1-5 Current controller, HS/4-75, AM/4-57 Current controller gain, VS/1-4, VR/1-5
F
Fault, HS/5-91, AM/5-88 acknowledgment, HS/5-87, AM/5-87 display, HS/5-87, AM/5-87 suppression, HS/5-87, AM/5-87 Fault display, VS/8-46 Fault message, VR/3-18, AM/5-88 Field controller, AM/4-59, AM/4-69 Fieldweakening range, AM/2-21, AM/4-65 Filter, HS/4-74 Firmware release, AM/2-23 Firmware replacement, HS/1-7, AM/1-7 Firmware version, HS/2-25 Fixed setpoints, AM/3-38 Flux adaptation, HS/2-51 Functions via fixed values, VS/5-38
G
Gain Kp, VR/2-15 Gain Kp with adaptation, VS/2-21 Gain Kp without adaptation, VS/2-18 Gearbox stage, HS/2-24, AM/2-22
Index-1
04.97 07.94
H
Hexadecimal numbers, HS/1-6
Multimotor operation, AM/2-27
I
Initialization, AM/2-16, AM/2-21 Special motors, HS/2-17 Star/delta motors, HS/2-20 Initializing, Standard motors, HS/2-15 Input terminals, AM/3-40 Input terminals , HS/3-56 Integral action time limiting, VR/3-18, VR/3-20 Integral action time TN without adaptation, VS/2-19 Integral action time with adaptation, VS/2-20 Integral action time/speed controller, VR/2-16 Integrator inhibit, VR/3-18 Interfaces, AM/6-106 Inverter clock frequency, HS/3-57, HS/4-76, AM/4-57
N
Noload current, AM/4-70 Noload currents, AM/4-59 Noload motor current, AM/4-70 Normalization of the M/P display, VS/5-37
O
Openloop controlled range, AM/4-60 Openloop current/frequency control, AM/5-86 Openloop torque control operation, HS/2-43 Openloop torque controlled mode Master drive, HS/2-43 Slave drive, HS/2-43, HS/2-44 Torque setpoint, HS/2-44 openloop torque controlled mode, torque setpoint, HS/2-43 Openloop torque controlled operation, Function description, HS/2-43 Operating display, VS/8-45, HS/2-24, AM/2-22 Operating mode, HS/2-24, AM/2-22 Master, speed controlled, VR/3-18 master, speed controlled, VR/3-20 Master, speed controlled , VR/3-19 Slave, current controlled, VR/3-18, VR/3-19 slave, current controlled, VR/3-20 Operator control and display elements, HS/1-8, AM/1-9 Optimization, openloop controlled range, AM/4-60 Oriented spindle stop, HS/2-29 Oscillation, HS/2-28 Oscillation mode, AM/2-26 Output terminals, HS/3-59, AM/3-43
L
LED display, VR/8-29 Limit value stages, VS/5-37 Limiting the I component, VS/2-22 Limits, AM/4-61
M
M19, HS/2-24, HS/2-29 Magnetizing reactance, AM/4-71 Main field reactance , AM/2-18 Maintenance and diagnostics, VS/8-45, VR/8-29 Manual optimization, AM/4-64 Master/slave, VS/3-29, VR/3-18, VR/3-19 Master/slave operation, HS/2-43 Maximum speed monitoring, AM/2-23 Measured value displays, HS/5-77, AM/5-75 Minimal/maximum value memory, AM/5-83 Minimum speed, HS/3-55 steadystate, AM/4-62 Module replacement, HS/1-7, AM/1-8 Moment of inertia, AM/2-17, AM/4-53, AM/4-56, AM/6-98 Monitor function, AM/2-36 Motor changeover, AM/2-32 Motor code number, HS/6-99 Motor data set, HS/2-18, HS/2-21, AM/2-17 Motor rotor resistance, AM/2-17, AM/4-73 Motor temperature monitoring, HS/2-28, AM/2-25 Motorized potentiometer function, AM/3-37 MSD option board, VS/9-52
P
Parallel operation, AM/2-27 Parameter attributes, HS/1-5 Listing, AM/1-5 Number, AM/1-9 Subparameter number, AM/1-9 Transfer into FEPROM, HS/1-9 Value, AM/1-9 write protection, HS/1-6 Parameter board, VS/9-53 Parameter changeover for Caxis operation, VS/5-39 Parameter list, AM/6-108 Parameter set changeover, AM/2-32
Index-2
04.97 07.94
Parameters Attributes, AM/1-5 gearboxstage dependent, HS/1-8 list, HS/1-5 Number, HS/1-8 number, HS/1-5 Setting range, HS/1-5, HS/1-6, AM/1-5, AM/1-6 Subparameter number, HS/1-8 Value, HS/1-8 Write protection, HS/1-9, AM/1-6 Phase sequence of tracks A, B (WSG), VR/3-17 Pole numbers, VR/1-3 Position processing, VR/3-17 Power derating, AM/4-57 Power module code number, HS/6-99, AM/2-16 Poweringup, VR/7-27 Proportional gain Kp, VR/2-15 Proportional gain Kp with adaptation, VS/2-21 Proportional gain Kp without adaptation, VS/2-18 Pulse number of the WSG interface, VR/3-17
R
RAM variable, AM/6-107 RAM variables, HS/6-112 Rampfunction generator, HS/4-70, AM/4-54 tracking, AM/4-54 Rampup time, NE/2-10, VS/5-35 Reinitialize drive converter, HS/1-7, AM/1-7 Relay function, HS/2-24, AM/2-22 Control word, messages, HS/3-62, AM/3-46 Freelyprogrammable, HS/3-59 freelyprogrammable, AM/3-44 Messages which can be parameterized, HS/3-62 messages which can be parameterized, AM/3-46 Permanentlywired, HS/3-59 permanentlywired, AM/3-43 variable, HS/3-63, AM/3-47 RS232C interface, AM/1-7, AM/1-14
S
Series machines, HS/1-7, AM/1-8 Setpoint interfaces, VR/4-21 Setpoint priority, AM/3-39 Setting data, HS/1-12, AM/1-13 Setting elements with standard interface, VS/3-25, VR/4-21, VR/4-22 with userfriendly interface, VS/3-29 Setting settings, VS/1-3 Setting the integral action time, VR/2-16 Setting and checking data, AM/6-108 Settings via fixed values, VS/5-38
Shutdown without overshoot, AM/4-63 Shutdown without reverse rotation, AM/3-40 Slip monitoring, HS/2-45, HS/3-57 Smoothing, VR/3-18 Speed setpoint, HS/3-57, HS/4-69, HS/4-70, HS/4-76 Torque setpoint, HS/4-73 Solder side, VR/3-18, VR/9-33 Special motors Flux setpoint characteristic, HS/2-19 initialize, HS/2-17 Magnetizing inductance-Characteristic, HS/2-19 Motor data set, HS/2-18 Speed actual value normalization, VR/1-4 Speed controller Adaptation, HS/4-72, AM/4-55 Gain, HS/4-71, AM/4-55 Integral action time, HS/4-71, AM/4-55 Speed controller clock, AM/4-56 Speed range suppression, AM/4-63 Speed ranges, AM/4-62 Speed setpoint interface, HS/3-53 Channel selection, HS/3-53 Minimum speed, HS/3-55 Normalization, HS/3-54 Smoothing, HS/3-57 Unipolar input, HS/3-54 Speed setpoint interfaces, AM/3-37 Channel selection, AM/3-37 Setpoint priority, AM/3-39 Speed setpoint smoothing, HS/4-69, HS/4-70 Speed setting value, HS/2-26, AM/2-23 Spindle positioning, HS/2-30 Diagnostic parameters, HS/2-41 Function description, HS/2-30 Position controller, HS/2-36 Position reference value, HS/2-32, HS/2-33, HS/2-34, HS/2-40, HS/2-41, HS/3-57 Relay signal, HS/2-33 Search speed, HS/2-31, HS/2-32, HS/2-38, HS/2-40 Short startup, HS/2-42 Zero mark, HS/2-31, HS/2-33, HS/2-34, HS/2-35, HS/2-38, HS/2-41, HS/3-57 Zero pulse, HS/2-32, HS/2-37, HS/2-42 Standard applications, HS/1-4, HS/2-24, HS/2-26, AM/1-4, AM/2-22 Setting parameters, AM/2-23 Standard interface, VS/1-3 Standard motors, , HS/2-15 Standard settings, VR/1-3 Standard startup, VS/1-3, VR/1-3
Index-3
04.97 07.94
Star/delta motors, HS/6-101 Flux setpoint characteristic, HS/2-22 Initialization, HS/2-20 Magnetizing inductance-Characteristic, HS/2-22 Motor changeover, HS/2-23 Motor data set, HS/2-21 Startup instructions, AM/1-7 possibilities, AM/1-7 instructions, HS/1-7 New startup, AM/6-92 possibilities, HS/1-7 Short startup, VS/1-3, VR/1-3 Standard startup, VS/1-3, VR/1-3 Startup steps, VRii startup steps, VSii with main spindle drive option, VS/5-35 Status display active functions 1, AM/5-77 active functions 2, AM/5-78 Active terminal function, HS/5-79, HS/5-80 binary inputs, AM/5-76 Status displays, Binary inputs, HS/5-78 Steadystate minimum speed, AM/4-62 Subparameter number, HS/1-8, AM/1-9 Supplementary setpoint, VS/3-29
Terminal functions, Freelyprogrammable, HS/3-57 Terminals, VR/9-31 Test sockets, VR/8-29, VR/8-30, HS/5-82, AM/5-80 Test sockets and display elements Standard interface, VS/8-47 Userfriendly interface, VS/8-45 Timer, VS/3-29 Timer stage, VR/3-18 TN (integral action time), VR/2-16 Torque limit, AM/2-24 Torque limit value, HS/2-27 Torque limiting, VS/5-36 Torque setpoint smoothing, HS/4-73 Total moment of inertia, AM/4-56 Transient recorder function, HS/5-84, AM/5-84 Travel to endstop, VS/3-29 Troubleshooting, VS/8-48 Type plate, AM/1-14
U
Uncontrolled line supply infeed, HS/2-16 Userfriendly interface, VS/1-3
T
Tachometer adaptation, VS/1-3 Tachometer adjustment, VS/2-18, VR/2-14 Terminal function assignment, HS/3-57, AM/3-41 freelyprogrammable, AM/3-41 Permanentlywired, HS/3-56, AM/3-40
W
Watercooled motors, HS/6-101
Z
Zero mark offset, VR/3-17
Index-4

6sn1123 1aa00 0ca2 LT Modul 50a Simodrive 611 Siemens Manual

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originalbeschreibung:

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

6sn1123 1aa00 0ca2 LT Modul 50a Simodrive 611 Siemens Manual

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

SIMODRIVE 611 Analog System Transistor PWM Inverters for AC Feed Drives and AC Main Spindle Drives

Installation and Startup Guide 04.97 Edition

Feed modules Feed modules, resolver control

Main spindle modules

Induction motor modules

Equipment series 6SN11

Overview of SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FMNC Documentation (08.97)

Catalog Ordering Info. NC 60.1 Technical Info. NC 60.2

Catalog Accessories NCZ

Manufacturer / Service Documentation

Operators Guide Short Guide Operators Guide

Programming Guide Short Guide Fundamentals Advanced Cycles Measuring Cycles

Operators Guide MANUALTURN SHOPMILL

Description of Functions MANUALTURN SHOPMILL

Description of Functions Synchronous actions Wood, Glass, Ceramics

Description of Functions Computer LInk

Manufacturer / Service Documentation

Manual Configuring (HW) FMNC 810D 840D

Manual Operator Components (HW)

Description of Functions Drive Functions

Description of Functions Basic Machine Extended Functions Special Functions

Configuring KIt MMC100/101 Configuring Syntax Development Kit

Screen Kit MMC100/101 SW Update and Configuration

Manufacturer / Service Documentation

Description of Functions Tool Management

Description of Functions Operator Interface OP 030

Description of Functions Operator Interface HPU

Description of Functions SINUMERIK Safety Integrated

Description of Functions Digitizing

Installation & Start-up Guide FMNC 810D 840D/611D

DOC ON CD The SINUMERIK System

Status code in the Remarks column:

07.94 10.94 12.94 03.96

6SN11970AA600BP0 6SN11970AA600BP1 6SN11970AA600BP2 6SN11970AA600BP3

Dieses Buch ist Bestandteil der Dokumentation auf CDROM (DOCONCD)

Siemens AG 1994, 1996, 1997 All Rights reserved.

Order No. 6SN11970AA600BP4 Printed in the Federal Republic of Germany

Siemens AG 1997 All Rights reserved

S Trained in the proper care and use of protective equipment in accordance

S Trained in rendering first aid.

Wichtig This symbol appears in the documentation if a particular issue is significant.

Note When handling cables observe the following

S Further, all of the relevant national, local and plant/systemspecific

S All work should be undertaken with the system in a novoltage

S Boards may only be placed on conductive surfaces

S Boards may not be brought close to data terminals, monitors or television

S Measuring work may only be carried out on the boards if

S Only hold the control modules at the front panel

SINUMERIK and SIMODRIVE

S Are there line supply/motor contactors connected to the drive converter?

S When commissioning and fault finding, always proceed in a modular step

General information (AL)

Permissible combinations of inverter modules and control cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 Permissible combinations of inverter modules and control modules General (AL)

Permissible combinations of inverter modules and control cards

Feed drive resolver contr.,anal. 1axis, standard interface

Feed drive resolver contr.,anal. 2axis, standard interface

Feed drive control, analog 1axis, userfriendly interface

Main spindle drive control, ana no direct meas. system 6SN11210BA110AA0

Feed drive control, analog 2axis, standard interface

Feed drive control, analog 1axis, standard interface

Induction motor control, anal. Fixed setpoints, mot. pot. 6SN11220BA110AA0